Velocity Edge GX440 User guide

Add to my manuals
412 Pages

advertisement

Velocity Edge GX440 User guide | Manualzz

ALEOS 4.3.4

Software Configuration

User Guide

4114514

Rev 1

Important

Notice

Safety and

Hazards

Limitation of

Liability

Preface

Due to the nature of wireless communications, transmission and reception of data can never be guaranteed. Data may be delayed, corrupted (i.e., have errors) or be totally lost. Although significant delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the Sierra Wireless modem are used in a normal manner with a well-constructed network, the Sierra Wireless modem should not be used in situations where failure to transmit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or any other party, including but not limited to personal injury, death, or loss of property. Sierra Wireless accepts no responsibility for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or received using the Sierra Wireless modem, or for failure of the Sierra Wireless modem to transmit or receive such data.

Do not operate the Sierra Wireless modem in areas where blasting is in progress, where explosive atmospheres may be present, near medical equipment, near life support equipment, or any equipment which may be susceptible to any form of radio interference. In such areas, the Sierra Wireless modem

MUST BE

POWERED OFF

. The Sierra Wireless modem can transmit signals that could interfere with this equipment.

Note: Some airlines may permit the use of cellular phones while the aircraft is on the ground and the door is open. Sierra Wireless modems may be used at this time.

The driver or operator of any vehicle should not operate the Sierra Wireless modem while in control of a vehicle. Doing so will detract from the driver or operator's control and operation of that vehicle. In some states and provinces, operating such communications devices while in control of a vehicle is an offence.

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Sierra Wireless. SIERRA WIRELESS AND

ITS AFFILIATES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM LIABILITY FOR ANY AND ALL

DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, GENERAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,

PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR REVENUE

ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY SIERRA WIRELESS

PRODUCT, EVEN IF SIERRA WIRELESS AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR THEY ARE

FORESEEABLE OR FOR CLAIMS BY ANY THIRD PARTY.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event shall Sierra Wireless and/or its affiliates aggregate liability arising under or in connection with the Sierra Wireless product, regardless of the number of events, occurrences, or claims giving rise to liability, be in excess of the price paid by the purchaser for the Sierra Wireless product.

Rev 1 Oct.13

3

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Patents

Copyright

Trademarks

Contact

Information

This product may contain technology developed by or for Sierra Wireless Inc. This product includes technology licensed from QUALCOMM

®

. This product is manufactured or sold by Sierra Wireless Inc. or its affiliates under one or more patents licensed from InterDigital Group and MMP Portfolio Licensing.

© 2013 Sierra Wireless. All rights reserved.

Sierra Wireless

®

, AirPrime

®

, AirLink

®

, AirVantage

®

and the Sierra Wireless logo are registered trademarks of Sierra Wireless.

Watcher

®

is a registered trademark of NETGEAR

®

, Inc., used under license.

Windows

®

and Windows Vista

®

are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

Macintosh

®

and Mac OS X

®

are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

QUALCOMM

®

is a registered trademark of QUALCOMM Incorporated. Used under license.

Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

International Contact Information

Please contact your AirLink Reseller for technical support.

AirLink Sales

AirLink Support

AirLink RMA Repairs

AirLink Online Support

Knowledgebase

AirLink Software

Downloads

Corporate Web Site

[email protected]

[email protected]

[email protected]

www.sierrawireless.com/Support/SupportCenter www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads www.sierrawireless.com

Sierra Wireless Headquarters Contact Information

Postal Address: Sierra Wireless

13811 Wireless Way

Richmond, BC

Canada V6V 3A4

Consult our website for up-to-date product descriptions, documentation, application notes, firmware upgrades, troubleshooting tips, and press releases: www.sierrawireless.com

4 4114514

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Sierra Wireless AirLink Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

About Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Tools and Reference Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Main Menu Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Creating a Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Applying a Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

AT Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

SSH PAD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Update the ALEOS Software and Radio Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Step 1—Planning Your Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Step 2—Update the ALEOS Software and Radio Module Firmware . . . . 31

Enterprise LAN Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Configuring Your Device for use in a PCI Compliant System . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

WAN/Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

LAN/WiFi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Rev 1 Oct.13

5

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

6

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Private and Public Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

DHCP/Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Installing the USB Drivers for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Host Port Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Access Point Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Client Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Both (AP + Client) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Global DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

PPPOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Configure the AirLink Device to Support PPPoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Configuring a PPPoE Connection in Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

VRRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Host Interface Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

WAN/Cellular Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Re-Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Backup APN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Reliable Static Routing (RSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

VPN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

IPsec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Split Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

4114514

Contents

VPN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

IPsec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

GRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

SSL Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

VPN 2 to VPN 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Solicited vs. Unsolicited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Port Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

DMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Port Filtering—Inbound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Port Filtering — Outbound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Trusted IPs—Inbound (Friends) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Trusted IPs—Outbound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Packet Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Services Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

AVMS (AirVantage Management Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

ACEmanager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Low Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Dynamic DNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Understanding Domain Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Dynamic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

WiFi Landing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Password Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Control Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Gateway Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Control and Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Rev 1 Oct.13

7

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SMS Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

SMS Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Inbound SMS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Trusted Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

SMS Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

SMS > Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

SMSM2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Telnet/SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Email (SMTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Management (SNMP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Time (SNTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Device Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

GPS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

GPS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

ALEOS Supported GPS Report Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Before Configuring GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Servers 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Local/Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Local/Streaming—LATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Events Reporting Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Additional Behavior and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

8 4114514

Contents

Action Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Action Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Email/SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Report Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Configure Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Events Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Serial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Reverse Telnet/SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

UDP Multiple Unicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Modbus Address List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

I/O X-Card Serial Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

TCP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

UDP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Application Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Garmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

ALEOS Application Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Current State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Pulse Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Rev 1 Oct.13

9

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Transformed Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Radio Passthru. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Windows Dial-up Networking (DUN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Installing a Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Creating a Dial-Up Networking (PPP) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Connecting to the Internet Using DUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

ACEview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Windows DUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Modbus/BSAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Modbus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Configuring the AirLink Device at the Polling Host for Modbus on UDP 291

Configuring the Remote AirLink Devices for Modbus with UDP . . . . . . 292

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Management Information Base (MIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

SNMP Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Sierra Wireless MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

AT Command Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Device Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

10 4114514

Contents

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

WAN/Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

LAN/WiFi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Standard (Hayes) commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

SMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

SMS Command format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

List of SMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Rev 1 Oct.13

11

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Q & A and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

ACEmanager Web UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

LAN Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Port Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Poor Wireless Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Connection not working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Updating the ALEOS Software and Radio Module Firmware . . . . . . . . 386

TCP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

AirVantage Management Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

LTE Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

SIM Card is Blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Remote connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Radio Band Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Reliable Static Routing (RSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

12 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

1: Introduction

Note: This user guide is intended for the AirLink LS300 and the AirLink GX

Series devices. If you have an AirLink ES440, refer to the ALEOS Software

Configuration User Guide for the AirLInk ES440.

Overview

ACEmanager™ is the free, web-based utility used to manage and configure the AirLink

®

device. It is a web application integrated in the

ALEOS™ software that runs on the AirLink device. AirLink

Embedded Operating System (ALEOS) is purpose-built to maintain a wireless connection and to configure the gateway to the needs of the system. ACEmanager provides comprehensive configuration, monitoring, and control functionality to all AirLink gateways and routers.

ACEmanager enables you to:

Login and configure device parameters

Adjust network settings

Change security settings

Update events reporting and control outputs

Update ALEOS software and radio module firmware

Copy configuration settings to other AirLink devices

Since ACEmanager can be accessed remotely over-the-air as well as locally, the many features of ALEOS can be managed from any location.

An ALEOS configuration template can be created using

ACEmanager, after a single device is configured and installed, to program other AirLink gateways with the same configuration values.

This enables quick, accurate deployment of large pools of devices.

Sierra Wireless AirLink Products

ACEmanager is intended to be used with the following products with

ALEOS:

AirLink GX Series

AirLink LS300

AirLink ES440

1

13

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Choosing the right product for your needs

AirLink ES440 AirLink GX Series

Target Application Enterprise

(office, remote store, point-of-sale, etc.)

No GPS

Mobile and Industrial

(police, fire, fleets and oil, gas, rail, remote access)

GPS Location

Ingress Protection

Hazardous Location n/a n/a

Operating Temperature 0° to 40°C

Shock and Vibration 1 m drop test, nonoperational

Serial Features

Power

IP64

Class 1 Div.2

-30° to +70°C

Military Standard 810

Serial port: Reverse Telnet for OOBM

Serial Byte protocol support

(DNP3, Modbus, BSAP, DF1

[Allen-Bradley])

AC power only (12VDC) AC and DC power (9–36VDC)

Input/Output

Events Reporting

Warranty

No optional I/O

SNMP Trap events only

Optional I/O

Full Events Reporting,

SMS Events Reporting

1 Year Warranty

(Optional 3 Year Warranty)

5 Year Warranty

AirLink LS300

Industrial

(oil and gas utilities, remote solar panels)

GPS n/a

Class Div. 2

-30° to +70°C

Military Standard 810

Serial Byte protocol support

DNP3, Modbus, BSAP, DF1

[Allen-Bradley])

AC and DC power

Limited I/O

Full Events Reporting,

SMS Events Reporting

3 Year Warranty

For more information on specific AirLink products, refer to the hardware user guide, available from www.sierrawireless.com/en/Support/Downloads.aspx

.

About Documentation

Each chapter in the ALEOS Configuration User Guide describes a section (a tab in the user interface) of ACEmanager.

Chapters in this user guide explain:

Parameter descriptions in ACEmanager

Relevant configuration details

User scenarios for certain sections in the guide.

This User Guide is kept up to date and provided as a PDF (Portable Document

Format) file on the Sierra Wireless support website.

14 4114514

Introduction

Tools and Reference Documents

Document Description

AirLink Device User

Guide

This hardware document describes how to:

Install the AirLink device hardware

Connect the radio antennas

Connect a notebook computer and other input/output (I/O) devices

Interpret the LEDs and indicators on the AirLink device.

ACEview User Guide

This document explains how to use the ACEview utility to monitor the connection state of a

Sierra Wireless AirLink device and GPS or power status as applicable.

AVMS User Guide

This document explains how to use AirVantage Management Service for the remote management of Sierra Wireless AirLink devices.

Rev 1 Oct.13

15

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

16 4114514

2: Device Configuration

To access ACEmanager:

1.

Insert the SIM card, if applicable. Refer to the AirLink device user guide for details.

2.

Power on the AirLink device.

3.

Launch your browser and enter the IP address and port number http://192.168.13.31:9191

4.

Log in:

·

User Name: “user” (entered by default) or “viewer

Use the “user” login for configuring or monitoring your device.

Logging in as “viewer” only allows you to view the configuration and connection state. You cannot make any configuration changes.

·

Default Password: 12345

Note: ACEmanager has a 15 minute timeout. After 15 minutes of inactivity, you are redirected to the login screen.

To prevent others from changing the AirLink device settings, you can change the ACEmanager password (

Chapter 14 ).

2

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-1: ACEmanager: Main Login screen

After your initial login to ACEmanager, you have the option of displaying the device status parameters on subsequent login screens.

5.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > Device Status Screen.

6.

In the Device Status on Login Screen field, select Enable. (For details, see

Device Status Screen on page 183.)

17

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

18

Figure 2-2: ACEmanager: Main Login screen with Device Status

Main Menu Tabs

The main menu for ACEmanager, which appears across the top of the display, is as follows:

Firmware: Upgrades the ALEOS software

Upload: Loads configured information, in the form of a template, to the device

Download: Saves and copies a checked configuration to create a template. If no fields are checked, all fields are selected and saved automatically

Reboot: Reboots the device

Refresh All: Refreshes all ACEmanager pages

Configuring

There are two options for configuring the AirLink device:

1.

Use the browser based ACEmanager (as detailed in this guide); or

2.

Use a terminal emulator application (e.g., Tera Term, PuTTY, etc.) to enter AT commands for many of the configuration options.

Note: Most configuration changes go into effect only after rebooting the AirLink device.

4114514

Device Configuration

Creating a Template

If you have a device configuration that works well for your needs, you can use

ACEmanager to save that device’s configuration as a template and then apply it to other Sierra Wireless AirLink devices.

Templates can be created as either feature-specific or for all configurable features. Feature-specific templates are quicker and more reliable to apply from one device to another. Because only specific feature fields are included in the template, all other configuration elements are not altered. This allows for different configurations for particular features not to be overwritten.

To create a template with ACEmanager:

1.

Configure your AirLink device in ACEmanager.

2.

Click

Apply

(in the upper right hand corner of the ACEmanager screen) so that the configuration settings write to the device.

Note: When you click the Apply button on any tab, the changes made on all tabs are applied. You do not need to go into the individual tabs to apply changes.

a.

For feature-specific templates, check the boxes in front of the fields to be saved to the template. This allows you to have a template covering only the configuration items you want imported into another device. For tables, click the box at the top of the table to include the entire table.

b.

For templates with all configurable fields,

do not

check any of the boxes.

3.

Click

Download to save the template. A confirmation dialog box appears.

Figure 2-3: ACEmanager: Download Template Message

Note: There is a time delay as the template downloads. A yellow-lit text message of the downloading process appears.

4.

Click OK. The File Download box appears.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-4: ACEmanager: File Download Box

19

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

5.

Click Save (or OK depending on your system browser).

Note: Some of the configuration settings are specific to individual devices. Avoid having those settings in your saved template as the devices you configure with the template could cease to work with the cellular or local network. A feature specific template allows you to omit configuration elements which need to be specific to a device.

6.

Type in a file name that is descriptive of the template (to easily find it later) and save it to a location on your computer. Not all browsers allow you to change the name of the file while downloading. As long as you do not change the extension .xml, you can change the name and location of the file after it has downloaded.

The template downloads.

Applying a Template

You can use a template you created with the above steps, or a template provided by your AirLink representative or someone in your company who has set up a device template.

You can save the template to:

Your computer’s hard drive and apply it locally (following the instruction below)

An FTP site and use an AT command to apply the template remotely (for

more information, see *TPLUPDATE on page 323).

Note: You can apply templates that contain X-Card information, such as Wi-Fi configuration information, or Dual Ethernet X-Card fields, even when an X-Card is not present in a device. Those fields that do not apply to the device that the template is downloaded to are not displayed.

To apply the template locally to a device:

1.

Connect to the device you want to configure using ACEmanager.

2.

Click the Upload button on the toolbar.

Figure 2-5: ACEmanager: Load

3.

At the Upload window, click Browse, and select the template you have saved.

You may need to change folders if you saved it to a different location.

20 4114514

Device Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-6: ACEmanager: Select and Upload Template

4.

Click

Upload File to Modem

.

5.

Click

Load Template. As in the template creation process, there is a time delay as the template uploads.

Note: If you are uploading a large template, you may see pop-up windows referring to a script error. This is a time-out error. Retry once or twice before stopping the script and reloading the template.

Tip:

After you load the template, it’s best to go back over the ACEmanager tabs to make sure all the settings are what you require. Red asterisks ( * ) appear on the tabs that have been changed. Make any adjustments to the settings as needed.

6.

Click the Apply button on the toolbar to write the configuration to the device.

7.

Click OK.

8.

Click the Reboot tab to reset the device.

Caution:

Many configuration settings do not take effect until the device has been reset.

Tip:

Use the common settings on one device to configure the same settings on another device. For example, use the serial settings on one device to configure these settings on another device.

21

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

AT Command Mode

SSH PAD Mode

SSH PAD mode allows a PAD mode TCP connection to be encrypted using an

SSH tunnel and a serial connection to the router or other connected device.

Figure 2-7

shows the network configuration.

PAD server

12345

SSHD

22

Network

SSH client

(PuTTY)

Port: 12345 client localhost

22

74.198.207.51

AirLink device (server)

Serial connection to the AirLink device

Router or other connected device

Figure 2-7: SSH Network

208.81.123.30

Client

Note: For the purpose of illustration, this user guide uses port 12345 on the client, the default port 22 for creating an SSH section, and PuTTY as the SSH client throughout.

When configuring SSH PAD mode, you can use any SSH client and values that are appropriate for your network.

The main steps in establishing a secure connection are:

1.

Configure an SSH tunnel (on port 12345 in this example) on the client using an SSH client such as PuTTY.

2.

Using the SSH client configuration to create the tunnel, log into the AirLink device with the user name and password. The SSH server authenticates the user.

3.

The client application that wants to communicate with the PAD server on the

AirLink device connects to “localhost” on port 12345.

4.

Any data sent on this connection is tagged with a destination port of 12345.

5.

The data is received by the SSH server on the AirLink device.

6.

The SSH server receives the data with the tag of 12345 and uses port forwarding to send the data to the PAD server.

4114514

Device Configuration

Server Configuration

You can enable SSH PAD mode on ALEOS by using functionality in the Secure

Shell Daemon (SSHD) and by making some changes to the ACEmanager configuration. Currently, tunneled connections can only be initiated by a client that connects to the server on ALEOS.

Enabling SSH

The SSH Daemon must be running on the AirLink device. To enable it:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > Telnet/SSH, and in the Remote Login

Server Mode drop-down menu, select SSH.

2.

In the Remote Login Server Telnet/SSH Port field, enter the desired port number (or use the default SSH port 22).

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-8: ACEmanager: Services > Telnet/SSH

3.

Click Apply.

Enabling PAD Mode

ALEOS uses PAD mode to accept TCP connections. To enable PAD mode:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Serial > Port Configuration.

2.

Set DB9 Serial Echo to Disable.

3.

Set the Device Port field to the desired value (12345 in this example).

4.

Set the destination Address to the IP address of the client that will be connecting to the AirLink device in SSH PAD mode.

5.

Under Advanced, set Quiet Mode to Enable.

6.

Under TCP, set TCP Auto Answer to Enable.

23

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

24

Figure 2-9: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration

7.

Click Apply.

4114514

Device Configuration

Client Configuration

Creating Client Tunnel

Configure the SSH client to create a tunnel when it connects to the AirLink device.

(In this example, PuTTY is used to create the tunnel.)

1.

Create a new SSH session by entering the IP address of the AirLink device, and the configured port. (In this example, the IP Address of the AirLink device is 74.198.207.51 and default port 22 is used.)

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-10: PuTTY: Creating a new SSH session

2.

Click Save.

3.

Go to Connection > SSH > Tunnels.

4.

Create an SSH tunnel for the connection by creating a forwarded port.

In the Source port field, enter the same value as the Device Port field configured in ACEmanager Serial port configuration (12345 in this example). This is the port that the PAD session listens on for incoming connections.

In the Destination address field, enter the IP address of the AirLink device.

(You can find this in ACEmanager on the Status > Home page.) The port is also listening to the TCP port for PAD mode (Device Port on the Serial tab) which, in this example, is 12345.

25

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 2-11: PuTTY: Creating an SSH tunnel

5.

Leave the Local and Auto settings selected.

26

Figure 2-12: PuTTY: SSH tunnel created

6.

Click Add.

7.

Go to Connection > SSH.

4114514

Device Configuration

8.

Under Protocol options, select “Don’t start a shell or command at all” to prevent getting a command prompt.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-13: PuTTY: SSH Connection Settings

9.

Click Open to create a connection to the AirLink device. Log in with the user account.

10.

With the client application, establish a TCP connection to localhost using the configured port. (In this example, 12345.)

Important:

If you connect to the IP address of the AirLink device (74.198.207.51) instead of localhost, the tunnel is bypassed and the data is unencrypted.

All data transmitted to the AirLink device should now be encrypted.

27

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Update the ALEOS Software and Radio

Module Firmware

To take advantage of new features available in the latest version of ALEOS, update the ALEOS software and radio module firmware on your AirLink devices.

You can use ACEmanager to update one device at a time or AVMS to update one or multiple devices at the same time.

Step 1—Planning Your Update

1.

For each of the devices you want to update, make a note of the:

·

Device Model

·

Radio Module Type

·

Radio Firmware Version

·

ALEOS Software Version

·

Mobile Network Operator

Information for the first four bullets is available in AVMS and in ACEmanager

(Status > About). The ACEmanager Status > Home screen shows the Mobile

Network Operator.

Figure 2-14: ACEmanager: Status > About

2.

Refer to

Table 2-1

and

Table 2-2 on page 29 for the supported upgrades for

your device.

Table 2-1: GX Series Radio Module Firmware Supported with ALEOS a

Radio

Module Type

Current Radio Firmware Version

MC5728

Verizon

GX400

MC5728

p2813301 p2815600

4.3.3

ALEOS version:

4.3.3a

X

4.3.4

X

28 4114514

Device Configuration

Table 2-1: GX Series Radio Module Firmware Supported with ALEOS a

(Continued)

Radio

Module Type

Current Radio Firmware Version ALEOS version:

MC7700

SWI9200X_03.05.10.02AP R4684 CARMD-EN-10527 2012/02/25

11:58:38

4.3.3

4.3.3a

SWI9200X_03.05.14.00AP R5164 CARMD-EN-10527 2012/05/29

19:13:25

 

MC7750

SWI9600M_01.00.09.03AP R2492 CARMD-EN-10526 2011/07/01

SWI9600M_03.05.10.06ap r5595 carmd-en-10527 2012/11/12

X

X

X

X

SWI9600M_03.05.10.09ap r5700 carmd-en-10527 2013/03/12

10:37:48

MC8705

T1_0_3_2AP R361 CNSZXD00000061 2011/04/15 17:40:48

 

T1_0_4_3DAP R554 CNSZXD00000140 2012/08/21 13:10:40

T3_5_3_2AP R551 CNSZXD00000140 2012/06/05 18:03:33

T1_0_4_3CAP R460 CNSZXD00000128 2011/11/15 10:22:30

X

X a.



= Supported

X

= Not Supported. When updating the device, you will be prompted to use the supported radio module firmware.

4.3.4

X

X

X

Table 2-2: LS300 Radio Module Firmware Supported with ALEOS a

Radio

Module Type

Current Radio Firmware Version ALEOS version:

4.3.3

4.3.3a

4.3.4

SL5011

p3110506 p3110503

SL8090

SL8092

P1_0_0_8AP R1338 CNHKGDKCE01 2011/10/21 09:21:31

P1_0_0_8AP R1338 CNHKGDKCE01 2011/10/21 09:21:31

 a.



= Supported

X

= Not supported. When updating the device, you will be prompted to use the supported radio module firmware.

3.

Refer to the flowchart (

Figure 2-15 on page 30) to determine the ALEOS

software required.

4.

If you are planning to use ACEmanager to do the update:

a.

Go to www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads.aspx

and select your product and mobile network operator to get to the download page for your device.

b.

Download the new ALEOS software version for your system. If new Radio

Module firmware is required for this product, it will be included with the

ALEOS Software in a .zip file.

Rev 1 Oct.13

29

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

If you have any questions or concerns, contact Sierra Wireless Support.

(See

Contact Information on page 4.)

ALEOS Software and Radio Module Firmware Update Overview

AirLink Device?

LS300

ALEOS 4.3.2

ALEOS 4.3.3

ALEOS 4.3.3a/b

GX Series

Mobile Network Operator?

Verizon Wireless

(or earlier)

ALEOS 4.3.4

Current ALEOS version?

ALEOS 4.3.3a

ALEOS 4.3.3b

ALEOS 4.3.3

ALEOS 4.3.2a

ALEOS 4.3.1

Radio module update

ALEOS 4.3.3

ALEOS 4.3.2

ALEOS 4.3.4

ALEOS 4.3.4

Radio module update

Radio module update

GX440 only

ALEOS 4.3.2

ALEOS 4.3.2a

ALEOS 4.3.3

ALEOS 4.3.3a/b

ALEOS 4.3.4

Other

Current ALEOS version?

ALEOS 4.3.1

ALEOS 4.3.2

Radio module update

GX400 Open SIM (ROW)

*

ALEOS 4.3.2a

ALEOS 4.3.4

ALEOS 4.3.2a

ALEOS 4.3.4

ALEOS 4.3.3

Radio module update

30

ALEOS 4.3.4

Figure 2-15: ALEOS software update overview

*

Radio module firmware update only if firmware version is

T1_0_4_3CAP R460 CNSZXD00000128 2011/11/15 10:22:30

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Device Configuration

Recommendations

Sierra Wireless recommends that you contact your authorized Sierra Wireless distributor before updating the radio module firmware.

Scheduling the update

The update can take up to 30 minutes to complete, depending on the speed of your network connection. The AirLink device being updated will be off-line during the update, so take this into account when scheduling the update.

Important:

BE PATIENT! The firmware update can take up to 30 minutes to complete.

Ignore connection time out messages—the update process is still running.

Waiting for the process to complete is faster than troubleshooting the problems that can be caused by interrupting the process midway. (Interrupting the process may result in having to return the device to the factory for repairs.)

Step 2—Update the ALEOS Software and Radio

Module Firmware

Using ACEmanager to Update a Single AirLink Device

To update the ALEOS software and radio module firmware on one AirLink device:

1.

Connect the AirLink device you want to upgrade to your laptop, launch your browser and enter the URL for the device. The default IP address for the

Ethernet interface is http://192.168.13.31:9191 . If it is a remote device, enter the domain name or public IP (WAN) address.

Note: If you are connected to the device remotely, any files transferred to the device are transferred over-the-air and you may incur data charges. (For file size information, see the

flowchart on page 30 .)

2.

Log in to ACEmanager.

User name: user

Default password: 12345

3.

Click the Firmware link.

The Firmware Update window opens.

31

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

32

Figure 2-16: Firmware Update window

If you are updating from ALEOS 4.3.4 to 4.3.4-I, the update window shows the current ALEOS and radio module firmware versions and the device model. It also gives you the option to update both ALEOS and the radio module firmware, or update only the radio module firmware. Unless advised otherwise by Sierra

Wireless, we recommend that you select ALEOS software (which updates

ALEOS and prompts you to update the radio module firmware if a newer version is available for your device).

4114514

Device Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-17: ALEOS 4.3.4 Software and Firmware update window

4.

Click Browse... and navigate to the ALEOS software you downloaded from the Sierra Wireless Web site.

If you select a file that is not supported on your device, you will see a warning message similar to the following:

Unless you have been advised by Sierra Wireless to do so, we recommend you do not install an unsupported version of the radio module firmware. For a list of supported radio module firmware files for your device, see

Table 2-1 on

page 28 and Table 2-2 on page 29.

33

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

5.

Click Update Firmware.

The ALEOS software update runs automatically and green check marks appear beside each step, as it is completed. If you are doing the upgrade over-the-air (especially if you are doing a radio module update), it may occasionally appear as if the next step is beginning before the green check mark appears. This is a known issue in the UI and does not affect the update.

34

Figure 2-18: ALEOS software update in progress

4114514

Device Configuration

Important:

Do not disconnect the AirLink device from the computer, and do not power cycle or reset the device during the update. If you see any error messages, refer to the

Updating the ALEOS Software and Radio Module Firmware on page 386.

6.

Depending on the version of ALEOS you are updating to, ALEOS may check the radio module firmware and prompt you if it needs to be updated.

If you do not receive a prompt, the radio firmware is up to date. Proceed to

step 9.

If you are prompted to update the firmware, proceed to step 7.

7.

Under Applying Firmware, click Browse... and navigate to the radio module firmware you downloaded from the Sierra Wireless Web site.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 2-19: ALEOS software update in progress, prompt to update radio module firmware

If you are updating from ALEOS 4.3.4 to 4.3.4-I, you may be given the option to skip the radio module firmware.

We recommend that you do NOT skip the radio module firmware update unless advised to do so by Sierra Wireless. If you choose to skip the radio module firmware update, you’ll see the following warning.

35

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

8.

Click Upload Radio Firmware.

The radio module firmware may take 10 to 20 minutes to upload and install.

Important:

Do not disconnect the AirLink device from the computer or reboot the device while the firmware update is in progress. During the radio module firmware update, the device LEDs flash rapidly in sequence (an LED chase or caterpillar). When the radio module firmware update is complete, the device reboots automatically.

If you see a message saying that the connection has timed out, ignore the message and continue to wait for the device to reboot.

If you clicked OK when you saw the timed out message and logged back in, you’ll see the old version of the firmware. The firmware update process is still going on, so DO NOT reset the device or disconnect the power. DO NOT click

Cancel. Continue to wait the 10 to 20 minutes for the radio module firmware update to complete. The device reboots once the firmware update is complete.

36

Figure 2-20: Radio module firmware update in progress

9.

When the update is complete, the AirLink device reboots and you are returned to the Login screen.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Device Configuration

10.

When you see the Login screen, wait a few seconds to ensure that the reboot is complete and then log in.

11.

Go to Status > About.

12.

Click Refresh. Once the device has an IP address, check the ALEOS

Software Version and the Radio Firmware Version fields to confirm that the

ALEOS software and the radio module firmware have been updated.

If the ALEOS software version and the radio module firmware version have not been updated, repeat the firmware update.

Using AirVantage Management Service (AVMS) to Update One or Multiple AirLink Devices Over-the-Air

You can use AirVantage Management Service to update the ALEOS software and radio module firmware over-the-air on one or multiple AirLink devices.

If you don’t have an AVMS account:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to the Services tab and ensure that AVMS is enabled and the server URL is http://na.m2mop.net/msci/com . If this is not the case, enter the correct URL, click Apply and then click Reboot.

2.

Go to www.sierrawireless.com/en/productsandservices/AirVantage/Management_Service.aspx

for more information. To sign up for a free trial account, go to http://na.airvantage.net.

Updating to ALEOS software with an AVMS account:

3.

Go to http://na.airvantage.net/start and log in.

4.

Follow the instructions in the online AVMS documentation to update the

ALEOS software and radio module firmware.

Enterprise LAN Management

You can use AirLink devices in the following configurations:

Standalone with a connection to a single host

When using the AirLink device with a single host, ensure that the host is

DHCP enabled.

AirLink device host

With a router

The router allows several hosts to use the AirLink device’s connection to the network. When using the AirLink device with a router:

·

Configure the router to be DHCP enabled.

And either:

·

Configure the router to use Network Address Translation (NAT).

Or

37

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

·

Configure ALEOS (in ACEmanager) to use Host Port Routing. For information on using ALEOS with a router that is not configured to use NAT, see

Host Port Routing on page 84.

38

Router

AirLink device hosts

Note: Other than for VLANs, ALEOS does not provide DHCP addresses to router connected hosts.

Over the Air (OTA) Connections

Access AirLink devices

You can use an OTA connection to access AirLink devices that are in either configuration described above (stand alone or with a router).

Access connected hosts

To use an OTA connection to access a connected host through the AirLink device, configure the host in ALEOS as the DMZ or port forwarding destination. For information on inbound OTA connections to the host, see

DMZ on page 137 and

Port Forwarding on page 133.

Configuring Your Device for use in a PCI

Compliant System

The credit card industry requires retailers to comply with Payment Card Industry

(PCI) standard to maintain a secure environment when processing payment card transactions. For these transactions, the AirLink ES440 acts as a wireless data conduit for routers and PoSs (point-of-sale-terminals) that have been configured for PCI compliance.

4114514

Device Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Internet

Cellular WAN

AirLink ES440

LAN

Router configured for

PCI compliance

LAN

WAN

Payment Processor

DSL Gateway

Retail store

Wi-Fi

PoS

Wireless Access Point

PoS

Figure 2-21: Sample PCI compliant network

The PCI compliant network must be set up so that:

The USBnet is on a different subnet from the point-of-sale-terminal.

All security protocols must be established from the point-of-sale terminal to the payment processor.

Payment card terminals must be on a dedicated LAN or VLAN.

The AirLink device must be connected to a router that is configured for PCI compliance.

Note: The serial port on the AirLink device has no access to the IP data path and does not need to be disabled.

If you are using the AirLink ES440 for a payment card industry application, to meet PCI Data Security Standard compliance requirements the following steps must be done by a PCI certified service company.

For each device:

1.

Connect the AirLink device to a router that has been configured for PCI compliance.

2.

Log in to ACEmanager. (User name is user; default password is 12345.)

Change the password regularly, in accordance with PCI recommendations.

3.

Go to the Admin tab and change the default password.

Do not share the ACEmanager password.

4.

Go to Applications > ALEOS Application Framework and set the ALEOS

Application Framework field to Disable.

39

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

40 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

3: Status

All of the fields in the “Status” group are read-only and provide information about the AirLink device. Depending on the individual settings and the onboard cellular module of the AirLink device, the actual status pages may look different than the screen shots shown here. The individual status sections give an accurate view of the current running configuration of the AirLink device. Refer to the following sections for information about the individual configuration options.

Home

The Home section of the Status tab is the first page displayed when you login to ACEmanager. It shows basic information about the cellular network connection and important information about the device.

Tip:

See

WAN/Cellular Configuration on page 103 for information about

configuring the cellular settings.

3

Figure 3-1: ACEmanager: Status > Home — CDMA

41

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 3-2: ACEmanager: Status > Home — HSPA

42

Figure 3-3: ACEmanager: Status > Home — LTE

Field

Phone Number

IP Address

Description

The phone number (programmed into the device) associated with the Mobile Network Operator account

The current WAN IP address for the device. This can be the IP address for either a Wi-Fi or cellular interface. If both these interfaces have valid IP addresses, the IP address used by Wi-Fi is shown.

4114514

Status

Network State

Current state of the cellular radio network connection

Network Ready—Connected to a mobile broadband network and ready to transfer data

Network Ready WiFi—Connected to a Wi-Fi network and ready to transfer data

Connecting To Network—Establishing a network connection; wait until the connection is established

Connecting To Network - WiFi—Establishing a connection to a Wi-Fi network; wait until the connection is established

Data connection failed. Waiting to retry—ALEOS is attempting to reconnect to the mobile broadband network. Ensure that the APN is correct or the account is activated to the ESN for your device. Wait until it is able to connect. If you see this status repeatedly or for an extended period of time, contact your Mobile Network Operator.

Network Link Down—Unable to connect to the network. Ensure that the APN is correct or the account is activated to the ESN for your device. If the problem persists, contact your

Mobile Network Operator.

Network Link Down - WiFi—Unable to connect to the Wi-Fi access point. Check the authentication information.

No SIM or Unexpected SIM Status—Unable to read the SIM information; check that the

SIM card is installed correctly.

SIM PIN incorrect x attempts left—Wrong SIM PIN entered; enter the correct PIN. If the correct PIN is not entered in the specified number of attempts, the SIM is blocked. Contact your Mobile Network Operator to unblock the SIM.

No Service—Unable to connect to the broadband network. Check that the antenna is connected properly. If the problem persists, contact your Mobile Network Operator for information about coverage in your region.

Provisioning...—(CDMA networks only) The Mobile Network Operator is updating the radio module firmware with your account details. Wait until the provisioning is complete.

Awaiting provisioning...—(CDMA networks only) The device does not yet have an account associated with the radio module and is attempting to contact the Mobile Network Operator to obtain account information. If this state persists, check that the account is activated to the device’s ESN.

Starting OMADM state—The Mobile Network Operator is starting an over-the-air (OTA) radio module device management session. Wait until the OTA management session is complete.

In NI PRL Update—(CDMA networks only) An updated Preferred Roaming List is being downloaded from the network. Wait until the download is complete.

NI PRL Failed—(CDMA networks only) The network initiated attempt to update the

Preferred Roaming List failed. If the problem persists, contact your Mobile Network

Operator.

NI PRL Failed. Waiting to retry—(CDMA networks only) The network initiated attempt to update the Preferred Roaming List failed. The network is waiting to retry the download.

Wait until the download is complete.

Network Authentication Failed—Unable to connect to the network because of invalid authentication data. If the problem persists, contact your Mobile Network Operator.

Rev 1 Oct.13

43

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Signal Strength

(RSSI)

Received Signal Strength Indicator

The averaged received signal power measured in the air interface channel

Indicates if there is a strong signal available for my device to connect to

See also

LTE Signal Strength (RSRP)

and LTE Signal Quality (RSRQ)

.

The value varies, depending on the network characteristics and the AirLink device.

RSSI

> -70 dBm

-70 dBm to -85 dBm

-86 dBm to -100 dBm

< -100 dBm

Excellent

Good

Fair

Poor

Signal strength

LTE Signal

Strength (RSRP)

Reference Signal Received Power

The average signal power of all cell-specific reference signals within the LTE channel

Indicates whether the AirLink device has a strong connection to the wireless network

The value varies, depending on the network characteristics and the AirLink device.

Cell Info

Current Network

Operator

RSRP

> -90 dBm

-90 dBm to -105 dBm

-106 dBm to -120 dBm

< -120 dBm

Excellent

Good

Fair

Poor

Signal strength

See also

LTE Signal Quality (RSRQ)

and Signal Strength (RSSI) .

Provides cell information such as the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC), TCH, Received Signal

Strength Indicator (RSSI), Location Area Code (LAC), and the cell ID

For additional information, including cell info for LTE networks, see

*CELLINFO2?

on page 323.

Provides the name of the Mobile Network Operator whose network the AirLink device is connected to.

Note: The roaming operator is only displayed if the home operator allows this.

Network Service

Type

The type of service being used by the device. Options are:

EV-DO Rev A, 1x, LTE, HSPA+, HSPA, HSDPA, HSUPA, UMTS, EDGE, or GPRS

If you are connected to a network other than that of your Mobile Network Operator, the network service type indicates that you are roaming (and additional charges may apply).

44 4114514

Status

Signal Quality

(EC/IO)

LTE Signal

Quality (RSRQ)

CDMA/UMTS signal quality

Indicates the signal quality with a ratio of the average signal energy to co-channel interference in dB

EC/IO Signal quality

0 to -6

-7 to -10

-11 to -20

Excellent

Good

Fair to Poor

Reference Signal Received Quality

The RSRQ indicates the quality of the AirLink device’s connection to the wireless network. (Is noise or interference affecting the quality of the connection?) See also

Signal Strength (RSSI)

and

LTE Signal Strength (RSRP)

.

The value varies, depending on the network characteristics and the AirLink device.

> -9 dB

-9 dB to -12 dB

< -13 dB

RSRQ

Excellent

Good

Fair to Poor

Signal quality

Note: For additional information on the LTE network, use the

*CELLINFO2?

AT command

(described on page

323

).

Channel

The CDMA/UMTS channel

The current active channel number that the AirLink device is communication to the network on.

Number of bytes sent to the network since system startup or reboot

WAN/Cellular

Bytes Sent

WAN/Cellular

Bytes Rcvd

Number of bytes received from the network since system startup

ALEOS Software

Version

Version of ALEOS software currently installed in the device

Customer Device

Name

Name of the device as it is configured with the Dynamic DNS IP Manager settings

Rev 1 Oct.13

45

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

X-Card Type

X-Card Status

Indicates whether the AirLink device has a connected X-Card or not

Values are:

x-Card Not Found

WiFi x-Card

Dual Ethernet x-Card

IO x-Card

Note: This field applies only to the AirLink GX Series devices.

Indicates the status of the X-Card, if present

Values are:

x-Card Connected

x-Card Disconnected

Note: This field applies only to the AirLink GX Series devices.

46 4114514

Status

WAN/Cellular

WAN/Cellular provides specific information about the cellular connection including

IP address and how much data has been transmitted or received. Some of the information on this page is repeated on the Home page for quick reference.

CDMA

Field

Cellular IP Address

ESN/EID/IMEI

PRL Version

PRL Update Status

SID

NID

PN Offset

Band Class

Keepalive IP Address

Figure 3-4: ACEmanager: Status > WAN/Cellular — CDMA

Keepalive Ping Time (minutes)

Description

Cellular IP Address assigned by the Mobile Network Operator.

Electronic Serial Number for the internal radio

Version of the Preferred Roaming List installed in the device

Status of the last PRL (Preferred Roaming List) update. 0 if there has been none

System ID

Network ID

Base station identifier used in CDMA networks

CDMA band class

The IP address that WAN Keep Alive uses to test cellular connectivity (if enabled)

The amount of time between Keep Alive pings in minutes

Rev 1 Oct.13

47

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

DNS Proxy

Description

Shows how the connected hosts acquire their DNS server.

Enable—DNS Proxy is activated. Connected hosts acquire the AirLink device’s IP address as their DNS server.

Disable—DNS Proxy is deactivated. Connected hosts acquire the

DNS server defined by the Mobile Network Operator as the first DNS server.

To set this option, see DNS Proxy on page 94.

DNS Override

DNS Server 1 (IPv4)

DNS Server 2 (IPv4)

2nd DNS server IP address

Current WAN Time in Use (minutes)

Provides the time (in minutes) that the WAN has been in use

Bytes Sent

Bytes Received

Number of bytes sent to the cellular network since system startup or reboot

Number of bytes received from the network since system startup or reboot

Packets Sent

Packets Received

Override WAN-granted DNS

1st DNS server IP address currently in use by the Network connection to resolve domain names into IP addresses

Number of packets sent to the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets received from the network since system startup or reboot

RSR Active Route

RSR Test Result

RSR Test TimeStamp

The active route status for Reliable Static Routing

Primary—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured primary route.

Backup—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured backup route.

None—RSR is not enabled.

Result of the most recent Tracking Object test

Time of the most recent Tracking Object test

48 4114514

Status

GSM

Figure 3-5: ACEmanager: Status > WAN/Cellular — GSM

Field

Cellular IP Address

ESN/EID/IMEI

SIM ID

APN Status

IMSI

Cell ID

LAC

BSIC

Keepalive IP Address

Keepalive Ping Time

(minutes)

Rev 1 Oct.13

Description

Cellular IP Address

Electronic Serial Number for the internal radio

Provides the identification number for the SIM card in use

Identifies the current APN in use by the network connection

(Auto Configured) is a default APN based on the SIM card in use.

(User Entered) is a custom APN entered manually into the configuration.

Note: APN is configured on the WAN/Cellular configuration tab.

International Mobile Subscriber Identity number

A unique number that identifies each base transceiver station (BTS) or sector of a

BTS within an LAC

Location Area Code

Base Station Identity Code

The IP address that WAN Keep Alive uses to test cellular connectivity (if enabled)

The amount of time between Keep Alive pings in minutes

49

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

DNS Proxy

DNS Override

DNS Server 1

DNS Server 2

Bytes Sent

Bytes Received

Packets Sent

Packets Received

RSR Active Route

RSR Test Result

RSR Test TimeStamp

Description

Shows how the connected hosts acquire their DNS server.

Enable—DNS Proxy is activated. Connected hosts acquire the AirLink device’s IP address as their DNS server.

Disable—DNS Proxy is deactivated. Connected hosts acquire the DNS server defined by the Mobile Network Operator as the first DNS server.

To set this option, see

DNS Proxy on page 94.

Override WAN-granted DNS

1st DNS server IP address currently in use by the Network connection to resolve domain names into IP addresses

2nd DNS server IP address

Number of bytes sent to the cellular network since system startup or reboot

Number of bytes received from the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets sent to the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets received from the network since system startup or reboot

The active route for Reliable Static Routing

Primary—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured primary route.

Backup—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured backup route.

None—RSR is not enabled.

Result of the most recent Object Tracking test

Time of the most recent Object Tracking test

50 4114514

LTE—Fallback to EV-DO

Status

Field

Cellular IP Address

ESN/EID/IMEI

SIM ID

APN Status

IMSI

Cell ID

LAC

BSIC

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 3-6: ACEmanager: Status > WAN/Cellular — LTE - Fallback to EV-DO

Description

Cellular IP Address

Electronic Serial Number for the internal radio

Provides the identification number for the SIM card in use

Identifies the current APN in use by the network connection

(Auto Configured) is a default APN based on the SIM card in use.

(User Entered) is a custom APN entered manually into the configuration.

Note: APN is configured on the WAN/Cellular configuration tab.

International Mobile Subscriber Identity number

A unique number that identifies each base transceiver station (BTS) or sector of a

BTS within an LAC

Location Area Code

Base Station Identity Code

51

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

PRL Version

SID

NID

PN Offset

Band Class

Keepalive IP Address

Keepalive Ping Time

(minutes)

DNS Proxy

DNS Override

DNS Server 1

DNS Server 2

Bytes Sent

Bytes Received

Packets Sent

Packets Received

RSR Active Route

RSR Test Result

RSR Test TimeStamp

Description

Version of the Preferred Roaming List installed in the device

System ID

Network ID

Base station identifier used in CDMA networks

Radio frequency (For detailed information see

LTE Networks on page 396.)

The IP address that WAN Keep Alive uses to test cellular connectivity (if enabled)

The amount of time between Keep Alive pings in minutes

Shows how the connected hosts acquire their DNS server.

Enable—DNS Proxy is activated. Connected hosts acquire the AirLink device’s

IP address as their DNS server.

Disable—DNS Proxy is deactivated. Connected hosts acquire the DNS server defined by the Mobile Network Operator as the first DNS server.

To set this option, see DNS Proxy on page 94.

Override WAN-granted DNS

1st DNS server IP address currently in use by the Network connection to resolve domain names into IP addresses

2nd DNS server IP address

Number of bytes sent to the cellular network since the system startup or reboot

Number of bytes received from the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets sent to the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets received from the network since system startup or reboot

The active route for Reliable Static Routing

Primary—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured primary route.

Backup—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured backup route.

None—RSR is not enabled.

Result of the most recent Object Tracking test

Time of the most recent Object Tracking test

52 4114514

LTE—Fallback to GSM/HSPA+

Status

Figure 3-7: ACEmanager: Status > WAN/Cellular — LTE - Fallback to GSM/HSPA+

Field

Cellular IP Address

ESN/EID/IMEI

SIM ID

APN Status

IMSI

Cell ID

LAC

BSIC

Keepalive IP Address

Keepalive Ping Time

(minutes)

Description

Cellular IP Address

Electronic Serial Number for the internal radio

Provides the identification number for the SIM card in use

Identifies the current APN in use by the network connection

(Auto Configured) is a default APN based on the SIM card in use.

(User Entered) is a custom APN entered manually into the configuration.

Note: APN is configured on the WAN/Cellular configuration tab.

International Mobile Subscriber Identity number

A unique number that identifies each base transceiver station (BTS) or sector of a

BTS within an LAC

Location Area Code

Base Station Identity Code

The IP address that WAN Keep Alive uses to test cellular connectivity (if enabled)

The amount of time between Keep Alive pings in minutes

Rev 1 Oct.13

53

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

DNS Proxy

DNS Override

DNS Server 1

DNS Server 2

Bytes Sent

Bytes Received

Packets Sent

Packets Received

RSR Active Route

RSR Test Result

RSR Test TimeStamp

Description

Shows how the connected hosts acquire their DNS server.

Enable—DNS Proxy is activated. Connected hosts acquire the AirLink device’s

IP address as their DNS server.

Disable—DNS Proxy is deactivated. Connected hosts acquire the DNS server defined by the Mobile Network Operator as the first DNS server.

To set this option, see DNS Proxy on page 94.

Override WAN-granted DNS

1st DNS server IP address currently in use by the Network connection to resolve domain names into IP addresses

2nd DNS server IP address

Number of bytes sent to the cellular network since the system startup or reboot

Number of bytes received from the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets sent to the network since system startup or reboot

Number of packets received from the network since system startup or reboot

The active route for Reliable Static Routing

Primary—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured primary route.

Backup—Specified network traffic is currently using the configured backup route.

None—RSR is not enabled.

Result of the most recent Object Tracking test

Time of the most recent Object Tracking test

54 4114514

Status

LAN

This is the status of the local network. It lists information about the network and connected clients.

Figure 3-8: ACEmanager: Status > LAN (GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed)

Field Description

Ethernet 1 Status

Ethernet 2 Status

Ethernet 3 Status

Speed and duplex status of the connection on Ethernet port 1 (the main Ethernet port). If there is no connection, the value is None.

This field only appears on a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed.

Speed and duplex status of the connection on Ethernet port 2 on the Dual Ethernet X-Card.

If there is no connection, the value is None.

This field only appears on a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed.

Speed and duplex status of the connection on Ethernet port 3 on the Dual Ethernet X-Card.

If there is no connection, the value is None.

Indicates which USB port mode is set: USBnet, USB serial, or Disabled.

USB Mode

Connected Clients

Number of connected hosts that obtained their IP address through DHCP over Ethernet or

USBnet. The value in this field does not include hosts connected via PPP or PPPoE.

LAN IP Packets Sent

Number of IP packets sent to the Ethernet host interface since the system startup

Note: If the AirLink GX Series device has a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed, the data reported includes all three Ethernet ports.

Rev 1 Oct.13

55

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

LAN IP Packets

Received

IP/MAC table

VRRP Enabled

VLAN table

Description

Number of IP packets received from the Ethernet host interface since the system startup

Note: If the AirLink GX Series device has a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed, the data reported includes all three Ethernet ports.

Displays the local IP Address and the MAC Address of connected hosts that obtain their IP address through DHCP.

Indicates the configuration of the VRRP feature

Provides the identities (Interface name and ID) of the configured VLANs

LAN/WiFi

If you have a GX Series device with a Wi-Fi X-Card installed, there are some

additional fields on the Status > LAN/WiFi screen, as shown in Figure 3-9 .

56

Figure 3-9: ACEmanager: Status > LAN/WiFi

4114514

Status

Field

Ethernet 1 Status

USB Mode

Connected Clients

WiFi Client MAC address

Description

Speed and duplex status of the connection on Ethernet port 1 (the main Ethernet port). If there is no connection, the value is None.

See field descriptions starting on page 55 .

Number of connected hosts that obtained their IP address through DHCP over Ethernet,

USBnet, and hosts connected via Wi-Fi. The value in this field does not include hosts connected via PPP or PPPoE.

LAN IP Packets Sent

See field descriptions starting on page 55 .

LAN IP Packets

Received

SSID / Network Name

Security Encryption type

Shows the configured or default Wi-Fi SSID/Network name

Shows the Wi-Fi security encryption (security authentication) type

WiFi Bridge to

Ethernet

WiFi Packets

Transmitted

WiFi Packets

Received

Wireless Access

Point

Shows the status of the Bridge WiFi to Ethernet field. When this feature is enabled, the

Ethernet LAN hosts and the Wi-Fi access point hosts are on the same subnet. For details,

see Bridge WiFi to Ethernet on page 72.

Number of IP packets sent to the access point host interface over Wi-Fi since the system startup

Number of IP packets received by the access point host interface over Wi-Fi since the system startup

Indicates how the access point is configured. For more information, see Enable Wireless

Access Point on page 87.

WiFi Mode

Access Point MAC address

Wi-Fi mode. For more information, see

Wi-Fi Mode on page 86.

The MAC address hosts connect to when the GX Series device is configured as an access point. For more information, see

Access Point Mode

on page 86 and Both (AP + Client)

Mode on page 92.

The MAC address the GX Series device uses to connect to a Wi-Fi access point when it is configured for Client mode. For more information, see

Client Mode on page 90 and

Both

(AP + Client) Mode on page 92.

See field descriptions starting on page 57 .

IP/MAC table

VRRP Enabled

VLAN table

Rev 1 Oct.13

57

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

VPN

The VPN section gives an overview of the VPN settings and indicates whether a

VPN connection has been made.

Figure 3-10: ACEmanager: Status > VPN

Field

Incoming out of band

Outgoing out of band

Description

Indicates whether incoming out of band traffic is allowed or blocked

Indicates whether outgoing ALEOS out of band traffic is allowed or blocked

Outgoing Host out of band

Indicates whether Outgoing Host out of band traffic is allowed or blocked

VPN 1 to 5 Status

The status of each IPsec VPN client or GRE client: Disabled, Enabled, or Connected.

VPN 1, however, can be configured for L2TP and SSL VPN.

58 4114514

Status

Security

The security section provides an overview of the security settings on the AirLink device.

Figure 3-11: ACEmanager: Status > Security

Field

DMZ

Port Forwarding

Port Filtering Inbound

Port Filtering Outbound

Trusted Hosts (Friends)

MAC Filtering

IP Reject Count

Description

Options are: Automatic, Manual, or Disabled. DMZ defines a single LAN connected device where all unsolicited data should be routed.

Options are: Enabled or Disabled. Shows status of port forwarding

Options are: Allowed Ports, Blocked Ports, or Not Used. Shows status of inbound port filtering

Options are: Allowed Ports, Blocked Ports, or Not Used. Shows status of outbound port filtering

Options are: Disabled or Enabled. Accepts connections from only trusted remote IP addresses

Options are: Enabled or Disabled. Shows status of MAC filtering

Rejected IP Count

Services

This section shows the status of AirLink services, including the ACEmanager access level.

Rev 1 Oct.13

59

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

60

Figure 3-12: ACEmanager: Status > Services

Field

AVMS

ACEmanager

Description

Indicates the status of the connection to the AirVantage Management Service. This field is blank if the AVMS configuration is disabled.

The ACEmanager access mode. Options are Tethered Host and OTA or Tethered Host

Only.

Dynamic DNS Service

Indicates the service in use for Dynamic DNS translation

Full Domain Name

If the Dynamic DNS Service is configured to use a 3rd party host, the domain name configured is displaced. If the Dynamic DNS Service is configured to use IP Manager, this field does not display.

Enable time update

Power State

Daily SNTP updates of the system time

The current state of the Low Power feature

GPS

The GPS (Global Positioning System) tab provides AirLink device location and movement information for use with tracking applications.

4114514

Status

Figure 3-13: ACEmanager: Status > GPS

Field

Enable GPS

GPS Fix

Description

Indicates that GPS is either enabled or disabled

0 = No GPS Fix, 1 = GPS Fix Acquired, 2 = GPS WAAS Fix

Satellite Count

Latitude

Shows how many satellites the GPS receiver detects

Latitude of the GPS receiver

Longitude

Heading

Longitude of the GPS receiver

The direction in which the AirLink device is moving. No configuration is needed for Heading or Speed; they are calculated automatically.

Speed (in kilometers per hour)

Speed (km/h)

Engine Hours (Hours)

Measure of the number of hours the engine is on

Rev 1 Oct.13

61

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Serial

Figure 3-14: ACEmanager: Status > Serial

Field

Serial Reserved by

External Application

Serial Port Mode

Autologin reverse telnet

Description

This field displays the reservation status of the serial port.

ON—The serial port is reserved for ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS AF), and cannot be used for any other serial-related ALEOS features.

OFF — The serial port is available for non-ALEOS AF, serial-related ALEOS features.

To reserve the serial port for ALEOS AF, go to Applications > ALEOS Application

Framework > Serial Port Reserved. (See

ALEOS Application Framework on page 250.)

Default power-up mode for the serial port. When the AirLink device is power-cycled, the serial port enters the mode specified by this command after 5 seconds.

This field only appears when reverse telnet is selected as the Serial Port Mode.

Shows the status of autologin for reverse telnet. For more information, see Reverse Telnet/

SSH on page 224.

TCP Auto Answer

UDP Auto Answer

This parameter determines how the AirLink device responds to an incoming TCP connection request. The AirLink device remains in AT Command mode until a connection request is received. DTR must be asserted (S211=1 or &D0) and the device must be set for a successful TCP connection. The AirLink device sends a “RING” string to the host. A

“CONNECT” sent to the host indicates acknowledgment of the connection request and the

TCP session is established. Options are:

Disabled (Default)

Enabled

Enables UDP auto answer (half-open) mode

Normal mode

Enable UDP auto answer mode

Serial bytes sent

Number of bytes sent over serial port to host

Serial bytes received

Number of bytes received over serial port from host

62 4114514

Status

Field

Serial Signal Level

Description

Shows the status of the following parameters related to the host signal level:

DCD—Data Carrier Detect—Control signal to the PC

DTR—Data Terminal Ready—Used to establish a connection

DSR—Data Set Ready—Used to establish a connection

CTS—Clear to Send—Data flow control

RTS—Request to Send—Data flow control

Each parameter can have a value of LOW (signal not asserted) or HIGH (signal being asserted).

The first three parameters (DCD, DTR, and DSR) may be helpful for troubleshooting. If the values shown for these parameters are not as expected:

1.

Press Refresh to ensure you have the latest values.

2.

Check the cable connections.

Note: ACEmanager does not update dynamically. Press Refresh to view the current values.

I/O X-Card Serial

These fields apply only to GX Series devices with an I/O X-Card installed.

I/O X-Card Serial

Reserved by External

Application

This field displays the reservation status of the I/O X-Card serial port.

ON—The serial port is reserved for ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS AF), and cannot be used for any other serial-related ALEOS features.

OFF — The serial port is available for non-ALEOS AF, serial-related ALEOS features.

To reserve the serial port for ALEOS AF, go to Applications > ALEOS Application

Framework > Serial Port Reserved. (See

ALEOS Application Framework on page 250.)

I/O X-Card Serial Port

Mode

Default power-up mode for the I/O X-Card serial port. When the AirLink device is powercycled, the serial port enters the mode specified by this command after 5 seconds.

I/O X-Card Serial TCP

Auto Answer

This parameter determines how the AirLink device responds to an incoming TCP connection request on the I/O X-Card serial port. The AirLink device remains in AT

Command mode until a connection request is received. DTR must be asserted (S211=1 or

&D0) and the device must be set for a successful TCP connection. The AirLink device sends a “RING” string to the host. A “CONNECT” sent to the host indicates acknowledgment of the connection request and the TCP session is established. Options are:

Disabled (Default)

Enabled

I/O X-Card Serial UDP

Auto Answer

Enables UDP auto answer (half-open) mode on the I/O X-Card serial port

Normal mode

Enable UDP auto answer mode

Number of bytes sent over the I/O X-Card serial port to host

I/O X-Card Serial bytes sent

I/O X-Card Serial bytes received

Number of bytes received over the I/O X-Card serial port from host

Rev 1 Oct.13

63

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Applications

The Applications section of the Status group provides information on the status of the Garmin device and data service.

64

Figure 3-15: ACEmanager: Status > Applications

Field Description

Garmin Status

Data Service

The state of the connection to the Garmin device when it is enabled. This field is blank when the Garmin device is disabled.

The Data Service field displays “Available (under usage limit)” if the configured usage limit has not been exceeded.

ALEOS Application

Framework

QCOM DM Port

Resource Reserve

Indicates whether ALEOS Application Framework is enabled or disabled

Serial Port Reserved

Disable (default)

Enable

Disable (default)

Enable

About

The About section of the Status group provides basic information about the cellular device. The fields for this section provide the same information for the

CDMA, GSM, and LTE wireless standards.

4114514

Status

Figure 3-16: ACEmanager: Status > About

Field

Device Model

Description

Model of the device (e.g., GX400)

Radio Module Type

Model number of the internal cellular radio module (e.g. MC7700)

Certified Mobile Network

Operator

Provides the name of the Mobile Network Operator whose network the AirLink device is connected to.

Radio Firmware Version

Firmware version in the radio module

PRI ID

Product Release Instructions ID number

Global ID

GPS/RAP Device ID

Device ID used by ALEOS to identify itself for various management applications

Device ID of GPS/RAP

Ethernet Mac Address

MAC address of the main Ethernet port

Ethernet 2 Mac Address

MAC address of Ethernet port 2 on the Dual Ethernet X-Card (Only appears if the device has a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed)

Ethernet 3 Mac Address

MAC address of Ethernet port 3 on the Dual Ethernet X-Card (Only appears if the device has a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed)

ALEOS Software Version

Displays the version of ALEOS software running on the AirLink Device

ALEOS Build number

Device Hardware

Configuration

The build number for the ALEOS Software

Indicates the device’s hardware configuration

Boot Version

MSCI Version

Version of boot code installed in the device

MSCI version of the ALEOS internal configuration database

Rev 1 Oct.13

65

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

66 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

4: LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Note: The LAN/WiFi tab in ACEmanager only appears when a Wi-Fi X-Card is installed in the AirLink GX Series device. If a Wi-Fi X-Card is not installed, this tab appears as LAN.

The primary purpose of the AirLink device is to route data between one or more connected devices and the Internet via the mobile network. The AirLink device has two modes you can use for configuring a LAN—Private Mode and Public Mode.

Private and Public Mode

Private Mode and Public Mode are Sierra Wireless terms.

In Private Mode, the AirLink device itself has a routable IP address from the MNO. Connected devices are assigned non-routable

(private) IP addresses, making the connected router or laptop not directly accessible from the Internet.

In Public Mode the AirLink device passes the public routable IP address from the MNO through to the connected device such as a router or laptop, making the router or laptop publicly addressable for

Internet applications.

Figure 4-1 shows the two types of

configurations.

4

67

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Private mode

Internet

Public mode

Internet

Routable IP address

AirLink device

Non-routable IP address

NAT to port with non-routable

IP address

AirLink device

Non-routable IP address

Non-routable IP address

Routable IP address

Non-routable IP address Router or laptop

Note: Router with NAT configured for AirLink device traffic can have a routable IP address from a wireline gateway. See

Figure 4-2

.

Router or laptop

Figure 4-1: Private vs. Public Mode

Private Mode

Private Mode uses Network Address Translation (NAT) to enable the non-routable device to access the Internet. Data from the connected devices can be passed through the AirLink device and AirLink device applications such as SNMP have a routable IP address to target.

In a business continuity application where the router also has a routable IP address from a wireline gateway connection (as shown in

Figure 4-2

) the IT administrator may prefer to use that lower cost connection for AirLink device

SNMP applications and use the reliable static route failover protocol to direct

SNMP-like traffic out the wireline gateway connection, unless that connection has failed.

68 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Private mode

Internet

Routable IP address

Non-routable IP address

AirLink device

WAN port 1

Non-routable IP address

1 2

Router WAN ports

Router or laptop

WAN port 2

Routable IP address from wireline gateway

Figure 4-2: Private Mode for SNMP-like applications

Wireline gateway

Sierra Wireless recommends a Private Mode network as the most reliable configuration to use in a business continuity failover application as defined in the

AirLink ES440 Hardware User Guide (or

Figure 4-2 ) with Reliable Static Routing

and Reverse Telnet. For more information, see Reliable Static Routing (RSR) on page 88 and Reverse Telnet/SSH on page 158.

Public Mode

Public Mode is similar to IP pass-through except that in Public Mode the IP address is also passed through from the MNO. The AirLink device acts like a pass-through data connection for all traffic from the MNO. Public Mode is required when the connected device needs a routable IP address and has no other connection to obtain it.

In Public Mode the AirLink device does not have a routable IP address and therefore applications such as SNMP on the AirLink device require hair-pinning from the routable IP address on the connected router back to the AirLink device,

as shown in Figure 4-3

, to serve SNMP-like applications. Sierra Wireless recommends this configuration for connecting PCs or other endpoints that are capable of responding to IP applications from the network. While hair-pinning on the router is an acceptable configuration, it means SNMP-like data from the

AirLink device relies on the continuous operation of the router, whereas Private

Mode uses NAT to avoid the hair-pinning requirement.

69

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Hair-pinning in Public Mode

Internet

70

AirLink device

Non-routable

IP address

Traffic is routed from

the mobile network to routable IP address on the router and then

“hair-pinned” back to the AirLink device.

Routable IP address

Router or laptop

Figure 4-3: Hair-pinning in Public Mode

Tip:

When using Public mode, Sierra Wireless recommends connecting the device directly to the computer or other end device. Using a hub or switch may prevent the AirLink device from updating the IP address of the end device when an IP address is received from the cellular network.

In ACEmanager, the Host Public mode and DHCP settings are part of the LAN tab

.

Subtabs of the LAN tab address the configuration of each interface or network type.

DHCP/Addressing

This section is primarily a status display of the configurations, with a few options that are global to all interface types. Interfaces that are enabled in the current configuration are displayed with their configured settings.

DHCP addresses and subnets are assigned to the LAN side interfaces display. If no Wi-Fi X-Card is installed in an AirLink GX Series device, select the DHCP/

Addressing section from the LAN tab to display a screen similar to the Figure 5-1 example.

Note: If the device has not been reset since configuration changes were made, the current configuration in use may be different.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Figure 4-4: ACEmanager: LAN/Wi-Fi > DHCP/Addressing

If a Wi-Fi X-Card is installed in the AirLink GX Series device, the LAN tab changes to LAN/WiFi, and selecting DHCP/Addressing displays a screen similar to

Figure 4-4 . When Wi-Fi is bridged to Ethernet, the Bridge Wifi to Ethernet field

displays Enabled, and Ethernet and Wi-Fi appear in the same subnet row.

Note: Bridging between WiFi and USB/net is not supported.

71

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Host Connection

Mode

Description

Sets the Host Interface to use the Public IP address granted by the cellular network or private IP addresses. All host interfaces which are not using the public IP address use private IP addresses. The options are:

Ethernet Uses Public IP*

All Hosts Use Private IP—(Default)

USB Uses Public IP

RS232 Uses Public IP

First Host gets Public IP

If you select this option, you do not have to specify the type of connection that uses the Public IP address. The first device to connect uses the Public IP address, regardless of whether it has a USB or Ethernet connection.

For more information on Private and Public mode, see

Private and Public Mode on page 67.

Caution:

* If the AirLink GX Series device has a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed, selecting this option disables the additional Ethernet ports on the Dual Ethernet X-Card. The main

Ethernet port is still functional.

72

Note: The connected computer receives the DHCP address from ALEOS and it also provides a static route (192.168.13.31 by default) that allows you to access ACEmanager from a connected laptop.

Public Mode Subnet

Mask

Lease Timer

(seconds)

Domain

MTU

Bridge WiFi to

Ethernet

WiFi Mode

WAN IP Address

Public Mode subnet mask indicates the range of Public Mode host IP addresses. Options are:

255.255.255.0 (24-bit) Default

255.255.255.255 (32-bit)

Choose the option that matches the subnet mask received from the mobile network.

Configurable DHCP lease time

The default lease for the GX Series and LS300 is 3600 seconds (1 hour). The lease timer applies to all Ethernet, USB/net, and Wi-Fi connected DHCP hosts.

Displays the DHCP domain name

This domain name is passed to the DHCP host in option 15 of the DHCP packet.

Sets the maximum transmission unit size

The maximum transmission unit size is sent to the DHCP host in option 26 of the DHCP packet. The default is 1500.

Allows routing between the Ethernet Lan and Wi-Fi. When enabled, the Ethernet port and the Wi-Fi ports are on the same subnet. Options are:

Enabled (Default)

Disabled

This field is only available when a Wi-Fi X-card is installed.

Indicates the Wi-Fi module mode

This field is only available when a Wi-Fi X-card is installed.

Displays the WAN IP address when the Wi-Fi is used in client mode for WAN connectivity

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Field

LAN Address

Summary

Interface

Device IP

Subnet Mask

Access Internet

DHCP Server Mode

Starting IP

Ending IP

Description

Displays the interfaces which have been enabled. By default, only the Ethernet and

USBNET Interfaces are enabled.

The physical interface port or VLAN ID

The IP address of the AirLink device for the specified interface port. By default, this is set to

192.168.13.31 for Ethernet/WiFi and 192.168.14.31 for USB/net.

Subnet mask indicates the range of host IP addresses that can be reached directly.

Changing this limits or expands the number of clients that can connect to the AirLink device. The default of 255.255.255.0 means that 254 clients can connect to the AirLink device. Uses 192.168.13. as the first three octets of the IP address if the device IP is

192.168.13.31.

Appears if the interface is configured to allow connected host(s) access to the Internet

Note: Internet access cannot be disabled for Ethernet or Wi-Fi hosts.

Indicates whether or not the interface has a DHCP server enabled to provide dynamically allocated IP addresses provided to connected hosts

Ethernet DHCP pool starting IP address

The ending IP for the interface. If the starting and ending IP are the same, there is a single address in the pool and only one host receives an IP address from the DHCP server for that interface. Some interfaces, such as USB, can only have a single host connection. For others, statically assigned IP addresses in the same subnet, but outside of the DHCP pool, can still connect and use the device in the same way as a DHCP connected host.

Tip:

If you are using Private Mode for all hosts (*HOSTPRIVMODE=1), make sure that device IP, Starting IP, and Ending IP are on the same subnet defined by the DHCP network mask. If the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, it is safe to use 192.168.x.y for each as long as the x is the same number (0 in the example screen shot above) and the y is different (1 and 2 in the example) and between 0 and 254.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Internal DHCP Server

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) has become a primary component of today’s network environments. DHCP allows one server to automatically and dynamically allocate network IP addresses and other network related settings

(such as subnet masks, routers, etc.) to each computer or device without the need to set up each specifically or keep track of what addresses have already been used.

In a default configuration, the AirLink device acts as a DHCP host to any device connected to its ports. This DHCP host provides that device with an IP address that can be used to communicate on the Internet.

Address Assignment in Public Mode

1.

When the AirLink device registers on the cellular network, it is assigned an IP address from the carrier, e.g., 10.1.2.0.

73

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

2.

When using a specific interface, the AirLink device acts as a DHCP server unless disabled. When the Host Connection Mode is Ethernet Uses Public IP, and the AirLink device receives a DHCP request from an Ethernet device connected to its ports, it hands off the assigned address to the device and sets up the default gateway address as 10.1.2.1. If the fourth octet value is already a 1, it assigns 10.1.2.2 as the router address.

Note: The primary gateway to the cellular network, for any connected device, is enabled by default.

3.

The AirLink device also sends a /24 netmask (255.255.255.0 by default) and sets up a static route which maps 192.168.13.31 (or the address configured with *HOSTPEERIP if it is changed) to 10.1.2.1 (or 10.1.2.2 if that was what the gateway address was given as).

Tip:

When PPPoE is used with the AirLink device, the DHCP server needs to be disabled.

A tunnel is set up connecting a device (such as your computer or a router) with the AirLink device. The device then uses the MAC address of the AirLink device to send all outgoing packets.

Ethernet

The AirLink device is equipped with an Ethernet port that can be enabled or disabled as needed. When the port is disabled, the host cannot connect via

Ethernet, and ARP queries do not receive responses on the port.

74

Figure 4-5: ACEmanager: LAN > Ethernet

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Field

General

Ethernet Port

Description

Enabled or Disabled

Note: When the port is disabled, the device ignores any physical connection to the

Ethernet port.

Device IP

Starting IP

The Ethernet IP address of the AirLink device. By default this is set to 192.168.13.31.

Ethernet DHCP pool starting IP address

Note: If only one computer or device is connected directly to the Ethernet port, this is the

IP address it is assigned.

Ending IP

DHCP network mask

DHCP Server Mode

The ending IP address for the Ethernet interface DHCP pool

The Netmask given to any Ethernet DHCP client

Enabled or disabled. By default, the Ethernet DHCP server is enabled. Disabling the

DHCP server requires all connected clients to have static IP addressing. Static IP hosts need to be within the same subnet as defined by the device IP and DHCP network mask.

Advanced

Link Radio coverage to

Interface

Radio Link Delay

(seconds)

This disables the specified port when there is no cellular coverage. Options are:

Disable (default)

Ethernet

USB

The delay in seconds before the selected interface goes down when there is no cellular coverage

Interface Disabled

Duration

Turn Off NAT

Sets the period of time (in seconds) that the LAN interface is disabled when linking a LAN port to radio coverage. Either the Ethernet or the USB LAN port can be linked to the radio coverage, but not at the same time. Options are:

Interface Disabled when Radio is disconnected (Default)

5 Sec

10 Sec

15 Sec

20 Sec

25 Sec

30 Sec

When enabled, ALEOS routes packets without performing NAT on them. Options:

Disabled (default) and Enabled.

Rev 1 Oct.13

75

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field Description

Starting Ephemeral Port

This field allows you to set the starting port range used by a LAN host as the source port for over-the-air (OTA) destinations using NAT.

Note: This field is intended for advanced users only. In most cases, use the default value.

The NAT for the LAN host uses a range of 1000 ports as source ports for OTA destinations beginning with the configured Ephemeral port. Options are:

1024 (default)–64535

If you have a network with multiple LAN hosts that are sending data to the same server and the server is not receiving data from one (or more) of the hosts, it may be because the Mobile Network Operator has a WAN firewall that is blocking the ports used by the

NAT for over-the-air (OTA) destinations. This field enables you to avoid the blocked ports by changing the source port range used to send the data. For example, some users have found that changing the starting port to 42000 has resolved the issue.

Note: The ephemeral port setting does not affect any outbound traffic initiated by the device such as GPS reports, serial PAD or Modbus, Events Reporting, Device Initiated

AVMS connection, etc.

Ethernet 1 Link Setting

Ethernet 2 Link Setting

Ethernet 3 Link Setting

Configures the Ethernet port speed and duplex setting

Most of the time you can leave the default setting and the device you are connecting automatically negotiates the speed and duplex setting with the AirLink device. However, if the connected device has a fixed setting, use this field to change the AirLink device setting to match that of the connected device. The options are:

Auto 100/10 (default)

Auto 10 Mb only

100 Mb Full Duplex

100 Mb Half Duplex

10 Mb Full Duplex

10 Mb Half Duplex

If you have a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed, ACEmanager displays separate fields for each Ethernet port.

76

You can view the current speed and duplex setting on the Status > LAN window. See

page 55 .

USB

The AirLink device is equipped with a USB port that increases the methods by which you can send and receive data from a connected computer. You can set up the USB port to work as either a virtual Ethernet port or a virtual serial port, or you can disable it to prevent access by USB. A driver installation is required to use the USB port in either mode.

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

By default, the port is set to work as a virtual Ethernet port.

Note: Sierra Wireless recommends that you use a USB 2.0 cable with your AirLink device and connect directly to your computer for best throughput.

To change the USB port to allow virtual serial port communication:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to LAN > USB, and choose USB Serial as the USB

Device Mode.

To disable the USB port, select Disable from the same menu.

Figure 4-6: ACEmanager: LAN > USB

Note: There are USB/net and USB/serial drivers available for Windows XP and Windows 7

32-bit with a separate pair of drivers for Windows 7 64-bit. USB/serial also works with Linux

CDC-ACM drivers.

Note: A reboot is required to activate the USB mode change.

Description Field

General

USB Device Mode

*USBDEVICE=n

0 — USB Serial

1 — USBNET

2 — Disabled

This parameter alters the default startup data mode for the USB port.

Note: If you want to stream GPS data to the USB port ( Local/Streaming on page 198), set

this field to USB Serial.

Rev 1 Oct.13

77

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Device USB IP

Host USB IP

USB Serial Echo

USBNET Internet

Advanced

Link Radio Coverage to Interface

Description

The USB/net IP address of the AirLink device. By default this is set to 192.168.14.31.

The IP for the computer or device connected to the USB port

Toggles AT command echo mode when the USB is configured for virtual serial

0 = OFF; 1 = ON

Enabled (default) or Disabled

Radio Link Delay

(secs)

Interface Disabled

Duration

Disables the specified port when there is no cellular coverage. Options are:

Disable (default)

Ethernet

USB

The delay in seconds before the selected interface goes down when there is no cellular coverage

Sets the period of time (in seconds) that the LAN interface is disabled when linking a LAN port to radio coverage. Either the Ethernet or the USB LAN port can be linked to the radio coverage, but not at the same time. Options are:

Interface Disabled when Radio is disconnected (Default)

5 Sec

10 Sec

15 Sec

20 Sec

25 Sec

30 Sec

Note: The directions in this section are for

Windows XP. To install the drivers under Windows 7, start the driver installation from the Windows Device

Manager.

Installing the USB Drivers for Windows

Virtual Ethernet is the default setting for the USB port. If you want to install the virtual serial port, change the Device Mode to USB Serial.

When you connect the AirLink device to a USB port on your computer for the first time, Windows detects a new device and prompts you to install the driver.

Note: Windows sees each port type as a different USB device and sees every port on your computer separately. If you change the port type on the AirLink device or connect to a different USB port on your computer or hub, Windows sees it as a new device.

78 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Figure 4-7: Found New Hardware Wizard

1.

To start the install of the USB virtual Ethernet driver, select No, not this time and click Next.

2.

Select Install from a list of specific location and click Next.

Figure 4-8: Hardware Wizard: Location options

3.

Select and/or enter the location of the driver.

·

If the driver is on the CD and the CD is in your drive, you can just select

Search removable media.

·

If you have installed ACEmanager or the Setup Wizard, the drivers have been conveniently copied to your hard drive. Enter C:\Program

Files\Common Files\AirLink as the location to search.

·

If you are installing the driver from a file downloaded from the Sierra

Wireless website, select Include this location in the search and type in the location where you downloaded the file.

4.

Click Next.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-9: Hardware Wizard: Install location

After you select the location, the installation should begin. If you get a message asking if you want to continue the installation, click Continue Anyway.

79

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 4-10: Hardware Wizard: Installing

5.

Click Finish to complete the installation. The driver should be enabled without any need to reboot your computer.

Figure 4-11: Hardware Wizard: Finish

Virtual Ethernet

The USB Ethernet connection appears in your Network Connections window as a

Local Area Connection.

Tip:

If you also have an Ethernet card on the computer, or have installed the USB

Ethernet to more than one USB port on your computer, the USB Ethernet may show up with a number.

80

Figure 4-12: Network Connections

Note: By default, your Host IP for USB/net is 192.168.14.100.

You can also verify the installation by looking in the Device Manager.

1.

Click Start > Control Panel.

2.

Double-click the System icon.

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

3.

Select the Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button.

Figure 4-13: System Properties

4.

Click the + in front of

Network Adapters

.

The newly installed driver, AirLink USB Ethernet/RNDIS, should appear. If the driver is shown with a # and number behind the driver name (e.g., AirLink USB

Ethernet/RNDIS #2), more than one is installed on your computer, most likely for a different USB port. More than one copy of the driver should not cause any problems since only the connected port and its driver would be active.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-14: Device Manager > Ethernet

Once the driver is installed, you can use the USB port just like a standard

Ethernet port.

Virtual Serial

Verify the installation by looking in the Device Manager.

81

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

1.

Click Start > Control Panel.

2.

Double-click the System icon.

3.

Select the Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button.

Figure 4-15: System Properties

4.

Click the + in front of

devices

.

The newly installed driver, AirLink USB Serial Port, should appear.

Tip:

If the driver is shown with a number sign (#) and number behind the driver name

(e.g., AirLink USB Serial Port #2), more than one driver is installed on your computer, most likely for a different USB port. More than one copy of the driver should not cause any problems since only the connected port and its driver would be active.

82

Figure 4-16: Device Manager > Serial

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

To connect to the device using the USB virtual serial, most applications or utilities require you to select or enter the serial (COM) port number. The USB connection appears as a standard serial port, so you need to determine its number to connect to it. The driver installation automatically assigns a port, or you can change it if you wish to another unused port.

5.

From the Device Manager, right-click the driver name and select Properties.

Figure 4-17: Device Manager: Driver menu

6.

Select the Advanced tab and click the Advanced Port Settings button.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-18: Driver Properties

7.

The current port used is shown at the bottom of the screen. Use the dropdown menu to select an available COM port number if you need to change it.

83

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 4-19: Advanced Settings

Note: The COM port number assigned by driver installation is the next port that is available.The port number might vary depending on the number of devices connected

(using serial or virtual serial).

Once the driver is installed, you can use the USB port just like a standard serial port.

Host Port Routing

The Host Network is the equivalent of the IP route command.

Figure 4-20: ACEmanager: LAN > Host Port Routing

Field

Primary Gateway

Host Network 2 and

Host Network 3

Description

When enabled, your device is the Primary Gateway for the network behind a router connected to it. ALEOS responds to ARPs for all non-host Ethernet subnets.

Network to route to host interface connected to Ethernet

Host Network 2 and 3 are secondary networks connected to the AirLink device. For example, 192.168.10.0.

84 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Host Network Subnet

Mask 2 and Host

Network Subnet Mask 3

The subnet for the applicable network. For example, 255.255.255.0, which would with the setting above define a secondary network of 192.168.10.0/24.

Host Network 2 Route and Host Network 3

Route

Host Network 2

Gateway and Host

Network 3 Gateway

Indicates what type of router is being used for the host network. If it is a traditional router which handles ARP for addresses on its subnet, select Ethernet. If it is a “dumb” gateway which is a conduit to a subnet but does not handle any ARP, select Gateway.

When Gateway is selected, ALEOS will ARP for the destination address and send it to the defined Host Network Gateway address.

The IP address of the 'dumb' Gateway. This should be left as 0.0.0.0 if the Host Network

Route is Ethernet.

Many routers respond to ARP requests for subnets behind the router. The default is

Ethernet, which means that you do not have to configure the gateway IP. For those routers that do not respond to ARP requests for subnets, you need to enter the gateway address.

Wi-Fi

ALEOS provides Wi-Fi configuration capabilities and support for GX Series devices with a Wi-Fi X-Card installed.

This Wi-Fi X-Card works in one of three modes supported in ALEOS:

Access Point (AP)

Client

Both (AP + Client)

Select the Wi-Fi mode to be displayed. The configuration options vary, depending on the mode selected.

Note: Wi-Fi fields appear ONLY if the Wi-Fi X-Card is installed in the AirLink GX Series device.

To configure the Wi-Fi settings:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to LAN/WiFi > WiFi.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-21: ACEmanager: LAN/WiFi > WiFi

85

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field Description

Wi-Fi Mode

WiFi

Mode

Allows you to choose the Wi-Fi mode of operation. Options are:

WiFi OFF (Default)

Access Point (See

page 86

.)

Client Mode (See

page 90

.)

Both (AP + Client) (See

page 92

.)

Access Point Mode

In this mode, the AirLink device acts as an access point.

Select Access Point Mode from the drop-down box in the WiFi Mode field, and click “+” beside Access Point to expand that section.

86

Figure 4-22: ACEmanager: LAN/WiFi > WiFi > Access Point

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Field

Wi-Fi Configuration

Enable Wireless

Access Point

Description

Wireless Access Point operation works like an On/Off switch for the Wi-Fi module. When this field is set to disabled, the Wi-Fi module is powered off. The wireless mode configures operation for either 802.11b/g or b/g/n.

This field combines both mode and operation into a single configuration item. Options are:

WiFi OFF

b/g Enabled

b/g/n Enabled (Default)

Note: Selecting b/g/n Enabled limits the encryption options to Open and WPA/WPA2.

SSID/Network Name

You can set the SSID/Network Name or it can be automatically generated (default). The

SSID (Service Set Identifier) default value is the same as the AirLink GX Series device serial number which appears on the label on the bottom of the device. Note: Only ONE

SSID is available.

Note: The SSID is case-sensitive.

Broadcast SSID

WiFi Channel

Suppresses the SSID name in the Wi-Fi Access Point beacon message. Options are:

Enabled (Default)

Disabled

This field allows you to select from among 14 Wi-Fi channels. Options begin with Channel 1 at 2.412 GHz, and each subsequent channel increases in frequency by .005 GHz (except for Channel 14 which is at 2.484 GHz). Default: 1–2.412 GHz.

Note: Some channels are not available for specific geographical areas.

WiFi Security

Authentication type

This field allows you to select the following authentication Options are:

Open—No authentication is needed when this option is selected. This option allows any user to connect to the AP and is generally not recommended. When you select

Open, the following options are available:

None (default)

WEP

WPA Personal

WPA2 Personal

Note: WEP is not a recommended Wi-Fi Security protocol because of its well publicized vulnerabilities. Use WPA/WPA2 Personal instead. Only alphanumeric characters can be used for the WEP passphrase.

Rev 1 Oct.13

87

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Bridge WiFi to

Ethernet

DHCP

Host WiFi IP

WiFi IP Start

WiFi IP End

WiFi IP Netmask

Advanced

Maximum Clients

Transmit Power

Description

This field allows routing between the Ethernet Lan and WLAN. When enabled, the Ethernet port and the Wi-Fi ports are on the same subnet. Available only when the Wi-Fi has its own subnet (Bridge WiFi to Ethernet is disabled.) Options are:

Enabled (Default)

Disabled

Displays the AP’s IP address. Default: 192.168.17.31

Displays the beginning IP address to be served. Default: 192.168.17.100

Displays the ending IP address to be served. Default: 192.168.17.150

Displays the subnet IP netmask of the WiFi network. When this option is selected, the Wi-Fi cannot be bridged to Ethernet. Default: 255.255.255.0

Indicates the maximum number of concurrent users (clients) to be supported. The administrator specifies this number which can range from 1 to 8. Default: 8.

Adjusts the transmit power of the AP. Options are:

High—High Power (16 dB) Default

Low—Low Power (10 dB)

When the b/g Enabled option is selected from the Enable Wireless Access Point field’s drop-down menu, and Open is selected in the WiFi Security Authentication type field, an additional section for Open WEP appears:

Figure 4-23: ACEmanager: LAN/WiFi > Access Point Open WEP section

88 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Field

Open WEP

Description

Note: WEP is not a recommended Wi-Fi Security protocol because of its well publicized vulnerabilities. Use WPA/WPA2

Personal instead. Only alphanumeric characters can be used for the WEP passphrase. WEP is only available if the

Enable Wireless Access Point field is set to b/g Enabled. (See Enable Wireless Access Point on page 87.)

WEP Encryption

Key length

WEP Passphrase

WEP Key

If Enabled is selected, the following three fields in this table display. Options are: Enabled or Disabled

Options are:

64 bit key (generated from password)—Default

128 bit key (generated from password)

64 or 128 bit key (customer specifies 5 or 10 hex characters)

May be 10–255 alphanumeric ASCII characters long. This field is not used if the 64 or 128 bit key (customer) option is selected in the Key length field.

Displays the WEP key in hex characters

The WEP Key is generated from the WEP Passphrase when the Key length is 64-bit key or

128-bit key. This is the Key required by AP clients to connect to the device.

To generate the WEP Key:

1.

Set the Key length.

2.

Enter the WEP Passphrase.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Reboot the device.

If WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal are selected for the WiFi Security

Authentication type field, a WPA/WPA2 Personal section replaces the Open WEP section in the user interface.

Field

WPA/WPA2 Personal

WiFi Encryption

Description

Specify the encryption type for WPA or WPA2 authentication. Options are:

TKIP—Available for 802.11b/g, not available for 802.11n.

AES (default)

Note: If WPA2 is selected as the authentication type (see

WiFi Security Authentication type on page 87) only AES is available.

WPA Passphrase

Specify the length of the WPA Passphrase AP clients use to connect to the device.

Minimum length is 8 characters and maximum length is 64. Default: None.

Rev 1 Oct.13

89

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Client Mode

Client Mode allows a mobile AirLink GX Series device to use a Wi-Fi Client connection to connect to an access point, rather than acting as an access point.

Client Mode has been tested with the top 5 WLAN Access Point vendors: Cisco

®

,

Aruba Networks

®

, Motorola™, HP

®

, and NETGEAR

®

.

You can configure up to 8 Access Points for each AirLink GX Series device. Only one Access Point is used at a time for the client connection. Having additional

APs configured allows for portability.

Select Client Mode from the drop-down box in the WiFi Mode field, and click “+” beside Client Mode to expand that section.

90

Figure 4-24: ACEmanager: LAN/WiFi > WiFi > Client Mode > Automatic

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Field

WiFi Mode

WiFi Client Mode

Description

Allows you to choose the connection mode type. Options are:

Automatic (default)—the WAN connection automatically switches from cellular to

Wi-Fi whenever the Wi-Fi connection has been established

Manual

To connect in manual mode:

1.

Open ACEview and go to Menu > View > Wi-Fi.

2.

ACEview displays a list of available access points. and the connection state.

3.

Select an available AP, and click Connect.

A message window appears asking if you wish to connect the available Access Point.

4.

Click OK.

Available AP

Rev 1 Oct.13

Note: Whenever changing the Wi-Fi Client Mode from Automatic to Manual or Manual to

Automatic, you must reboot the device.

Identifies the currently available access point

Only one AP is shown, even if additional ones are configured. If there is more than one AP available in the area, the one that is highest in the configuration order (in the ACEmanager) is displayed.

91

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Connect

Description

This button only appears when the Manual WiFi Client Mode is selected. Select to activate the Manual mode.

Indicates whether the WiFi Client Mode is connected or not connected

Connect Status

Remote WiFi AP - 1, Remote WiFi AP - 2, and Remote WiFi AP - 3

Remote AP SSID

You can set the SSID/Network Name or it can be automatically generated (default). The

SSID (Service Set Identifier) default value is the same as the AirLink GX Series device serial number that appears on the label on the bottom of the device. Note: Only one SSID is available.

Note: The SSID is case-sensitive.

Remote AP Security

Authentication type

Select the appropriate authentication type for the access point the device is connecting to.

Options are:

Open—No authentication is needed when this option is selected. This option is generally not recommended since it offers no authentication or encryption. Default.

WPA/WPA2 Personal

WEP

Note: WEP is not a recommended Wi-Fi Security protocol because of its well publicized vulnerabilities. WPA/WPA2 Personal is recommended. Only alphanumeric characters can be used for the WEP passphrase.

Remote AP WPA

Passphrase

Specifies the remote AP WPA Passphrase. Minimum length is 8 characters, and maximum length is 64 characters.

Both (AP + Client) Mode

In this mode, the AirLink GX Series device can act as an access point and also use a Wi-Fi Client connection to connect to an access point. The AirLink GX

Series device connects as a client to a configured Access Point (AP) whenever the AP is available, when the AP is not available, it connects to the cellular network, all the while the AirLink GX Series device is acting as a AP to W-Fi clients connected to the GX.

When you select this mode from the WiFi Mode drop-down menu, you can configure the Access Point and Client fields on one window. (Click “+” beside each section to expand it.)

92 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Figure 4-25: ACEmanager: LAN/WiFi > WiFi > Both (AP + Client) Mode

For information on configuring the required fields, see

Access Point Mode on

page 86 and Client Mode on page 90.

Global DNS

When the cellular network grants the IP address to the device, it includes the IP addresses to its DNS servers. Global DNS allows you to override the carrier’s

DNS settings for all connected devices. This is useful when the connected devices need to use a private network.

Note: If there are no alternate DNS defined, the default is the cellular network DNS sever.

Field

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-26: ACEmanager: LAN > Global DNS

Description

Primary carrier DNS IP Address. This and the secondary DNS are generally granted by the cellular network along with the Network IP.

Secondary carrier DNS IP Address

93

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

DNS Proxy

DNS Override

Description

Determines how the connected hosts acquire their first DNS server. Options are:

Enable (default) —All connected hosts (PPP, PPPoE, Wi-Fi, USBNET, and Ethernet) acquire the AirLink device’s IP address as the first DNS server and use the AirLink device as their DNS resolver.

Disable—All connected hosts acquire the Mobile Network Operator-defined DNS server as the first DNS server. The AirLink device is not used as the DNS resolver.

Overrides the carrier DNS addresses with user configured ones. Some carriers ignore the use of Alternate DNS servers and route all DNS requests to their own servers.

Options are: Disable (default) or Enable.

Configurable DNS server to use instead of the cellular network-granted one

Alternate Primary

DNS

Alternate Secondary

DNS

Configurable DNS server to use instead of the cellular network-granted one

PPPOE

PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) allows a point-to-point connection while using Ethernet. Just like the dial up protocol on which it is based, PPPoE can use traditional user name and password authentication to establish a direct connection between two Ethernet devices on a network (e.g., your AirLink device and your computer or router).

Application examples for PPPoE with your AirLink device:

Backup connectivity solution for your network

Individualized Internet connection on a LAN

Password restricted Internet connection

Only one computer, router, or other network device at a time can connect to the

AirLink device using PPPoE. If you are using the AirLink device connected to a router as a back up Internet connection for your network, you should configure the router to use the PPPoE connection and not the individual computers.

Note: To configure a PPPoE connection on some operating systems, you need administrator privileges to the computer you are configuring or access granted by an administrator on the network to add/remove devices to your computer.

94 4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Figure 4-27: ACEmanager: LAN > PPPoE

Field

Host Authentication

Mode

Host User ID

Host Password

Description

Host Authentication Mode: Use PAP or CHAP to request the user login and password during PPP or CHAP negotiation on the host connection. The username and password set in *HOSTUID and *HOSTPW is used.

NONE (Default)

PAP and CHAP

CHAP

User ID for authentication (up to 64 bytes)

Password for authentication

Configure the AirLink Device to Support PPPoE

Note: You must disable the DHCP server for PPPoE to work.

To configure an AirLink device to support PPPoE:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to LAN > Ethernet.

2.

Under General, in the DHCP Server Mode filed, select Disable.

Note: PPPoE authentication is optional. If you use PPPoE authentication, no other tethered LAN connection will have network access, regardless of whether or not the

PPPoE host is connected. If you are using non-authenticated PPPoE, other tethered LAN connections will have network access until a PPPoE host is connected.

3.

If you want to use authenticated PPPoE:

a.

Go to LAN > PPPoE, and in the Host Authentication Mode field, select

PAP and CHAP.

b.

In the Host User ID, enter a user ID for the PPPoE connection.

Rev 1 Oct.13

95

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

c.

In the Host Password field, enter a password for the PPPoE to connection.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Reboot the device.

Tip:

If you leave Host User ID and Host Password blank, any computer or device can connect to the AirLink device using PPPoE.

Note: ACEmanager shows the existing value for the PPPoE password as stars (****).

Optional: Configure the Device Name

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > Dynamic DNS.

2.

In the Service field, select IP Manager.

3.

Under Dynamic IP, enter a name in the Device Name field, such as AirLink device or the ESN. The name can be up to 20 characters long.

The name you choose for Device Name does not affect the connection, but may need to be configured in PPPoE settings for the router, device, or computer you connect to your AirLink device.

Configuring a PPPoE Connection in Windows 7

1.

In Windows 7, go to Start > Control Panel.

96

Figure 4-28: Windows 7: Control Panel

2.

Select Network and Internet.

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Figure 4-29: Windows 7: Control Panel > Network and Internet

3.

Select Network and Sharing Center.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-30: Windows 7: Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center

4.

In the middle of the page, under Change your networking settlings, select Set up a new connection or network.

97

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 4-31: Set Up an Connection or Network

5.

Select Connect to the Internet and click Next.

98

6.

Select Broadband (PPPoE).

4114514

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

7.

If you are using authenticated PPPoE, enter the User name and Password you configured in ACEmanager.

8.

If desired, change the Connection name to something such as PPPoE that clearly identifies the connection.

9.

Click Connect.

For subsequent connections, you can click the network icon in the Task bar ( ) and select the PPPoE connection.

VLAN

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 4-32: ACEmanager: LAN > VLAN

99

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Interface

VLAN ID

Device IP

Subnet Mask

Access Internet

DHCP Server Mode

Starting IP

Ending IP

Description

Displays three VLAN IDs

Displays the VLAN ID

The IP address of the AirLink device for that VLAN interface

The subnet mask indicates the range of host IP addresses which can be reached directly.

Changing this limits or expands the number of clients that can connect to the AirLink device.

Choose access to the Internet. Scroll down options are: “Yes” or “No.”

Options are Enable and Disable (default)

VLAN interface DHCP pool starting IP address

The ending IP for the VLAN interface

VRRP

VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) allows multiple routers to act as the default gateway router for a subnet, thereby reducing the possibility of a single point of failure.

Field

VRRP Enabled

VRRP

Interface

VLAN ID

100

Figure 4-33: ACEmanager: LAN > VRRP

Description

Allows you to activate VRRP. Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

Displays Ethernet and three VLAN IDs

Displays the VLAN ID

4114514

Field

Group ID

Priority

Virtual IP

Mode

Interval

LAN/Wi-Fi Configuration

Description

Enter the VRRP Group ID. VRRP routers in the master and slave have the same Group ID.

VRRP decides whether the device is the master or slave. A greater value of priority indicates that the device is the master.

If a device is configured with VRRP, the host connected to the device displays the Virtual

ID. Virtual IP becomes the VRRP router’s Device IP.

Indicates whether the device is MASTER or BACKUP (default). The Priority number determines the master or backup status

VRRP advertised interval; Default: 1 second

Host Interface Watchdog

The Host Interface Watchdog provides a way for you to ensure that the LAN connection is alive. You can use this feature to monitor:

A host connected to the LAN via an Ethernet or USB connection

A host computer associated with a GX Series device that has a Wi-Fi X-Card installed, provided the Wi-Fi mode is set to “Access Point” or “Both”

(See

Wi-Fi on page 85.)

When the Host Interface Watchdog is enabled, ALEOS sends a ping to the connected host at configured intervals. You can disable Force Keepalive to only send a ping when there is no traffic on the LAN interface. (See

Force Keepalive on page 102.)

If there is no response to the ping, the LAN interface is reset.

Note: The network interface is automatically determined from the IP address and the LAN

configuration. If you have multiple interfaces bridged (see Bridge WiFi to Ethernet on page 72) all interfaces in the bridge and the bridge itself are reset.

After the interface comes back up, ALEOS sends another ping to the connected host. If there is still no response to this ping, the AirLink device reboots. After a reboot caused by the LAN Interface Watchdog, ALEOS waits an hour before attempting pings to prevent repeated frequent reboots.

Note: DUN (PPP) is not supported. If the IP address for the host is on a DUN network, the feature is disabled.

Note: The feature is not disabled when the interface uses Public Mode, but it cannot monitor the host interface unless the cellular network provides a static IP.

Rev 1 Oct.13

101

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 4-34: ACEmanager: LAN > Host Interface Watchdog

Field Description

Keepalive IP address

Enter the IP address of the host to ping

If a host IP address is not configured, the Host Interface Watchdog is disabled.

Keepalive Interval

(min)

Force Keepalive

The interval (in minutes) at which ALEOS pings the LAN-connected device

Options are: 1–1440

If this field is set to 0, the Host Interface Watchdog is disabled. (default)

Enabled (default) —The network interface statistics are not monitored and a ping is always sent at the interval configured in the Keepalive Interval field.

Disabled—The network interface statistics are monitored and connectivity is assumed when there is traffic received. A ping is only sent when there is no traffic for a period greater than the interval set in the Keepalive Interval field.

102 4114514

5: WAN/Cellular Configuration

The WAN/Cellular section allows changes to the cellular connection and main operating mode of the AirLink device. The options available in ACEmanager depend on the type of technology your AirLink device use. Refer to the appropriate section for your device:

CDMA

GSM on page 106

LTE—Fallback to EV-DO on page 111

LTE—Fallback to HSPA+ on page 113

CDMA

5

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 5-1: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular —1x/EV-DO

103

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Command Description

Network Credentials 1x/EVDO

Mobile IP

Mobile IP (MIP) Preferences. On a Mobile IP network, a device connects to the network using PPP.

During the negotiation process the AirLink device is NOT required to present a username and password to authenticate because the authentication parameters are stored in the device itself.

Disabled, SIP only

MIP Preferred

MIP Only

Default: MIP is used when available with a fall back to SIP.

Note: Your account with your Mobile Network Operator may not support all three of these options. check with your Mobile Network Operator as to which one should be used.

EV-DO

Diversity

EV-DO Diversity allows two antennas to provide a more consistent connection.

Disable

Enable (default)

If you are not using a diversity antenna, diversity should be disabled.

Note: This field is not available in all AirLink devices.

EV-DO Data

Service

Change the allowable network type:

EV-DO Preferred — can “fall back” on CDMA/1x

EV-DO Only — fall back disabled

1x Only — EV-DO disabled

Note: For most users, it’s best to leave the default setting (EV-DO Preferred). When this option is selected, your AirLink device connects to an EV-DO network if it is available and falls back to a

CDMA 1x network if EV-DO service is not available. If you choose another option and the selected network is not available, the device will not be able to connect to the cellular network. For example, if you select EV-DO Only and you are in an area where there is no EV-DO network available, the device will not be able to connect to a cellular network until you change this setting.

Network

Roaming

Preference

Allows you to control whether or not roaming (connecting to a mobile broadband network other than that of your Mobile Network Operator). Options are:

Automatic—The device connects to the home network if it is available and to another Mobile

Network Operator’s network if the home network is not available (for example you are outside the coverage area).

Note: Roaming charges may apply.

Home Only—The device only connects to the home network. If the home network is not available (for example, if you are outside the coverage area) the device does not connect until the home network is available again.

Auto PRL

Schedule

(days)

Indicates the PRL update schedule

0=disable

Keep Alive (See

Keepalive on page 116.)

104 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Command

Advanced

Response to

Incoming

Ping

Description

When a ping is received by the device from a remote location, the Response to Incoming Ping redirects it to the selected location.

No response: the incoming ping is completely ignored

ALEOS Responds (default): ALEOS returns to the Ping response.

Pass to Host: The ping is forwarded to the DMZ host with any response from the host forwarded back to the OTA location. If no host is connected, there is no ping response.

Note: Some Mobile Network Operators may block all ICMP traffic on their network. A ping sent to the device from a remote location is not received.

Network

Authentication Mode

Network User

ID

Network

Password

Specifies the authentication method to use in the network PPP session. Options are:

None

CHAP

PAP (default)

Network User ID

The login that is used to login to the cellular network, when required.

uid=user id (up to 64 bytes)

Network Password is the password that, when required, is used to login to the cellular network. pw=password (30 characters maximum).

Check profile

1 Params

Enables checking and updating the Profile 1 Parameters. Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

NAI

PHA

SHA

MHSS

MASS

Sets the Network Access ID

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

Sets the IP address of the primary home agent

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

Sets the IP address of the secondary home agent

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

Sets the home agent shared secret key

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

Sets the AAA shared secret key

Not all Mobile Network Operators or account types support this feature.

Network

Watchdog

(minutes)

Network connection watchdog

If there is no WWAN/Cellular network connection for the number of minutes configured in this field, the device reboots. This feature cannot be disabled.

5–255 minutes (allowed values)

120 minutes (default)

Load PRL File

The Load PRL File button allows you to download a Preferred Roaming List.

Update PRL

The Update PRL button allows you to update your Preferred Roaming List.

Rev 1 Oct.13

105

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Command Description

Update Profile

The Update Profile button allows you to update the profile of your Preferred Roaming List.

Re-Activation

Re-Activate

Cellular

Account

See

Re-Activation on page 118.

Re-Activation

Status

See

Re-Activation on page 118.

GSM

Figure 5-2: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular—GSM

Command Description

Network Credentials GSM

APN in Use

The APN in use for the current cellular connection.

106 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Command

APN Type

Description

Choose to use an APN based on the SIM in use or a custom APN manually entered.

Select From List — When selected, a list of APNs based on the SIM in use are available as a drop-down list.

User Entry — When selected, an entry field appears for typing in the APN that should be used

Displays if the APN type is “User Entry.” Enter the APN of your choice.

User Entered

APN

RX Diversity

Allows two antennas to provide a more consistent connection

Disable

Enable (default)

If you are not using a diversity antenna, diversity should be disabled.

Note: This field is not available in all AirLink devices.

SIM PIN

If your AirLInk device has a PIN-locked SIM card installed, before the device goes on-air for the first time:

1.

Obtain the PIN from your Mobile Network Operator.

2.

Click the SIM PIN button.

3.

Select Enable.

4.

Enter the PIN twice and click Save.

Note: On subsequent reboots and reconnects, ALEOS automatically uses the PIN. This feature prevents the SIM from being used in another device without re-entering the PIN.

Note: You have three attempts to enter the correct PIN. If the correct PIN is not entered by the third attempt, the SIM card becomes blocked and you need a PUK code from your Mobile Network

Operator to unlock it. For more information, see SIM Card is Blocked on page 397.

Keep Alive (See

Keepalive on page 116.)

Rev 1 Oct.13

107

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

GSM: WAN/Cellular > Advanced

Figure 5-3: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular > Advanced

Field Description

Response to Incoming Ping

When a ping is received by the device from a remote location, the Response to

Incoming Ping redirects it to the selected location.

No response: the incoming ping is completely ignored

ALEOS Responds (default): ALEOS returns to the Ping response.

Pass to Host: The ping is forwarded to the DMZ host with any response from the host forwarded back to the OTA location. If no host is connected, there is no ping response.

Note: Some Mobile Network Operators may block all ICMP traffic on their network.

A ping sent to the device from a remote location is not received.

Network Authentication

Mode

Specifies the authentication method to use in the network PPP session. Options are:

None

CHAP

PAP (default)

108 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Field

Network User ID

Network Password

Description

Network User ID

The login that is used to login to the cellular network, when required.

uid=user id (up to 64 bytes)

Network Password is the password that, when required, is used to login to the cellular network. pw=password (30 characters maximum).

Network Watchdog (minutes)

Network connection watchdog

If there is no network connection for the number of minutes configured in this field, the device reboots. This feature cannot be disabled.

5–255 minutes (allowed values)

120 minutes (default)

Set Carrier (Operator)

Selection

Manually specify an operator.

Enter the desired parameters in the following format: mode[,format[,oper]]

mode= 0: Automatic — any affiliated carrier [default]

mode= 1: Manual — use only the operator <oper> specified

mode= 4: Manual/Automatic — if manual selection fails, goes to automatic mode

format= 0: Alphanumeric (“name”)

format= 2: Numeric

oper=”name”

See also to

+COPS and

*NETOP?

Note: Not all carriers or accounts allow specifying the operator. If the carrier doesn't support it, this command may appear to be ineffectual.

Current Radio Module Band

Band reported by the radio module.

Setting for Band

This feature enables advanced users to select the RF band range or technology the AirLink device uses. Most of the time it’s best to leave this field at the default setting (All bands) but there may be times when you want to select a band range or technology that you know is more stable in the region where the AirLink device is located. The list of options displayed depends on the radio module in your device and its configuration. Possible options include:

All bands (default)

GSM 900/1800

GSM ALL

WCDMA ALL

WCDMA 900/2100

Note: For some Mobile Network Operator SIM Cards, you may need to set the radio band before installing the SIM card.

Rev 1 Oct.13

109

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Always on connection

Description

This option allows you to configure the AirLink device to use minimal wireless network resources when there has not been any outgoing WAN network traffic.

Enabled—The AirLink device maintains a mobile network data connection.

(default)

Disabled—Connect on traffic—The AirLink device only establishes a mobile network data connection:

When there is network traffic

If SMS Wakeup is configured and the device receives the specified type of

SMS (For information on configuring SMS Wakeup, see

SMS Wakeup on page 168.)

Note: You can also use AT*RADIO_CONNECT to switch the cellular network connection on and off. See

*RADIO_CONNECT on page 333.

Connection timeout

(minutes)

This field defines the timeout period for Always on connection, and is only visible when Always on Connection is set to Disabled - Connect on traffic.

If there is no outgoing packet through the WAN interface during the period set in this field (in minutes), the AirLink device disables the WAN connection. This timer is triggered after every outgoing packet, except AT

*IPPINGFORCE

keep alive packets.

2–65535 minutes (Default is 2.)

Note: You can also use AT*TRAFWUPTOUT to set the timeout period. See

*TRAFWUPTOUT on page 334.

On WAN

Disconnect

If a disconnect from the Mobile Network Operator occurs:

Reconnect (default)

Reset Radio — ALEOS resets the radio after a Mobile Network Operator disconnect.

APN Backup (See

Backup APN on page 119.)

110 4114514

LTE—Fallback to EV-DO

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Figure 5-4: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular > LTE - Fallback to EV-DO

Command Description

LTE (falls back to EV-DO)

APN in Use

User Entered

APN

The APN in use for the current cellular connection

Enter the desired APN.

Note: If you are activating a GX440 device using a SIM card for an account with special properties, such as a static IP APN, on the LTE network:

1.

Enter the static IP APN in this field.

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Click Reboot.

Rev 1 Oct.13

111

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Command

LTE Data

Service

Description

For LTE, fallback to EV-DO networks. Options are:

LTE Preferred (default)—EV-DO is used when LTE service is not available

CDMA Only

LTE Only

Note: For most users, it’s best to leave the default setting (LTE Preferred). When this option is selected, your AirLink device connects to an LTE network if it is available and falls back to an EV-

DO network if LTE service is not available. If you choose another option and the selected network is not available, the device will not be able to connect to the cellular network. For example, if you select LTE Only and you are in an area where there is no LTE network available, the device will not be able to connect to a cellular network until you change this setting.

Keep Alive (See

Keepalive on page 116.)

Advanced

CDMA Mobile IP

Options are:

MIP Preferred (default)

Disabled, SIP Only

MIP Only

Network

Roaming

Preference

Automatic option allows home or home preferred network preference. Options are:

Automatic (default)

Home Only

Response to

Incoming Ping

When a ping is received by the device from a remote location, the Response to Incoming Ping redirects it to the selected location.

No response: the incoming ping is completely ignored

ALEOS Responds (default): ALEOS returns to the Ping response.

Pass to Host: The ping is forwarded to the DMZ host with any response from the host forwarded back to the OTA location. If no host is connected, there is no ping response.

Note: Some Mobile Network Operators may block all ICMP traffic on their network. A ping sent to the device from a remote location is not received.

LTE

Authentication

Mode

Specifies the authentication method to be used in the network PPP session. Options are:

NONE (default)

PAP

CHAP

Network User

ID

Network User ID

The login that is used to login to the cellular network, when required.

uid=user id (up to 64 bytes)

112 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Command

Network

Password

Network

Watchdog

(minutes)

Description

Network Password is the password that, when required, is used to login to the cellular network. pw=password (30 characters maximum).

Network connection watchdog

If there is no network connection for the number of minutes configured in this field, the device reboots. This feature cannot be disabled.

5–255 minutes (allowed values)

120 minutes (default)

LTE—Fallback to HSPA+

Figure 5-5: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular—LTE - Fallback to HSPA+

Command

LTE (Falls back to HSPA+)

APN in Use

Description

The APN in use for the current cellular connection

Rev 1 Oct.13

113

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Command

User Entered APN

RX Diversity

SIM PIN

Description

Enter the desired APN.

Note: If you are activating a GX440 device using a SIM card for an account with special properties, such as a static IP APN, on the LTE network:

1.

Enter the static IP APN in this field.

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Click Reboot.

Allows two antennas to provide a more consistent connection

Disable

Enable (default)

If you are not using a diversity antenna, diversity should be disabled.

Note: This field is not available in all AirLink devices.

If your AirLInk device has a PIN-locked SIM card installed, before the device goes on-air for the first time:

1.

Obtain the PIN from your Mobile Network Operator.

2.

Click the SIM PIN button.

3.

Select Enable.

4.

Enter the PIN twice and click Save.

Note: On subsequent reboots and reconnects, ALEOS automatically uses the PIN. This feature prevents the SIM from being used in another device without re-entering the PIN.

Note: You have three attempts to enter the correct PIN. If the correct PIN is not entered by the third attempt, the SIM card becomes blocked and you need a PUK code from your Mobile

Network Operator to unlock it. For more information, see

SIM Card is Blocked on page 397.

Keep Alive (See

Keepalive

on page 116

.)

Advanced

114 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Command

Response to

Incoming Ping

Description

When a ping is received by the device from a remote location, the Response to Incoming

Ping redirects it to the selected location.

No response: the incoming ping is completely ignored

ALEOS Responds (default): ALEOS returns to the Ping response.

Pass to Host: The ping is forwarded to the DMZ host with any response from the host forwarded back to the OTA location. If no host is connected, there is no ping response.

Note: Some Mobile Network Operators may block all ICMP traffic on their network. A ping sent to the device from a remote location is not received.

LTE Authentication

Mode

Specifies the authentication method to be used in the network PPP session. Options are:

NONE (default)

PAP

CHAP

Network User ID

Network Password

Network User ID

The login that is used to login to the cellular network, when required. uid=user id (up to 64 bytes)

Network Password is the password that, when required, is used to login to the cellular network. pw=password (30 characters maximum).

Network Watchdog

(minutes)

Network connection watchdog

If there is no network connection for the number of minutes configured in this field, the device reboots. This feature cannot be disabled.

5–255 minutes (allowed values)

120 minutes (default)

Setting the Band

This feature enables advanced users to select the RF band range or technology the AirLink device uses. Most of the time it’s best to leave this field at the default setting (All bands) but there may be times when you want to select a band range or technology that you know is more stable in the region where the AirLink device is located. The list of options displayed depends on the radio module in your device and its configuration. Possible options include:

All bands (default)

Europe 3G

North America 3G

Europe 2G

GSM ALL

Europe

North America

WCDMA ALL

LTE ALL

APN Backup (See

Backup APN

on page 119

.)

Rev 1 Oct.13

115

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Keepalive

Keepalive is used to test the connection to the cellular network by pinging an IP address after a specified period of inactivity. Keepalive is only recommended for users who have a remote terminated device that infrequently communicates to the network or if you have experienced issues over time where the device can no longer be reached remotely.

When Keepalive pings the IP address, an acknowledgment indicates there is an active connection to the network. If the AirLink device does not receive a response from the IP address, it makes additional attempts according to a backoff algorithm before determining the Internet connection is not functioning properly. If it determines the connection is not functioning, the device then attempts to reconnect to the Mobile Network Operator to reestablish IP connectivity.

Data Usage Using Keepalive

Keepalive is an optional feature. If you frequently pass data with your device, you most likely do not need to have Keepalive enabled. When using Keepalive, be aware that a ping moves approximately 66 bytes of data over the network and is billable by the Mobile Network Operator. The following *IPPING settings incur approximate monthly data usage in addition to any other data usage.

Command

Keep Alive

Keepalive IP

Address

Description

The IP address that the AirLink Device pings to determine if there is Internet connectivity and make sure this IP address is accessible.

Set the IP address or valid Internet domain name for the AirLink device to ping to keep itself alive

(online). *IPPING must to be set to a value other than 0 to enable pinging.

d.d.d.d=IP address

name=domain name

*IPPINGADDR sets the IP address you want to use for the connection test.

If *IPPINGADDR is left blank or is set to an invalid IP address (e.g., an IP which is unreachable or one which is not a valid IP address), device performance is adversely affected.

116 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Command

Keepalive

Ping Time

(minutes)

Force

Keepalive

Ping

Description

The amount of time between pings when the device is idle.

Set the period to ping (if no valid packets have been received) a specified address (*IPPINGADDR) to keep the device alive (online).

Disable pinging (default)

5-255 minutes

*IPPING sets the interval, in minutes, at which you want Keepalive to test the network connection. To disable Keepalive, set *IPPING to 0 (default setting).

Note: Pings count toward your Data Usage; the more frequently pings occur, the more your Data

Usage is affected. See

Data Usage Using Keepalive .

Determines if the ping should occur even if the device is not idle. Forces the IP ping even if IP traffic has occurred during the time interval.

Disable (default)

Enable

Rev 1 Oct.13

117

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Re-Activation

The Re-Activation section of the WAN/Cellular tab only appears for EV-DO/1X devices. The Re-Activation feature can only be used when a particular device that has already been activated needs re-activation. If your device needs to be reactivated, click the button labeled “Re-Activate Cellular Account”. When you click this button, the status shows the progress of the re-activation.

Note: If the provision fails, an error message appears.

After the provision process finishes, the system then restarts, as a reset is necessary to initiate the new account information.

Figure 5-6: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular > Re-Activation

118 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Backup APN

This feature enables you to configure a backup APN to be used as a backup network connection mechanism, only if the primary APN is not available. When it is enabled, the device connects to the backup APN only if it is unable to connect to the primary APN.

Note: Switching to the backup APN can take five minutes or more, depending on the device. If the device is always connecting to the backup APN, check the primary APN to ensure that it is configured correctly.

To configure a backup APN:

1.

Go to WAN/Cellular > APN Backup.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 5-7: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular > APN Backup

2.

Enter the backup APN.

3.

Select the Network Authentication Mode. The options are:

·

PAP (default)

·

CHAP

·

None

4.

Enter the Network User ID and Password, if these are required for the wireless network.

5.

Click Apply.

Reliable Static Routing (RSR)

Reliable Static Routing enables you to force specified traffic to use different routing rules (rather than the default, which is usually cellular) to direct specified traffic to a designated primary route. If the primary route fails, the specified traffic uses a backup route.

119

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

First, you designate specific traffic to use the primary route, based on the destination IP address and subnet mask. A configured tracking object test verifies the validity of the primary route. If the test fails, the backup route is used. The object test continues to run and as soon as the primary route is available, traffic is switched back to the primary route.

You can direct the traffic to a network ( Figure 5-8 ) or to an individual host

(

Figure 5-9

).

Cellular

(Backup route)

Internet

Network Management Center

Network IP: 64.100.20.128

64.100.20.129

64.100.20.130

255.255.255.252

AirLink device

Ethernet

(Primary route)

Figure 5-8: RSR directed to a destination network

Cellular

(Backup route)

Internet

Network Management Center

64.100.20.128

255.255.255.255

AirLink device

Ethernet

(Primary route)

Figure 5-9: RSR directed to a destination IP address (individual host)

To configure Reliable Static Routing:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to WAN/Cellular > Reliable Static Route (RSR).

120 4114514

WAN/Cellular Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 5-10: ACEmanager: WAN/Cellular > Reliable Static Route (RSR)

Note: Configure all the other fields before setting the Enable/Disable RSR field. Once you enable RSR, some fields on this page are not editable.

2.

Select the interfaces for the primary and backup routes. The options are:

·

Ethernet 1 (default for primary route). If you are using a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed, the additional Ethernet ports will appear in the drop-down menu as Ethernet 2 and Ethernet 3.

·

USB

·

Wi-Fi (Available only if you have a GX Series device with a Wi-Fi X-Card installed)

·

Cellular (default for backup route)

3.

Set the Destination IP/Network and Destination Subnet Mask.

To configure the RSR destination as a network, as shown in

Figure 5-8 , you

would enter:

·

64.100.20.128 in the Destination IP/Network field.

·

255.255.255.252 in the Destination Subnet Mask field.

To configure the RSR destination as an individual host, as shown in

Figure 5-9

, you would enter:

·

64.100.20.128 in the Destination IP/Network field.

·

255.255.255.255 in the Destination Subnet Mask field.

4.

Set the Tracking Object (Tracking Object 1 or No Tracking Object). Normally, you would select Tracking Object 1 from the drop-down menu.

5.

Under Tracking Object, leave the Enable/Disable Tracking Object set at

Disable until you finish configuring the other Tracking Object fields.

6.

Enter the Test IP address (normally an IP address within the Traffic Selection

Criteria Network/Subnet).

121

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

7.

From the drop-down menu, select the desired Test Interface (normally the same interface as the primary route). Options are:

·

Ethernet 1 (If you are using a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-

Card installed, the additional Ethernet ports will appear in the drop-down menu as Ethernet 2 and Ethernet 3.)

·

USB

·

Wi-Fi (Available only if you have a GX Series device with a Wi-Fi X-Card installed)

·

Cellular

8.

Enter the Test Interval in seconds. This is the interval between tracking object tests.

For most applications, the default values for the Test Interval, Test Timeout, and Maximum number of retries should be fine.

If you want to change these values, be aware of the following:

·

Selecting a short test interval increases network traffic and may lead to false failures if the network is busy.

·

Selecting a long test interval may mean that traffic does not switch to the secondary route quickly enough when the primary route fails.

·

The test interval must be greater than the product of Test Timeout x

Maximum number of Test Retries.

[Test Interval] > [Test Timeout] x [Maximum number of Retires]

9.

Enter the Test Timeout in seconds. This is the time to wait for a response. If this time expires before a response is received, the test attempt fails.

10.

Enter the Maximum number of Test Retries. This is the number of times the device sends the test messages (without receiving a response) before it declares the primary network down and switches the specified traffic to the backup network.

11.

In the Enable/Disable Tracking Object field, select Enable.

12.

In the Enable/Disable RSR field, select Enable.

122 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

6: VPN Configuration

The AirLink device can act as a Virtual Private Network (VPN) device, providing enterprise VPN access to any device connected to the

AirLink device even when a device has no VPN client capability on its own. The AirLink device supports three types of VPN: IPsec, GRE, and SSL. The AirLink device can support up to five VPN tunnels at the same time.

IPsec

The IP protocol that drives the Internet is inherently insecure. Internet

Protocol Security (IPsec), which is a standards-based protocol, secures communications of IP packets over public networks.

IPsec is a common network layer security control and is used to create a virtual private network (VPN).

The advantages of using the IPsec feature includes:

Data Protection: Data Content Confidentiality allows you to protect your data from any unauthorized view, because the data is encrypted (encryption algorithms are used).

Access Control: Access Control implies a security service that prevents unauthorized use of a Security Gateway, a network behind a gateway or bandwidth on that network.

Data Origin Authentication: Data Origin Authentication verifies the actual sender, thus eliminating the possibility of forging the actual sender’s identification by a third-party.

Data Integrity: Data Integrity Authentication allows both ends of the communication channel to confirm that the original data sent has been received as transmitted, without being tampered with in transit. This is achieved by using authentication algorithms and their outputs.

6

123

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Split Tunnel

The AirLink device supports Global settings with one encrypted tunnel and one open tunnel. A sample server subnet for a Global setting would be 172.16.1.0/24.

Global settings VPNs should be set up with care, as a Global settings configuration with both an enterprise VPN and access to the public Internet can inadvertently expose company resources.

Figure 6-1: ACEmanager: VPN > Split Tunnel

Field

Incoming Out of Band

Description

Allows all incoming out of band or out of tunnel traffic

Options are: Blocked (default) or Enabled

Outgoing ALEOS out of band can be blocked or allowed (default)

Outgoing Management

Out of Band

Outgoing Host Out of

Band

Outgoing Host out of band can be blocked (default) or allowed

VPN 1

The VPN 1 tunnel can be configured as IPsec, GRE, or SSL. Enabling any of these tunnels will expose other options for configuring the tunnel.

Figure 6-2: ACEmanager: VPN > VPN 1

124 4114514

VPN Configuration

IPsec

The IPsec architecture model includes the Sierra Wireless AirLink gateway as a remote gateway at one end communicating, through a VPN tunnel, with a VPN gateway at the other end. The remote gateway is connected to a Remote network and the VPN is connected to the Local network. The communication of data may be secured through the use of IPsec protocols.

The IPsec VPN employs the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol to set up a

Security Association (SA) between the AirLink device and a Cisco (or Cisco compatible) enterprise VPN server. IPsec consists of two phases to set up an SA between peer VPNs. Phase 1 creates a secure channel between the AirLink

Device VPN and the enterprise VPN, thereby enabling IKE exchanges. Phase 2 sets up the IPsec SA that is used to securely transmit enterprise data.

You can specify either or both peers—local (My Identity Type field) and remote

(Peer Identity Type field) using an FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) or the IP address.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 6-3: ACEmanager: VPN > VPN 1> IPsec Tunnel

125

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

VPN # Type

VPN # Status

Set VPN Policy

VPN Gateway

Address

Pre-shared Key 1

My Identity Type

Description

Use this field to enable or disable the VPN # tunnel. If custom settings are used, they will be saved and the tunnel can be disabled and re-enabled without needing to reenter any of the settings. For a successful configuration, all settings for the VPN tunnel must be identical between the AirLink Device VPN and the enterprise VPN server.

Options are:

Tunnel Disabled (default)

IPsec Tunnel

GRE Tunnel

SSL Tunnel

Indicates the current status of the VPN # connection. Use this when troubleshooting a VPN

# connection. Options are: Disabled, Not Connected, or Connected.

Click this button to apply the new settings. The device does not need to be rebooted.

The IP address of the server that this VPN client connects to. This IP address must be open to connections from the AirLink device. The default VPN Gateway IP Addresses are static address on Sierra Wireless Servers. They are:

VPN Gateway IP address

3

4

1

2

5

208.81.123.21

208.81.123.22

208.81.123.26

208.81.123.23

208.81.123.24

You can use these default IP addresses to confirm that an IPSec connection can be established with your wireless configuration before making any configuration changes, and

as an example to model your VPN configuration after. (See Figure 6-3

.)

Pre-shared Key (PSK) used to initiate the VPN tunnel

Options are:

IP (default) — The My Identity - IP field appears with the WAN IP address assigned by the carrier

FQDN — The My Identity - FQDN field appears. Enter a fully qualified domain name

(FQDN) e. g., modemname.domainname.com

User FQDN — The My Identity - FQDN field appears. Enter a User FQDN whose values should include a username (e.g. [email protected])

126 4114514

VPN Configuration

Field

My Identity - IP or

My Identity - FQDN

Description

My Identity - IP appears only when IP is selected from the My Identity Type drop-down menu. The WAN IP address assigned by the carrier appears.

My Identity - FQDN appears only when User FQDN or FQDN is selected from the My

Identity Type drop-down menu. Enter an FQDN or User FQDN.

Note: If you are using a FQDN for your device (My Identity) either:

Set up a Dynamic DNS on the Services > Dynamic DNS tab. (See Dynamic DNS on page 151.) or

Use a DNS server as your domain host

Peer Identity Type

Peer Identity - IP or

Peer Identity - FQDN

Negotiation Mode

IKE Encryption

Algorithm

IKE Authentication

Algorithm

IKE Key Group

IKE SA Life Time

IKE DPD

Required in some configurations to identify the client or peer side of a VPN connection.

Options are:

IP (default) — The Peer Identity - IP field appears with the IP address of a VPN server set up by Sierra Wireless for your testing purposes

FQDN — The Peer Identity - FQDN field appears. Enter an FQDN

(e. g. modemname.domainname.com)

User FQDN — The Peer Identity - FQDN field appears. Enter a User FQDN whose values should include a username (e.g., [email protected])

Peer Identity - IP appears only when IP is selected from the Peer Identity Type dropdown menu. The VPN Gateway IP Address appears.

Peer Identity - FQDN appears only when User FQDN or FQDN is selected from the

Peer Identity Type drop-down menu. Enter the Peer FQDN or Peer User FQDN.

Enable this configuration to operate the onboard VPN under Aggressive mode. Aggressive mode offers increased performance at the expense of security.

Options are:

Main (default)

Aggressive

Determines the type and length of encryption key used to encrypt/decrypt ESP

(Encapsulating Security Payload) packets. 3DES supports 168-bit encryption. AES

(Advanced Encryption Standard) supports both 128-bit and 256-bit encryption.

Options are: DES, 3DES, AES-128 (default), and AES-256

MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit digest for authentication. SHA is a more secure algorithm that produces both 160-bit (SHA1) and 256-bit (SHA256) digests.

Options are: MD5, SHA1 (default), and SHA256

Options are: DH1, DH2 (default), or DH5

Determines how long the VPN tunnel is active in seconds.

Options are: 180 to 86400; Default: 7200

Enable (or disable) Dead Peer Detection (DPD)

When DPD is enabled, the AirLink device checks the server if there has been no traffic for a configured interval. If it does not receive an acknowledgment, it retries at 5 second intervals. If there is no acknowledgment after 5 retries, the status of the VPN is set to Not

Connected and the device attempts to renegotiate IPSEC security parameters with its peer.

Default is Disabled.

Rev 1 Oct.13

127

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

IKE DPD Interval

(seconds)

Local Address Type

Description

Use this field to set the DPD interval (in seconds). If there has been no traffic for the period of time set in this field, the AirLink device retries checking with the server, as described in

IKE DPD .

Options are: 0 to 3600 (default is 1200)

If this field is set to 0, DPD monitoring is turned off (or disabled as described in the IKE

DPD section), but the AirLink device still responds to DPD requests from the server.

The network information of the device. Options are: Use the Host Subnet, Single Address, and Subnet Address (default)

Local Address

Local Address -

Netmask

Device subnet address

Device subnet mask information; 24-bit netmask

Default: 255.255.255.0

Remote Address Type

The network information of the IPsec server behind the IPsec gateway.

Options are: Subnet Address (default) and Single Address

Remote Address

The IP address of the device behind the gateway

Remote Address -

Netmask

Remote subnet mask information. 24-bit netmask

Default: 255.255.255.0

Perfect Forward

Secrecy

IPsec Encryption

Algorithm

IPsec Authentication

Algorithm

IPsec Key Group

IPsec SA Life Time

Provides additional security through a DH shared secret value. When this feature is enabled, one key cannot be derived from another. This ensures previous and subsequent encryption keys are secure even if one key is compromised. Options are: Yes (default) or

No.

Determines the type and length of encryption key used to encrypt/decrypt ESP

(Encapsulating Security Payload) packets. 3DES supports 168-bit encryption. AES

(Advanced Encryption Standard) supports both 128-bit and 256-bit encryption.

Options are: None, DES, 3DES, AES-128 (default), and AES-256.

Can be configured with MD5 or SHA1. MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit digest for authentication. SHA is a more secure algorithm that produces both 160-bit (SHA1) and

256-bit (SHA256) digests.

Options are: None, MD5, SHA1 (default), and SHA 256.

Determines how the AirLink Device VPN creates an SA with the VPN server. The DH

(Diffie-Hellman) key exchange protocol establishes pre-shared keys during the phase 1 authentication. The AirLink Device supports three prime key lengths, including Group 1

(768 bits), Group 2 (1,024 bits), and Group 5 (1,536 bits). Options are: None, DH1, DH2

(default), or DH5.

Determines how long the VPN tunnel is active in seconds

Options are: 180 to 86400; Default: 7200

GRE

The AirLink Device can act as a Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) endpoint, providing a means to encapsulate a wide variety of network layer packets inside

IP tunneling packets. With this feature you can reconfigure IP architectures without worrying about connectivity. GRE creates a point-to-point link between routers on an IP network.

128 4114514

VPN Configuration

Figure 6-4: ACEmanager: VPN > VPN1 > GRE Tunnel

See the IPsec table for parameter descriptions.

Field Description

VPN # Type

VPN # Status

Options are: Tunnel Disabled or GRE Tunnel. Enabling the GRE Tunnel will expose other options for configuring the tunnel.

Indicates the status of the GRE tunnel on the device

Options are: Disabled, Connected or Not Connected

Click this button to apply the new settings. The device does not need to be rebooted.

Set VPN Policy

VPN Gateway

Address

The IP address of the device that this client connects to. This IP address must be open to connections from the device.

Remote Address Type

The network information of the GRE server behind the GRE gateway

Remote Address

Remote Address -

Netmask

The IP address of the device behind the gateway

The subnet network mask of the device behind the GRE gateway

Note: Never use a 16-bit subnet mask: GRE tunnel establishment will fail.

GRE TTL

GRE time to live (TTL) value is the upper bound on the time that a GRE packet can exist in a network. In practice, the TTL field is reduced by one on every router hop. This number is in router hops and not in seconds.

SSL Tunnel

The SSL tunnel allows the device and the server to communicate across a network securely. SSL provides endpoint authentication and secure communications over the Internet.

If the SSL tunnel is selected, you can opt to secure remote communications via

SSL.

Rev 1 Oct.13

129

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

The AirLink device client will authenticate the server using a PKI certificate. The server will authenticate the client via username and password. The Root CA certificate for the server certificate must be loaded on the device.

Note: SSL tunnel is based on the OpenVPN open source package. AirLink devices are

SSL clients and will only talk to an SSL server (also based on the OpenVPN package).

Field

VPN 1 Type

VPN 1 Status

Set VPN Policy

130

Figure 6-5: ACEmanager: VPN > VPN1 > SSL Tunnel

Description

Options are: Tunnel Disabled or SSL Tunnel. Enabling the SSL Tunnel will expose other options for configuring the tunnel.

Indicates the status of the SSL tunnel on the device

Options are: Disabled, Connected or Not Connected

Click this button to apply the new settings. The device does not need to be rebooted.

4114514

VPN Configuration

Field

SSL Role

Tunnel Mode

Protocol

Peer Port

Peer Identity

Description

The AirLink device can only be an SSL client. Default: Client

The Tunnel Mode is set to “Routing”.

Displays the protocol used for configuration. Only supports UDP

The Peer Port is the UPD port on the peer device.

Enter the IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the peer device.

Encryption Algorithm

Options are: DES, Blowfish, DES, Cast128, AES-128, and AES-256

Authentication

Algorithm

Options are: MD5, SHA-1, and SHA-256

Compression

Options are: LZ0 or NONE

Load Root Certificate

Load Root Certificate loads the server root CA certificate. When the button is selected, a window pop-ups and enable you to browse and select the file containing the root CA certificate.

Note: Although the certificate file for each device is unique to that device, they must all have the file name, home.crt. If you have multiple devices, be sure to organize the certificate files so you can distinguish which file is for which device.

Root Certificate Name

The Root Certificate Name will display here

User Name

User Password

The user name required for client authentication

The user password required for client authentication

Tunnel-MTU

MSS Fix

Fragment

Allow Peer Dynamic

IP

Default: 1500 bytes

Default: 1400 bytes

Default: 1300 bytes

Options are: Enable or Disable

Re-negotiation

(seconds)

Ping Interval

(seconds)

Tunnel Restart

(seconds)

NAT

Default: 24 hours

This is the keep-alive sent by the client. Default: 0 seconds

Enter the time for a tunnel restart (unit in seconds)

Options are: Enable or Disable. Note that this is a Carrier NAT, not a local NAT

Rev 1 Oct.13

131

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Load Root Certificate

Once you accept the default certificate, the SSL connection can be completed.

To load a root certificate,

1.

Click Load Root Certificate.

The following dialog-box appears.

2.

Select the SSL Certificate File for your device.

3.

Click Upload File to Device.

VPN 2 to VPN 5

The VPN 2 through VPN 5 sections only allow configuration of the IPsec and

GRE tunnels on the device. Figure 6-3 shows the screen display for the VPN 2 submenu; screen data fields for the VPN 3, 4, and 5 submenus are identical.

Figure 6-6: ACEmanager: VPN > VPN 2

There are three options in the scroll down menu: Tunnel Disabled, IPsec Tunnel, and GRE Tunnel. Enabling the IPsec or GRE Tunnel will expose other options for configuring that tunnel. The options shown in Figures 6-3 and 6-4 for VPN 1 are the same for VPNs 2 through 5.

132 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

7: Security Configuration

The security tab covers firewall-type functions. These functions include how data is routed or restricted from one side of the device to the other, i.e., from computers or devices connected to the device

(LAN) and from computers or devices contacting it from a remote source (WAN). These features are set as rules.

Tip:

For additional security, Sierra Wireless recommends that you change

the default password for ACEmanager. See Change Password on page 261.

7

Solicited vs. Unsolicited

How the device responds to data being routed from one network connection to the other depends on the origin of the data.

If a computer on the LAN initiates a contact to a WAN location

(such as a LAN connected computer accessing an Internet web site), the response to that contact is solicited.

If, however, a remote computer initiates the contact (such as a computer on the Internet accessing a camera connected to the device), the connection is considered unsolicited.

Port Forwarding

In Port Forwarding, any unsolicited data coming in on a defined

Public Port is routed to the corresponding Private Port and Host IP of a device connected to the specified Physical Interface. You can forward a single port or a range of ports.

Note: Port Forwarding requires Private Mode. See

Private and Public Mode on page 67.

Internet

Public port(s) Private port(s)

AirLink device Host IP/Destination computer

Figure 7-1: Port Forwarding

133

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Single port

To define a port forwarding rule for a single port:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Security > Port Forwarding.

134

Figure 7-2: ACEmanager: Security > Port Forwarding (Single Port)

2.

In the Port Forwarding Enabled field, select Enable.

3.

Click “Add More” to display a rule line.

4.

In the Public Start Port field, enter the desired public network port number.

Values between 1 and 65535 are supported, although Sierra Wireless recommends using a value greater than 1024.

Unsolicited data coming in on this port is forwarded to the port you select in the Private Start Port field.

5.

In the Public End Port field, enter 0.

6.

Select the desired protocol (see

Protocol on page 136):

·

TCP

·

UDP

·

TCP & UDP

7.

Enter the IP address of the computer you want to forward data to.

8.

In the Private Start Port field, enter the number of the port on the destination computer that you want to forward data to.

9.

Click Apply.

10.

Reboot.

You do not need to reboot immediately, if you have additional changes to make, but port forwarding does not take effect until the device is rebooted.

Range of ports

To define a port forwarding rule for a range of ports:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Security > Port Forwarding.

4114514

Security Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 7-3: ACEmanager: Security > Port Forwarding (Port Range)

2.

In the Port Forwarding Enabled field, select Enable.

3.

Click “Add More” to display a rule line.

4.

Set the port range for incoming data:

a.

In the Public Start Port field, enter the desired public network port number. Values between 1 and 65535 are supported, although Sierra

Wireless recommends using a value greater than 1024.

b.

In the Public Port End field, enter the last public network port number in the range. The value you enter in the Public Port End field must be greater than the value in the Public Start Port field, or ALEOS rejects the selection.

Unsolicited data coming in on ports in this range are forwarded to a range of ports, starting with the port you select in the Private Start Port field.

5.

Select the desired protocol (see

Protocol on page 136):

·

TCP

·

UDP

·

TCP &UDP

6.

Enter the IP address of the computer you want to forward data to.

7.

In the Private Start Port field, enter the starting port number for the range of ports on the destination computer that you want to forward data to.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Reboot.

You do not need to reboot immediately, if you have additional changes to make, but port forwarding does not take effect until the device is rebooted.

Note: Sierra Wireless recommends that the total number of port forwardings be fewer than

1000 ports, including single port forwarding and port forwarding within a range.

135

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field Description

Port Forwarding

Enabled

Public Start Port

Port on the public network or starting port on the public network for a range of ports.

Supported values: 1–65535

(Recommended values: greater than 1024)

Public End Port

Enables port forwarding rules. Options are Enable and Disable

(default).

Ending port for a range of ports on the public network.

For a single port forwarding, this field must be 0.

For a range of ports, this value must be greater than the value in the Public Start Port field.

Protocol

The protocol to be used with the forwarded port:

TCP—Only those unsolicited data requests using TCP are forwarded

UDP—Only those unsolicited data requests using UDP are forwarded

TCP & UDP—Unsolicited data requests using either TCP or

UDP are forwarded

Host IP

IP address of the computer (or device) you want to forward data to.

Private Start Port

Port on the destination computer used as the port for single port forwarding rules, or as the start port for a port forwarding range.

Port Forwarding Example

The following example shows you how to configure a port forward rule for a range of 6 ports on an Ethernet-connected device:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Security > Port Forwarding, and enable Port

Forwarding.

2.

Click “Add More” to display a rule line.

3.

Enter 8080 for the Public Start Port.

4.

Enter 8085 for the Public End Port.

5.

Select TCP & UDP.

6.

Enter 192.168.13.30 as the Host IP.

7.

Enter 80 as the Private Start Port.

136 4114514

Security Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 7-4: ACEmanager: Port Forwarding example

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Reboot.

You do not need to reboot immediately, if you have additional changes to make, but port forwarding does not take effect until the device is rebooted.

An unsolicited TCP and UDP data request coming in to the AirLink device on port

8080 is forwarded to the LAN connected device, 192.168.13.30, at port 80. In addition, an unsolicited data request coming in from the Internet on port 8081,

8082, 8083, 8084, and 8085 is forwarded to ports 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 respectively.

DMZ

The DMZ is used to direct unsolicited inbound traffic to a specific LAN connected host, such as a computer running a web server or other internal application. The

DMZ with public mode is particularly useful for certain services like VPN,

NetMeeting, and streaming video that may not work well with a NAT router.

Options for DMZ are Automatic, Manual, and Disable.

Automatic uses the first connected host. If more than one host is available

(multiple Ethernet on a switch connected to the device and/or Ethernet with

USBnet) and you want to specify the host to use as the DMZ, select Manual and enter the IP address of the desired host.

Note: DMZ requires Private Mode.

137

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

DMZ Enabled

DMZ IP

DMZ IP in use

Figure 7-5: ACEmanager: Security > Port Forwarding

Description

The AirLink device allows a single client to connect to the Internet through a demilitarized zone (DMZ). Options are Automatic (default), Manual, and Disable.

Automatic—enables the first connected host or the Public Mode interface as the DMZ

Manual—inserts a specific IP address in the DMZ IP field

Disable—no connected host receives unsolicited traffic from the cellular network or

Internet

Note: You can use a host connected to either Ethernet port on a Dual Ethernet X-Card as the host for Auto or Manual DMZ.

This field only appears if Manual is selected for the DMZ Enabled field; this field does not display if the DMZ is disabled. This is the IP address of the private mode host that should be used as the DMZ.

IP address of the host to which inbound unsolicited packets are sent

When the device passes the Network IP to the configured public host, the DMZ IP in Use displays the public IP.

Example of configuring the DMZ on an Ethernet connected device:

1.

Enter 192.168.13.100 for the DMZ IP.

2.

Select Ethernet as the Default Interface.

An unsolicited data request coming in to the AirLink device on any port is forwarded to the LAN connected device, 192.168.13.100, at the same port.

Note: The DMZ settings are independent of the number of Port Forward entries and can be used with port forwarding to pass anything not forwarded to specific ports.

138 4114514

Security Configuration

Port Filtering—Inbound

Port Filtering

Inbound restricts unsolicited access to the AirLink device and all

LAN-connected devices.

You can enable Port Filtering to either block or allow ports specified. When enabled, all ports not matching the rule are allowed or blocked depending on the mode.

You can configure Port Filtering either on individual ports or for a range of ports.

Click Add More for each port filtering rule you want to add.

Note: Inbound restrictions do not apply to responses to outbound data requests. To restrict outbound access, you need to set the applicable outbound filter.

Figure 7-6: ACEmanager: Security > Port Filtering - Inbound

Field Description

Inbound Port Filtering

Mode

Options are:

Not Used (default)

Blocked Ports—ports though which traffic is blocked. Listed below.

Allowed Ports—ports through which traffic is allowed. Listed below.

Filtered Ports

Start Port

End Port

The first of a range or a single port on the public network (cellular network accessible).

The end of the range on the public network (cellular network accessible).

Warning:

Selecting Allowed Ports will *block* all ports not allowed, and will *prevent remote access* if the management ports are not allowed. To allow remote management, the allowed ports list should include 8088, 17339, 17336, and ACEmanager port 9191 (or the port you selected for ACEmanager).

Rev 1 Oct.13

139

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Port Filtering — Outbound

Port Filtering

Outbound restricts LAN access to the external network, i.e., the

Internet.

Port Filtering can be enabled to block ports specified or allow ports specified.

When enabled, all ports not matching the rule will be allowed or blocked depending on the mode.

Port Filtering can be configured on individual ports or for a range of ports. Click

Add More for each port filtering rule you want to add.

Note: Outbound restrictions do not apply to responses to inbound data requests. To restrict inbound access, you need to set the applicable inbound filter.

Figure 7-7: ACEmanager: Security > Port Filtering - Outbound

Field

Outbound Port

Filtering Mode

Start Port

End Port

Description

Allowed and blocked ports through which traffic is either allowed or blocked (respectively) are listed.

Default: Not Used

Note: Outbound IP filter supports up to 9 ports.

The first of a range or a single port on the LAN

The end of the range on the LAN

Trusted IPs—Inbound (Friends)

Trusted IPs

Inbound restricts unsolicited access to the AirLink device and all

LAN connected devices.

Tip:

Trusted IPs-Inbound was called Friends List in legacy AirLink products.

140 4114514

Security Configuration

When enabled, only packets with source IP addresses matching those in the list or range of trusted hosts will have unrestricted access to the AirLink device and/or

LAN connected devices.

Note: Inbound restrictions do not apply to responses to outbound data requests. To restrict outbound access, you need to set the applicable outbound filter.

Figure 7-8: ACEmanager: Security > Trusted IPs > Inbound (Friends)

Field

Inbound Trusted IP

(Friend’s List) Mode

Non-Friends Port

Forwarding

Trusted IP

Range Start

Range End

Description

Disables or Enables port forwarding rules. Options are Disable (default) or Enable.

Non-Friends port forwarding is like an allow rule for any of the forwarded ports. If it is enabled, the port forwarding rules apply to all incoming packets. If it is disabled, only

Friends List IPs get through. Options are Disable (default) or Enable.

Each entry can be configured to allow a single IP address, for example 64.100.100.2, or the

IP addresses from a complete subnet, such as 64.100.10.255 allowing all IP addresses from 64.100.10.0 to 64.100.10.255.

Specify the IP address range that is allowed access, for example 64.100.10.2 to start and

64.100.10.15 to end would allow 64.100.10.5 but would not allow 64.100.10.16.

Rev 1 Oct.13

141

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Trusted IPs—Outbound

Trusted IPs

Outbound restricts LAN access to the external network (Internet).

When enabled, only packets with the destination IP addresses matching those in the list of trusted hosts will be routed from the LAN to the external location.

Note: Outbound restrictions do not apply to responses to inbound data requests. To restrict inbound access, you need to set the applicable inbound filter.

Figure 7-9: ACEmanager: Security > Trusted IPs - Outbound

Field

Outbound Firewall

Mode

Outbound Trusted IP

List

Description

Disables or Enables port forwarding rules. Options are Disable (default) or Enable.

Each entry can be configured to allow a single IP address (e.g., 64.100.100.2) or the IP addresses from a complete subnet (e.g., 64.100.10.255) allowing all IP addresses from

64.100.10.0 to 64.100.10.255.

MAC Filtering

MAC filtering restricts LAN connection access. You can create a list of up to 20 devices that are allowed a connection based on their MAC address. When MAC filtering is enabled, devices not on the allowed list are explicitly blocked. Hosts directly connected to the device but not in the Allowed list may show an active physical connection, but are blocked from sending traffic of any kind to the device or any other host connected to the device.

142 4114514

Security Configuration

Figure 7-10: ACEmanager: Security > MAC Filtering

Field

MAC Filtering

Description

Enable or disable (default) MAC Filtering

MAC Address allowed

List

Allows devices with the MAC Addresses listed to connect to the host and transfer data. Add

MAC addresses by clicking on the Add More button. When adding MAC addresses, use a colon between the digit groups, for example 01:23:45:67:89:ab.

Note: After adding all the desired MAC addresses, reboot the device. The MAC Address allowed list takes effect after the device is rebooted.

MAC Address

This is the MAC Address of the interface adapter on a computer or other device.

Tip:

You can use the Status > LAN/WiFi page to obtain the MAC addresses of DHCP connected hosts.

Packet Inspection

The Packet Inspection group supports two modes of security—Normal (default) and High Security. A Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) firewall is a firewall that tracks the states of network connections and makes decisions on packet forwarding based on the states defined in the accept or reject policy rules.

Use of an SPI firewall allows for additional device security by implementing default packet state filtering policies.

Such a firewall typically passes all outgoing packets through, but only allows incoming packets if they are part of an “Established” connection, ensuring security. Stateful firewalls are able to track the state of flows in connectionless protocols (UDP) and connection oriented protocols (TCP).

Rev 1 Oct.13

143

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 7-11: ACEmanager: Security > Packet Inspection

Field

Packet Inspection

Level

Description

Enable or disable MAC Filtering

Default: Normal

144 4114514

8: Services Configuration

The Services tab sections allow the configuration of external services that extend the functionality of the AirLink Device.

AVMS (AirVantage Management

Service)

8

Figure 8-1: ACEmanager: Services > AVMS

Field

AirVantage

Management

Service

Auto

Synchronize

Configuration

Server URL

Description

Disables or enables AVMS management by disabling or enabling periodic deviceinitiated communication with the AVMS server.

This field allows you to choose when changes to the configuration are propagated to

AVMS.

Enable—Changes to the configuration are propagated as soon as possible and do not wait for the next communication period (as configured in the Device

Initiated Interval field). This may result in more frequent communication with

AVMS. (default)

Disable—Changes to the configuration are propagated to AVMS at the device initiated interval rate.

The AVMS server URL address. By default, this is http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci/ com

Note: The previously-used URL, http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci is still valid. If your AirLink devices are using that URL, there is not need to update it.

Rev 1 Oct.13

145

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Device Initiated

Interval (mins)

This field determines how often the AirLink device checks for software updates and settings changes from AVMS. AVMS can also query the AirLink device at a regular interval if settings allow. Refer to AirVantage Management Service documentation for more information. Default: 15 minutes.

AVMS name

Use this field to assign a name of your choice to the AirLink device, or you can use the default name provided.

You can also use an AT command to assign or query the name. See

*AVMS_NAME on page 345.

The default name is based on the last three digits of the device’s MAC address, preceded by “ID-”. For example, if the MAC address is 00:11:1a:10:6a:55, the name would be ID-106a55. (To view the entire MAC address, go to Status > About.)

Status

Description

Displays the status of the AVMS connection:

Success— Device successfully contacted AVMS during its latest communication.

Disable— AVMS communications are disabled. (Appears when the AirVantage

Management Service drop-down menu is set to Disable.)

For a list of error messages, see

page 395 .

ACEmanager

Figure 8-2: ACEmanager: Services > ACEmanager

146

Field

OTA

ACEmanager

Access

Tethered Host

ACEmanager

Access

Description

Configures over-the-air ACEmanager access. Options are:

OFF

SSL Only

Both HTTP and SSL (default)

Configures ACEmanager access if tethered (physically connected) to Ethernet,

USB, or RS232. Options are: SSL Only and Both HTTP and SSL. (default)

4114514

Services Configuration

Field

ACEmanager

Port

ACEmanager

SSL Port

Description

Identifies the port set for ACEmanager. Reboot the device after applying the port change.

Identifies the SSL port set for ACEmanager access. Reboot the device after applying the port change. Eight port Options are:

9443 through 9449 and 443. Default: 9443

Low Power

The AirLink device switches into Low Power Mode when the ACEmanagerconfigured event occurs.

Low Power Mode is a standby mode whereby the AirLink processor and radio are off and a low power timer and detection circuit are operational. When

ACEmanager-configured events are detected, the AirLink device powers up and automatically connects to the Mobile Network Operator's network.

Field

Low Power

Low Power Mode

Figure 8-3: ACEmanager: Services > Low Power

Description

Allows you to set one of the following low power mode parameters:

None (default)

Time Delay

Low Voltage

Time Delay + Low voltage

Periodic Timer

Periodic Timer Daily Mode

Rev 1 Oct.13

147

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Low Power Mode

(continued)

Description

Time Delay

If you select Time Delay, the AirLink device monitors the ignition sense on the power connector and enters the low power consumption stand-by mode when the ignition is turned-off.

Low Power Mode

(continued)

Low Power Mode Delay (mins): The number of minutes after one of the Low Power events happens until the AirLink device enters the low power mode. (max 255)

Low Voltage

If you select Low Voltage, you need to set the Low Voltage Threshold.

Low Voltage Threshold: Set the voltage level at which the device goes into low power mode (threshold in tenths of volts), e.g. VLTG=130 would place the device in a low power standby state if the voltage goes below 13.0V.

Accepted values are 80–360.

Low Voltage Wakeup Delta (.1 volt): Sets the change in voltage used to wake up the device from low power mode, e.g. set to 25 to wake up from low power mode when the input voltage exceeds the low voltage threshold by 2.5 volts.

148 4114514

Services Configuration

Field

Low Power Mode

(continued)

Description

Time Delay + Low Voltage

If you select this option, the device delays going into Low Power mode caused by a low voltage drop (below threshold) or ignition off.

Low Power Mode

(continued)

Note: There is always a minimum of 1 minute between the power down event and actual shutdown (to give the AirLink device time to prepare); entering zero, for Low Power Mode

Delay, will not power down the device immediately.

Periodic Timer

If you select the Periodic Timer, two additional fields appear:

Periodic Timer Active Duration — Enter the time for how long the device needs to be in Active mode

Period Timer Inactive Duration — Enter the time for how long the device should be inactive after the Active mode expires.

The Low Power mode process will repeat in a cyclical way (active and inactive).

Rev 1 Oct.13

149

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Low Power Mode

(continued)

Description

Periodic Timer Daily Mode

This mode allows you to specify when the device should be active and when it should be in

Low Power mode on a daily basis. If you select the Periodic Timer Daily Mode, two additional fields display:

Periodic Timer Start Time (00:00–23:59 UTC) — Enter the time to start the AirLink device in the Active mode.

Period Timer Active Duration (00:00–23:59 UTC) — Enter the time for how long the device should be active.

The device will become active at the start time (UTC) and stay active for the active duration.

Engine Hours — ALEOS can start and stop counting engine hours based on:

Voltage on the Power Pin from the vehicle battery (Engine Hours On Voltage Level)

Voltage on the ignition Sense Pin (Engine Hours Ignition Enable)

If you configure both fields, both conditions must be met before the device begins counting engine hours.

Engine Hours On

Voltage Level (.1 Volt)

If you want to use this field to trigger counting engine hours, the AirLink device must be using the vehicle battery as a power source (i.e. Pin 1 [VCC] and Pin 2 [ground] on the

AirLink device’s power connector are connected to the vehicle battery).

a

Enter the voltage level above which the AirLink device starts counting engine hours. When the voltage from the vehicle battery falls below that value, the device stops counting engine hours. Enter the desired value in .1 volt units. For example, to set the voltage level at 13.0 volts, enter 130.

The default value is 0, which means the feature is disabled. Engine hours are not incremented based on the power pin voltage level.

150 4114514

Services Configuration

Field Description

Engine Hours Ignition

Enable

If Pin 3 (the ignition sense pin) on the AirLink device’s power connector is wired to the vehicle’s ignition switch a

, oil pressure switch, or some other digital input, you can use this field to trigger counting engine hours. The device starts counting engine hours when the voltage on Pin 3 is high and stops counting when the voltage is low (Ground or 0 volts).

Options are:

Disable (default) Engine hours are not incremented based on changes to Pin 3.

Enable

Engine Hours Value

(hours)

Displays an estimate of the number of hours the engine has been running, based on either the input voltage from the vehicle battery or the voltage on the ignition sense pin, depending on which of the two previous fields you configured.

You can also set the engine hours value to an initial value. The initial default value is 0. The maximum allowed value is 65535.

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*ENGHRS on page 345.

Note: You can configure Events Reporting to send reports based on this value. For more information, see

Events Reporting Configuration on page 207.

a.

For more information, refer to the AirLink GX Series or LS300 User Guide (Power Connector Description in

Chapter 2: Installation and Setup).

Dynamic DNS

Dynamic DNS allows an AirLink device WAN IP address to be published either to a proprietary Sierra Wireless dynamic DNS service called IP Manager, or to an alternate third party Mobile Network Operator.

Whether you have one Sierra Wireless AirLink device or multiple devices, it can be difficult to keep track of the current IP addresses especially if the addresses are not static but change every time the devices connect to the cellular network. If you need to connect to a specific gateway, or the device behind it, it is much easier when you have a domain name (car54.mydomain.com, where are you?).

Reasons to Contact or Connect to a Device:

Requesting a location update from a delivery truck

Contacting a surveillance camera to download logs or survey a specific area

Triggering an oil derrick to begin pumping

Sending text to be displayed by a road sign

Updating the songs to be played on a juke box

Updating advertisements to be displayed in a cab

Remote accessing a computer, a PLC, an RTU, or other system

Monitoring and troubleshooting the status of the device itself without needing to bring it in or go out to it.

A dynamic IP address is suitable for many Internet activities such as web browsing, looking up data on another computer system, for data only being sent out, or for data only being received after an initial request (also called Mobile

Rev 1 Oct.13

151

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Originated). However, if you need to contact the AirLink device directly, a device connected to the AirLink device, or a host system using your AirLink device (also called Mobile Terminated), a dynamic IP will not give you a reliable address to contact (since it may have changed since the last time it was assigned).

Domain names are often only connected to static IP addresses because of the way most domain name (DNS) servers are set-up. Dynamic DNS servers require notification of IP Address changes so they can update their DNS records and link a dynamic IP address to the correct name.

Dynamic IP addresses are granted only when your AirLink device is connected and can change each time the gateway reconnects to the network.

Static IP addresses are granted the same address every time your AirLink device is connected and are not in use when your gateway is not connected.

Since many cellular providers, like wire-based ISPs, do not offer static IP addresses or static address accounts (which can cost a premium as opposed to. dynamic accounts), Sierra Wireless AirLink Solutions developed IP Manager. IP

Manager works with a Dynamic DNS server to receive notification from Sierra

Wireless AirLink devices to translate the dynamic IP address to a fully qualified domain name. Thus, you can contact your AirLink device directly from the Internet using a domain name.

152

Figure 8-4: ACEmanager: Services > Dynamic DNS Service (partial screen

)

Field

Service

Description

Allows you to select a Dynamic DNS Mobile Network Operator.

Options are:

Disable (default)

dyndns.org

noip.org

ods.org

regfish.com

tzo.com

IP Manager

4114514

Third Party Services

Services Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 8-5: ACEmanager: Services > Dynamic DNS 3rd Party Services (partial screen)

Figure 8-5

is a sample third party service information screen. The third party service selected from the Service drop down menu in this example is

“dyndns.org.” These same fields will be displayed for all Service selections other than IP Manager and Disable.

Field Description

Service

Allows you to select a Dynamic DNS Mobile Network Operator.

Options are:

Disable (default)

dyndns.org

noip.org

ods.org

regfish.com

tzo.com

IP Manager

Dynamic DNS Update

Options are:

Only on Change

Periodically Update (Not Recommended)

Full Domain Name

Login

The name of a specific AirLink gateway or device

Shows the login name

Password

Update Interval

(hours)

Shows the password in encrypted format

Indicates the time (in hours) between checks for service updates from the selected third party service when periodic is selected.

153

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

IP Manager

154

Domain

Figure 8-6: ACEmanager: Services > Dynamic DNS IP Manager

Figure 8-5

shows the Dynamic IP fields that appear after selecting IP Manager as your Dynamic DNS Service.

Field

Device Name

Description

The name you want for the device. There are some restrictions listed below for the device name.

The domain name to be used by the device. This is the domain name of the server configured for *IPMANAGER1.

Note: As a service, Sierra Wireless maintains IP Manager servers that can be used with any AirLink device. To use one of the free IP

Manager servers, enter eairlink.com in this field.

IP Manager Server 1

(IP Address) /

IP Manager Server 2

(IP Address)

The IP address or domain name of the dynamic DNS server which is running IP Manager.

Note: To use the Sierra Wireless IP Manager server, enter: edns1.earlink.com (IP Manager Server 1) edns2.eairlink.com (IP Manager Server 2)

IP Manager Server 1

Update /

IP Manager Server 2

Update

Options are:

Only on Change

Periodic

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

Field

IP Manager Server1

Update (mins) /

IP Manager Server2

Update (mins)

IP Manager Server 1

Key /

IP Manager Server 2

Key

Description

How often, in minutes, you want the address sent to the IP Manager

User-defined password key used instead of the AirLink secret key when using an IP Manager server other than the one provided by

Sierra Wireless.

Tip:

Some PPPoE connections can use a Service Name to differentiate PPPoE devices.

Use the device name to set a Station Name for the PPPoE connection.

Understanding Domain Names

A domain name is a name of a server or device on the Internet associated with an

IP address. Similar to how the street address of your house or your phone number are ways to contact you, both the IP address and the domain name can be used to contact a server or device on the Internet. While contacting you at your house address or with your phone number employ different methods, using a domain name instead of the IP address uses the same method, just as a word based name is easier for most people to remember than a string of numbers.

Understanding the parts of a domain name can help to understand how IP

Manager works and what you need to be able to configure the device. A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) generally has several parts.

• Top Level Domain

(TLD): The TLD is the ending suffix for a domain name

(.com, .net, .org, etc.)

• Country Code Top Level Domain

(ccTLD): This suffix is often used after the

TLD for most countries except the US (.ca, .uk, .au, etc.)

• Domain name

: This is the name registered with ICANN (Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers) or the registry for a the country of the ccTLD (i.e., if a domain is part of the .ca TLD, it would be registered with the

Canadian domain registry). A name must be registered before it can be used.

• Sub-domain or server name

: A domain name can have many sub-domain or server names associated with it. Sub-domains need to be registered with the domain, but do not need to be registered with ICANN or any other registry. It is the responsibility of a domain to keep track of its own subs.

car54.mydomain.com

.com

is the TLD

mydomain

is the domain (usually noted as mydomain.com since the domain is specific to the TLD)

car54

is the subdomain or server name associated with the device, computer, or device registered with mydomain.com

155

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

car54.mydomain.com.ca

This would be the same as above, but with the addition of the country code. In this example, the country code (.ca) is for Canada.

Tip:

A URL (Universal Resource Locator) is different from a domain name in that it also provides information on the protocol used by a web browser to contact that address such as

http://www.sierrawireless.com

. www.sierrawireless.com is a fully qualified

domain name, but http://, the protocol identifier, is what makes the whole thing a URL.

Dynamic Names

When an IP address is not expected to change, the DNS server can indicate to all queries that the address can be cached and not looked up for a long period of time. Dynamic DNS servers, conversely, have a short caching period for the domain information to prevent other Internet sites or queries from using the old information. Since the IP address of a device with a dynamic account can change frequently, if the old information was used (e.g., with a DNS server which indicates the address can be cached for a long period of time) when the IP address changed, the domain would no longer point to the new and correct IP address of the device.

If your AirLink device is configured for Dynamic IP when it first connects to the

Internet, it sends an IP change notification to the IP Manager. The IP Manager acknowledges the change and updates the Dynamic DNS server. The new IP address will then be the address for your device’s configured name.

When your device IP address has been updated in IP Manager, it can be contacted by name. If the IP address is needed, use the domain name to determine the IP address.

Note: The fully qualified domain name of your AirLink device will be a subdomain of the domain used by the IP Manager server.

156 4114514

Services Configuration

WiFi Landing Page

The WiFi Landing Page allows you to enable or disable the Landing Page identified by a Landing Page URL address.

This page only appears if a Wi-Fi X-Card is installed in the AirLink device.

Figure 8-7: ACEmanager: Services > WiFi Landing Page

Rev 1 Oct.13

Field Description

Enable Landing Page

Allows you to enable or disable (Default) the WiFi landing page.

Landing Page URL

A valid URL address is required to enable Internet service. This URL can include folders or subdomains (e.g., www.sierrawireless.com/airlink)

SMS

ALEOS has the ability to:

Receive commands via SMS message and send responses

Act as an SMS gateway for a host connected to a local interface

Note: To use SMS with your AirLink device, you must have an account with SMS enabled, and your cellular carrier cannot block SMS for data accounts.

You can choose from four SMS message modes:

Password Only

Control Only

Gateway Only

Control and Gateway

The following sections provide more information, instructions for configuring each of these modes, and sending SMS messages. For more information and a list of available commands, see page

377 .

157

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Password Only

In Password Only mode, you can send SMS commands to a device, provided you use the password.

Note: In Password Only mode, you can only send SMS commands. Non-command

(gateway) SMS messaging is not supported.

Note: In Password Only mode, the password is always required. The trusted list is not used, so even if you are sending the command from a trusted number, you must include the password.

To configure Password Only mode:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > SMS.

158

Figure 8-8: ACEmanager: Services > SMS (Password Only)

2.

In the SMS Mode field, select Password Only.

3.

Enter the desired password in the ALEOS Command Password field or leave the field blank to use the default password.

The password you enter can be any alphanumeric string between 1 and 255 characters long.

For more information see SMS Password Security on page 171.

4.

Click Apply.

Sending an SMS Command

The format for sending an SMS command in Password Only mode is:

[PW] [Prefix][Command]

Example:

“PW 1234 &&&reset”, where:

1234 is the password (required)

If you did not create a password when you configured SMS, use the default

4114514

Services Configuration password—the last 4 digits of the SIM ID number (for SIM-based devices) and the last 4 digits of the ESN (for non-SIM devices). If you do not know the

SIM ID or ESN number, you can find it in ACEmanager in Status > WAN/

Cellular.

&&& is the prefix (required)

reset is the command

For more information on sending SMS commands and a list of available

commands, see page 377

.

Control Only

In Control Only mode, you can send SMS commands to a device, but you cannot send non-command (gateway) SMS messages.

If the Trusted List is enabled (see Trusted Phone Number on page 171), and your

phone number is on the trusted list, you can send an SMS command without a password. If your number is not on the trusted list, you can still send an SMS command if you use the password.

Rev 1 Oct.13

159

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Configure ALEOS for Control Only mode

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > SMS.

160

Figure 8-9: ACEmanager: Services > SMS (Control only)

2.

In the SMS Mode field, select Control Only.

3.

Enter the desired password in the ALEOS Command Password field or leave the field blank to use the default password.

The password you configure can be any alphanumeric string between 1 and

255 characters long.

For more information see SMS Password Security on page 171.

Note: If all the SMS commands you send in Control Only mode are from a trusted number, you do not need to include a password when you send the command.

4.

If desired, enter the ALEOS Command Prefix or use the default prefix, &&&.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

Note: If you leave the ALEOS Command Prefix field blank, no prefix is required when you send the SMS command. The option to omit the prefix is only available in Control Only mode.

5.

You may also want to configure SMS Security options (see

SMS Security on

page 169) and Advanced options (see SMS > Advanced on page 173).

6.

Click Apply.

Sending an SMS Command

The format for sending an SMS command in Control Only mode is:

[PW] [Prefix][Command]

Example:

“PW 1234 &&&reset”, where:

1234 is the password

·

If you are sending the SMS command from a trusted number, the password is not required. (See

Trusted Phone Number on page 171.)

·

If you are sending the SMS command from a non-trusted number, the password is required.

If you did not create a password when you configured SMS, use the default password—the last 4 digits of the SIM number (for SIM-based devices) and the last 4 digits of the ESN (for non-SIM devices). If you do not know the

SIM ID or ESN number, you can find it in ACEmanager in Status > WAN/

Cellular.

&&& is the prefix

If the ALEOS Command Prefix field in ACEmanager (Services > SMS) is blank, the prefix is not required.

reset is the command

For information on sending SMS commands and a list of available commands, see page

377 .

Gateway Only

In Gateway Only mode you can send an SMS non-command (gateway) message to a device, provided you are sending the message from a trusted number. (See

Trusted Phone Number on page 171.)

SMS messages received by the device (inbound) are sent on to the configured host. Messages sent by the host to a configured port on the device are sent out as an SMS by the device (outbound). Essentially, the device forwards SMS messages between the cellular radio and the connected host.

You can also send SMS commands in Gateway Only mode, provided you use the password.

161

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Configure ALEOS for Gateway Only mode

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > SMS.

162

Figure 8-10: ACEmanager: Services > SMS (Gateway Only)

SMS Mode

1.

In the SMS Mode field, select Gateway Only.

2.

Enter the desired password in the ALEOS Command Password field or leave the field blank to use the default password.

The password you configure can be any alphanumeric string between 1 and

255 characters long.

For more information see SMS Password Security on page 171.

3.

In the SMS destination field, select from the following options:

·

Serial—Messages are sent to the Serial port on the destination host.

If you want to include the phone number as part of the information sent to the serial port, select Yes in the Include Phone Number on Serial field.

Proceed to step 11.

·

IP—Messages are sent using IP. Proceed to step 4.

Local Host Interface Configuration (Only applies if you selected Ethernet in the SMS destination field)

4.

Enter the Local Host IP address.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

This is the IP address of the attached local host that is used as the destination for all incoming Gateway messages.

5.

Enter the Local Host Port.

This is the UDP port the destination host listens to for incoming messages.

6.

Enter the ALEOS port.

This is the UDP port on which the AirLink device listens for outbound Gateway messages sent from any local host.

Message Format Configuration (Only applies if you selected Ethernet in the

SMS destination field)

7.

In the Start field, enter the start of message delimiter, or use the default

(<<<).

8.

In the Field Delimiter field, enter the delimiter to be used between fields in the

SMS message, or use the default (,).

9.

In the End field, enter the end of message delimiter, or use the default (>>>).

10.

In the ACK field, enter the desired acknowledgment message, or use the default (ACK).

ALEOS provides a message acknowledgment on every SMS message when it is passed to the radio. If ALEOS does not send an ACK, wait for 30 seconds, and then retry.

11.

Click Apply.

Sending an SMS Command

The format for sending an SMS command in Gateway Only mode is:

[PW] [Prefix][Command]

Example:

“PW 1234 &&&reset”, where:

1234 is the password (required)

If you did not create a password when you configured SMS, use the default password—the last 4 digits of the SIM number (for SIM-based devices) and the last 4 digits of the ESN (for non-SIM devices). If you do not know the SIM

ID or ESN number, you can find it in ACEmanager in Status > WAN/Cellular.

&&& is the prefix (required)

Use the default prefix (&&&). The prefix is not configurable in Gateway Only mode.

reset is the command

For information on sending SMS commands and a list of available commands, see page

377 .

Sending a gateway message

The AirLink device acts as an IP gateway to send non-command SMS messages

(gateway messages) as UDP packets from a locally-connected host to a configured ALEOS port. The UDP packet must contain the SMS protocolformatted message.

163

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

164

Note: Do not use the password with gateway messages. The password is only for use with

SMS commands.

To create an gateway message:

1.

Begin with the start field.

2.

Follow with the destination phone number. This number must be in the same format as the phone numbers in the Trusted Phone Number List.

3.

Add the field delimiter.

4.

Add the data type for the message (ASCII, 8-bit, or Unicode).

5.

Add another field delimiter.

6.

Add the number of ASCII characters in your message.

7.

Add another field delimiter.

8.

Add the message to be sent in ASCII hex format. ASCII is case sensitive.

9.

Finish with the end field.

Example: You want to send the following message: “Test message” to phone number (510) 624-4200. To use this feature, convert the message to hex:54657374206d657373616765. Then format the message as follows:

<<<15106244200,ASCII,12,54657374206d657373616765>>> where:

·

“<<<” is the start delimiter

·

“15106244200” is the phone number

·

“,” is the delimiter between fields

·

“ASCII” is the message type

·

“12” is the number of characters in the message

·

“54657374206d657373616765” is the message itself

·

“>>>” is the end delimiter

10.

Send the message.

After your message is sent, you receive an ACK message in the format ACK

Field acknowledgment Code ACK Field. For example, if your message was successfully queued to be sent, you receive the message: ACK0ACK.

If you receive an error message, see

SMS on page 383 for details.

Control and Gateway

In Control and Gateway mode you can send an SMS non-command (gateway) message to a device, provided you are sending the message from a trusted

number. (See Trusted Phone Number on page 171.)

SMS messages received by the device (inbound) are sent on to the configured host. Messages sent by the host to a configured port on the device are sent out as an SMS by the device (outbound). Essentially, the device forwards SMS messages between the cellular radio and the connected host.

You can also send SMS commands in Control and Gateway mode. If you are sending the SMS message from a trusted number, the password is not required.

If you are sending it from a non-trusted number, you must use the password.

4114514

Services Configuration

Configure ALEOS for Control and Gateway mode

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > SMS.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 8-11: ACEmanager: Services > SMS (Control and Gateway)

SMS Mode

2.

In the SMS Mode field, select Control and Gateway.

3.

Enter the desired password in the ALEOS Command Password field or leave the field blank to use the default password.

The password you configure can be any alphanumeric string between 1 and

255 characters long.

For more information see SMS Password Security on page 171.

4.

If desired, enter the ALEOS Command Prefix or use the default prefix, &&&.

Note: The ALEOS Command Prefix field in Control and Gateway mode cannot be blank.

You must either enter a prefix or use the default. When sending SMS commands in this mode, the prefix must be included.

5.

In the SMS destination field, select from the following options:

·

Serial—Messages are sent to the Serial port on the destination host.

Proceed to step 14.

165

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

166

·

Ethernet—Messages are sent using IP. Proceed to step 5.

Local Host Interface Configuration (Only applies if you selected Ethernet in the SMS destination field)

6.

Enter the Local Host IP address.

This is the IP address of the attached local host that is used as the destination for all incoming Gateway messages.

7.

Enter the Local Host Port.

This is the UDP port the destination host listens to for incoming messages.

8.

Enter the ALEOS port.

This is the UDP port on which the AirLink device listens for outbound Gateway messages sent from any local host.

Message Format Configuration (Only applies if you selected Ethernet in the

SMS destination field)

9.

In the Start field, enter the start of message delimiter, or use the default

(<<<).

10.

In the Field Delimiter field, enter the delimiter to be used between fields in the

SMS message, or use the default (,).

11.

In the End field, enter the end of message delimiter, or use the default (>>>).

12.

In the ACK field, enter the desired acknowledgment message, or use the default (ACK).

ALEOS provides a message acknowledgment on every SMS message when it is passed to the radio. If ALEOS does not send an ACK, wait for 30 seconds, and then retry.

13.

Leave the Message Body Format field as ASCII Hex.

14.

Click Apply.

Sending an SMS Command

The format for sending an SMS command in Gateway Only mode is:

[PW] [Prefix][Command]

Example:

“PW 1234 &&&reset”, where:

1234 is the password

·

If you are sending the SMS command from a trusted number, the password is not required. (See

Trusted Phone Number on page 171.)

·

If you are sending the SMS command from a non-trusted number, the password is required.

If you did not create a password when you configured SMS, use the default password—the last 4 digits of the SIM number (for SIM-based devices) and the last 4 digits of the ESN (for non-SIM devices). If you do not know the

SIM ID or ESN number, you can find it in ACEmanager in Status > WAN/

Cellular.

&&& is the prefix (required)

This is configurable in Control and Gateway mode.

reset is the command

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

For information on sending SMS commands and a list of available commands, see page

377 .

Sending a gateway message

The AirLink device acts as an IP gateway to send non-command SMS messages

(gateway messages) as UDP packets from a locally-connected host to a configured ALEOS port. The UDP packet must contain the SMS protocolformatted message.

Note: Do not use the password with gateway messages. The password is only for use with

SMS commands.

To create an gateway message:

1.

Begin with the start field.

2.

Follow with the destination phone number. This number must be in the same format as the phone numbers in the Trusted Phone Number List.

3.

Add the field delimiter.

4.

Add the message type (ASCII).

5.

Add another field delimiter.

6.

Add the number of hex characters in your message.

7.

Add another field delimiter.

8.

Finish with the end field.

Example: You want to send the following message: “Test message” to phone number (510) 624-4200. To use this feature, convert the message to hex:54657374206d657373616765. Then format the message as follows:

<<<15106244200,ASCII,12,54657374206d657373616765>>> where:

·

“<<<” is the start delimiter

·

“15106244200” is the phone number

·

“,” is the delimiter between fields

·

“ASCII” is the message type

·

“12” is the number of characters in the message

·

“54657374206d657373616765” is the message itself

·

“>>>” is the end delimiter

Note: The gateway message body MUST be in ASCII hex format. ASCII is case-sensitive.

9.

Send the message.

After your message is sent, you receive an ACK message in the format ACK

Field acknowledgment Code ACK Field. For example, if your message was successfully queued to be sent, you receive the message: ACK0ACK.

If you receive an error message, see

SMS on page 383 for details.

167

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SMS Wakeup

When the AirLink device is in Connect on traffic mode (for details, see Always on connection on page 110), you can configure the AirLink device to also initiate a

mobile network data connection on receipt of a specific type of SMS. After the connection is established, it remains active until the configured timeout expires.

The a mobile network data connection closes after the specified timeout period.

Outgoing traffic sent after the timer is set does not reset the timer.

To configure SMS Wakeup:

1.

In ACEmanager go to WAN/Cellular > Advanced and ensure that the Always on connection field is set to Disabled - Connect on traffic.

2.

Go to Services > SMS.

168

Figure 8-12: ACEmanager: Services > SMS

3.

Under SMS Wakeup, select the desired SMS Wakeup Trigger. The options are:

·

Feature Disabled

·

Any Class 0 message

·

Class 0 Wake Command

·

Any SMS message

·

Wake Command

Note: “Class 0 Wake Command” and “Wake Command” are SMS commands. They will not work if SMS mode is “Gateway only” or if the password is missing in “Password only'” mode.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

In the Connection timeout (minutes) field, enter the number of minutes the mobile network data connection remains active after SMS Wakeup Trigger is received. The default value is 2.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

You can also set the Connection timeout using an AT command. For more information, see

*SMSWUPTOUT on page 349.

6.

If you selected Class 0 Wake Command or Wake Command in step 3, you

can specify the SMS command in the Wake Command field or use the default value, WAKEUP. Sending this SMS to the device will wake it up. Example:

&&&WAKEUP.

7.

Click Apply.

SMS Security

Inbound SMS Messages

Incoming SMS messages are received as UDP packets, and forwarded to the local host IP address and port. The UDP packets are in the same format as sent messages.

When Trusted Phone Number security is enabled, incoming messages coming from the phone numbers in the Trusted Phone Number list are the only ones for which commands will be performed (relay, response etc.) or gateway messages forwarded. Incoming messages from all other phone numbers will be ignored.

Commands sent to the device with the correct password are always treated as coming from a trusted number.

All non-alphanumeric characters except a space will be replaced by a dot in

ACEmanager.

169

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 8-13: ACEmanager: Services > SMS

Field Description

SMS Security - Inbound SMS Messages

Trusted Phone

Number

Allows you to Enable or Disable a trusted phone number

Last Incoming Phone

Number

The last inbound phone number is displayed here. This will only be erased with a reset to defaults.

Last Incoming

Message

Trusted Phone

Number List

The last incoming message is the last inbound SMS from the phone number. This will only be erased with a reset to defaults.

Trusted phone numbers are listed here

170 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Services Configuration

Trusted Phone Number

Follow the instructions below to add a Trusted Phone Number on the SMS page.

1.

Send an SMS command to the device, and hit Refresh. If Trusted Phone

Number is enabled, and the phone number is not in the trusted list, no action will be performed on the message.

2.

Once you have the Last Incoming Phone Number that shows up on the SMS screen in ACEmanager, note the exact phone number displayed.

3.

Click Add More to add the Trusted Phone Number. The Last Phone Number will continue to display. Additions to the Trusted Phone Number become effective immediately; no device reboot is needed.

Note: The Trusted Phone number can be up to 15 characters long and must be comprised of numbers only.

Note: Phone Numbers (both trusted and not trusted) will be displayed in the Last Incoming

Phone Number field.

4.

Enter the Last Incoming Phone Number as the Trusted Phone Number.

5.

Click Apply.

Note: Do not enter any extra digits, and use the Last Incoming display as a guide to type the phone number. Use “1” only if it is used in the beginning of the Last Incoming Phone

Number.

With Trusted Phone Number enabled, only those SMS messages from Trusted

Phone Numbers will receive responses to commands or messages acted on as applicable.

SMS Password Security

The SMS Password feature enables you to use a password to send a command at any time to the device. Even if Trusted Phone Number is enabled, you can send an SMS command from a non-trusted number, provided you include the password.

A default SMS password is generated from the last four characters of the SIM ID

(for all SIM-based devices) or the ESN (for devices without a SIM, such those using EV-DO), or you can configure your own SMS password.

Tip:

If you do not know the SIM ID or ESN number you can find it in ACEmanager (

Status

> WAN/Cellular).

Note: The SMS password is not the same as the ALEOS password used to access

ACEmanager or Telnet/SSH.

171

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

To configure the SMS password:

1.

Go to Services > SMS > SMS Mode.

172

Figure 8-14: ACEmanager: Services > SMS >SMS Mode

2.

Enter the desired SMS password in the ALEOS Command Password field.

The password can be any alphanumeric string with a length between 1 and

255 characters.

3.

Click Apply.

Note:

The SMS password is not displayed in plain text in ACEmanager. If you want to query it, use the AT command. See

*SMS_PASSWORD on page 349.

The SMS password is not cleared by a configuration reset.

If an SMS command is sent with the wrong SMS password, the device replies with a

“Wrong Password” message, and the command is dropped.

Using the Default SMS Password

You can use the default SMS password (last 4 characters of either the SIM ID number for SIM-based devices, or the ESN for devices without a SIM) with no prior configuration.

Note: The default password:

Works with all SMS commands

Is not displayed in ACEmanager (If the ALEOS Command Password field is blank, the default password is used.)

Is overridden by a user-defined password

Changes if the SIM is changed, if no user-defined password is configured

4114514

SMS > Advanced

Services Configuration

Figure 8-15: ACEmanager: Services > SMS > Advanced

Field

SMS Address Type

SMS Address

Numbering Plan

AT+CGSMS

Description

For most networks, use the default setting (International). The address type of the phone number used to send outgoing messages and command responses. Options are:

International (default)

National

Network Specific

Subscriber

Abbreviated

For most networks, use the default setting (ISDN/Telephone). The address numbering plan of the phone number used to send outgoing messages and command responses. Options are:

Unknown

ISDN/Telephone (default)

Date Numbering

Telex

National

Private

ERMES

Allows you to choose the technology used to send SMS messages. For most networks, use the default setting (Do nothing). Options are:

Do nothing (default)

Set AT+CGSMS=0—GPRS

Set AT+CGSMS=1—Circuit switched

Set AT+CGSMS=2—GPRS Preferred (Uses circuit switched if GPRS is not available)

Set AT+CGSMS=3—Circuit Switched Preferred (Uses GPRS if circuit switched is not available)

Note: If your gateway is able to receive SMS messages, but is unable to send them, try changing this field to Set AT+CGSMS=1.

Rev 1 Oct.13

173

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Quick Test

Quick Test

Destination

Description

Allows you to send a test message to the destination entered in the Quick Test Destination field.

Enter the phone number to use for the test message. Click Apply before clicking the Quick

Test button.

This field is cleared on reboot.

Command

*SMSM2M

*SMSM2M_8

*SMSM2M_u

SMSM2M

SMS messages can be sent from the serial command interface. Enter

AT*SMSM2M=”[phone] [message]”. The phone number needs to be in the same format as numbers entered in the Trusted Phone Number List.

The message must not exceed 140 characters. To send several messages back to back, you must wait for the OK before sending the next message.

Description

*SMSM2M is the command for ASCII text.

*SMSM2M_8 is the command for 8-bit data.

*SMSM2M_u is the command for unicode.

Format:

*smsm2m=”[phone][ascii message]”

*smsm2m_8=”[phone][hex message]”

*smsm2m_u=”[phone][hex message]”

The phone number can only consist of numbers (NO spaces or other characters). The phone number should be as it appears in the Last

Incoming Phone Number field.

Example 1 (US): 14085551212 (including leading 1 and area code)

Example 2 (US): 4085551212 (ignore leading 1, include area code)

Example 3 (UK): 447786111717 (remove leading 0 and add country code)

Command Examples:

*smsm2m=”18005551212 THIS IS A TEST” sends in ASCII.

*smsm2m_8="17604053757 5448495320495320412054455354" sends the message “THIS IS A TEST” as 8-bit data.

*smsm2m_u="17604053757

000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f808182838485868788898A8b8c8d8e

8f" sends the bytes:

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f

Note: Not all cellular carriers support 8-bit or unicode SMS messages.

174 4114514

Services Configuration

Telnet/SSH

Use the Telnet or SSH protocol to connect to any AirLink device and send AT commands.

A secure mechanism to connect remote clients is a requirement for many users.

In ACEmanager, Secure Shell (SSH) is supported to ensure confidentiality of the information and make the communication less susceptible to snooping and man-in-the-middle attacks. SSH also provides for mutual authentication of the data connection.

For information on configuring an AirLink device to use SSH PAD mode, see SSH

PAD Mode on page 22.

Figure 8-16: ACEmanager: Services > Telnet/SSH

Field Description

Remote Login Server

Mode

Select either Telnet (default) or SSH mode.

If you are using this feature to load an application form the ALEOS Application Framework

(ALEOS AF), set this option to Telnet.

Remote Login Server

Telnet/SSH Port

Sets or queries the port used for the AT Telnet/SSH server.

Default: 2332

Tip:

Many networks have the ports below 1024 blocked. We recommend that you use a higher numbered port.

After configuring SSH, apply and reset your device.

Remote Login Server

Telnet/SSH Port

Timeout (mins)

Max Login Attempts

Telnet/SSH port inactivity time out.

Default: 2 (minutes)

Telnet/SSH Echo

Sets the maximum number of login attempts.

Default: 6

Enable (default) or disable the toggle AT command echo mode.

Rev 1 Oct.13

175

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Make SSH Keys

SSH Status

Description

Creates keys for SSH session applications

Provides the status of the SSH session

Note: When you are connected to SSH locally, you cannot have OTA SSH connected.

Email (SMTP)

For some functions, the device needs to be able to send email. Since it does not have an embedded email server, you need to specify the settings for a relay server for the device to use.

Note: The SMTP function will only work with a mail server that will allow relay email from the ALEOS device’s Net IP.

Figure 8-17: ACEmanager: Services > Email (SMTP) — partial screen)

Field Description

Server IP Address

Specify the IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the SMTP server to use.

d.d.d.d = IP Address

name = domain name (maximum: 40 characters)

From Email Address

Sets the email address from which the SMTP message is being sent.

email = email address (maximum: 30 characters)

User Name (optional)

Specifies the username to use when authenticating with the server

176 4114514

Services Configuration

Field

Password (optional)

Description

Sets the password to use when authenticating the email account (*SMTPFROM) with the server (*SMTPADDR).

pw = password

Note: The email server used for the relay may require a user name or password.

Message Subject

Allows configuration of the default Subject to use if one is not specified in the message by providing a “Subject: xxx” line as the initial message line.

subject = message subject

Management (SNMP)

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to allow for remote management and monitoring of a variety of devices from a central location. It is generally used to monitor conditions that may require attention.

The SNMP management system is composed of:

One or more managers (administrative computers)

SNMP-compliant devices (such as your AirLink device, a router, a UPS, a web server, a file server, or other computer equipment)

An agent (data collection software running on the SNMP-compliant devices)

A Network Management System (NMS) that monitors all the agents on a specific network.

The agent stores information about the device in a Management Information Base

(MIB). The manager can send messages to this database to configure and query the status of the device. In addition, the agent running on the device can send traps (unsolicited messages) to the manager on startup, on status change, or when an error condition occurs.

AirLink devices supports SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 and you can configure them as

SNMP agents.

Authentication ensures SNMP messages coming from the AirLink device have not been modified and the device cannot be queried by unauthorized users. SNMPv3 uses a User-Based Security Model (USM) to authenticate and, if desired or supported, message encryption. USM uses a user name and password specific to each device.

Rev 1 Oct.13

177

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SNMPv2

Figure 8-18: ACEmanager: Services> Management (SNMPv2)

Field

SNMP Configuration

Enable SNMP

Description

SNMP Version

SNMP Port

SNMP Contact

SNMP Name

SNMP Location

Read Only SNMP User

Allows you to enable/disable SNMP

Default: Disable

Allows you to select either SNMP protocol Version 2 (default) or Version 3 communications.

Controls which port the SNMP Agent listens on:

1–65535

Default is 161.

This is a personal identifier of the contact person you want to address queries to.

This is a customer defined field.

This is the name of the device you want to refer to.

This is a customer defined field.

Location of where your device is stored

Enter a meaningful description of where the AirLink device is located.

178 4114514

Services Configuration

Field Description

Community Name

The community name is a text string that acts as a password. It is used to authenticate messages that are sent between the management station and the device.

Default is public.

Read/Write SNMP User

Community Name

The community name is a text string that acts as a password. It is used to authenticate messages that are sent between the management station and the device.

Default is private.

TRAP Server User

TRAP Server IP/FQDN

Identifies the IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the trap server that the

AirLink device sends SNMP traps to

TRAP Server Port

Community Name

Identifies the specific port the trap server is on

1–65535

Default is 162.

The community name is a text string that acts as a password. It is used to authenticate messages that are sent between the management station and the device.

There is no default value.

Rev 1 Oct.13

179

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SNMPv3

Figure 8-19: ACEmanager: Services> Management (SNMPv3)

Field

SNMP Configuration

Enable SNMP

Description

SNMP Version

SNMP Port

Allows you to enable/disable SNMP

Default is Disable.

Allows you to select either SNMP protocol Version 2 (default) or Version 3 communications.

Controls which port the SNMP Agent listens on:

1 – 65535

Default is 161.

180 4114514

Services Configuration

Field

SNMP Contact

SNMP Name

SNMP Location

Read Only SNMP

User Name

Security Level

Authentication Type

Authentication Key

Privacy Type

Description

This is a personal identifier of the contact person you want to address queries to. This is a customer defined field.

This is the name of the device you want to refer to. This is a customer defined field.

Location of where your device is stored. This is a customer defined field.

Allows these SNMP users to view, but not change the network configuration

Security types available: None, Authentication Only, and Authentication and Privacy.

Authentication types available: MD5 or SHA

Note: This field is only available when you select either Authentication and Privacy, or

Authentication Only in the Security Level field.

This key authenticates SNMP requests for SNMPv3.

Minimum length: 8 ASCII characters

Maximum length: 255 ASCII characters

Example: My Key_1234

Note: This field is only available when you select either Authentication and Privacy, or

Authentication Only in the Security Level field.

Privacy types available: AES or DES

Note: This field is only available when you select Authentication and Privacy in the

Security Level field.

Privacy Key

This key ensures the confidentiality of SNMP messages via encryption

Minimum length: 8 ASCII characters

Maximum length: 255 ASCII characters

Example: My Key_56789

Note: This field is only available when you select Authentication and Privacy in the

Security Level field.

Read/Write SNMP

For a description of the Read/Write SNMP fields, see

Read Only SNMP on page 181.

TRAP Server User

TRAP Server IP/FQDN

Identifies the IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the trap server that the

AirLink device sends SNMP traps to

TRAP Server Port

Identifies the specific port the trap server is on

1 – 65535

Default is 162.

Rev 1 Oct.13

181

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Engine ID

User Name

Security Level

Authentication Type

Authentication Key

Privacy Type

Privacy Key

Description

The Engine ID is a mandatory field that uniquely identifies the SNMPv3 agent in the device to the server.

The Engine ID is 5–32 octets long (1 octet is 2 hex characters). That is:

Minimum length: 10 hex characters

Maximum length: 64 hex characters

Create the engine ID by entering hex characters only, with no leading 0x. For example,

ABCDEF1020

See User Name on page 181.

See Security Level on page 181.

See Authentication Type on page 181.

See Authentication Key on page 181.

See Privacy Type on page 181.

See Privacy Key on page 182.

Time (SNTP)

The device can be configured to synchronize its internal clock with a time server on the Internet using the Simple Network Time Protocol. Normally your device will synchronize with the cellular network or GPS.

Figure 8-20: ACEmanager: Services > Time (SNTP)

182 4114514

Services Configuration

Field Description

Enable time update

Enables daily SNTP update of the system time.

Default: Disable

SNTP Server Address

SNTP Server IP address, or fully qualified domain name, to use if *SNTP=1. If blank, time.nist.gov is used.

d.d.d.d=IP address

name=domain name

Device Status Screen

The Device Status Screen feature, when enabled, allows you to add GPS and network status parameters to the ACEmanager Login screen. Once enabled, subsequent logins to ACEmanager displays whatever status parameters have been previously checked on the Device Status Screen.

Figure 8-21: ACEmanager: Services > Device Status Screen

Field Description

Enable Device Status on Login Screen

Enables device status parameters on the login screen

Options are: Disable or Enable (default)

Status to display

Allows you to display specific GPS and network status parameters on the login screen

Rev 1 Oct.13

183

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

184 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

9: GPS Configuration

Most AirLink devices are equipped with a Global Positioning System receiver (GPS) to ascertain its position and track the movements of a vehicle or other devices which move. The AirLink device relays the information of its location as well as other data for use with tracking applications.

The AirLink ES440 does not support GPS.

GPS Overview

The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite navigation system used for determining a location and providing a highly accurate time reference.

GPS consists of a “constellation” of 32 satellites in 6 orbital planes.

Each satellite circles the Earth twice every day at an altitude of

20,278 kilometers (12,600 miles). Each satellite is equipped with an atomic clock and constantly broadcasts the time, according to its own clock, along with administrative information including the orbital elements of its motion, as determined by ground-based observatories.

A GPS receiver, such as the AirLink device, requires signals from four or more satellites and performs Time Difference of Arrival (TDoA) calculations in order to determine its own latitude, longitude, and elevation.

The GPS data can then be transmitted to a server with a tracking application to compile information about location, movement rates, and other pertinent data.

Note: Depending on the location of the satellites in relation to the device’s location and how many signals are being received, the AirLink device may encounter “GPS drift”, a phenomenon whereby a stationary device is reported as moving by the GPS system. This “drift” is within the location tolerances of the GPS system, but the device may appear to be moving, based on continuous GPS calculations.

9

Common Uses for GPS

Driver navigation—The AirLink device provides real time GPS data via the serial or Ethernet port to a local application, including applications that provide mapping and navigation support.

Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL)—The AirLink device provides real time GPS data to the server that tracks the location and other variables of the vehicle or asset.

185

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

ALEOS Supported GPS Report Protocols

Remote Access Protocol (RAP)

RAP is a proprietary binary message format developed and maintained by

Sierra Wireless and used by many 3rd party applications. Because it is designed and maintained by Sierra Wireless, RAP supports more ALEOS features than other GPS protocols. It is a low-byte-usage protocol that can be used to develop low cost AVL solutions.

The RAP messages are in hex and are referred to by their message ID.

Reports can include GPS data alone, as well as GPS data with the date and time, radio frequency data, radio status information, and I/O state changes, and power state changes. For an example, see

GPS RAP Report Sequence

Example on page 196. For more information, contact your Sierra Wireless

Sales representative for information on how to obtain a copy of the RAP Protocol Guide.

National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA

®

)

NMEA is an ASCII protocol used by many GPS tracking applications.

Trimble

®

ASCII Interface Protocol (TAIP)

TAIP is a digital communication interface based on printable ASCII characters over a serial data link. TAIP was designed specifically for vehicle tracking applications but has become common in a number of other applications, such as data terminals and portable computers, because of its ease of use.

Xora

®

Protocol specific to Xora asset management and tracking applications

Before Configuring GPS

To decide what configuration you need for your AirLink device, there are some fundamental considerations you should determine:

• Protocol—

What is the GPS protocol used by your tracking application and

what type of reports will you need? (See GPS Report Type on page 191.)

• Dynamic IP Address—

Does your device have a dynamic IP address and you need to track the specific asset? (See

Device ID in Local Reports on page 203.) You can also associate your device with a dynamic DNS configu-

ration. (See

Dynamic DNS on page 151.)

• Server locationand type of connection—

Will you be using a local server, a remote server, or both? Will you need a serial or local IP connection? (See

Figure 9-1 on page 187 for information.)

• Multiple GPS servers—

Will you need to have GPS data sent to more than one GPS server?

186 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

GPS Configuration

Server Location?

Remote

See

Servers 1 to 4 on page 187.

Serial connection

See Local/Streaming on page 198.

Figure 9-1: Server location and connection type

Local

Streaming report to local IP connection

See

Local/Streaming—LATS on page 200

or

Servers 1 to 4 on page 187.

Note: Most Global settings (described on page 204

) apply to remote and local servers. All

GPS configuration changes go into effect immediately. No reboot of the AirLink device is necessary. After you configure any settings there is a short pause in receiving GPS reports while the device is re-initialized with the new configuration.

Servers 1 to 4

You can configure up to four servers as report destinations. Each server is configured independently and can be configured to report the same or different information. This enables you to simultaneously receive GPS and other information at more than one location, either local or remote.

The configuration fields are the same for each of the four servers, except that

Server 1 has the option to configure one or two redundant servers.

187

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 9-2: ACEmanager: GPS > Server 1

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Events — Configure when the GPS reports are sent

Report Interval Time

(secs)

GPS Report Time Interval

The amount of time between GPS reports (in seconds)

Options are:

1– 65535

0 = Disables GPS reporting based on a time interval (default)

With this option disabled, you can still receive reports based on distance traveled or the vehicle being stationary for a configured time. (See

Report Interval Distance

(meters) on page 189 and Stationary Vehicle Timer (mins) on page 189.)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPTIME on page 359.

Note: Your cellular carrier may impose a minimum transmit time.

188 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Report Interval

Distance (meters)

GPS Report Distance Interval in meters

The distance (in meters) that the vehicle (or device) travels between sending GPS reports

Options are:

100– 65535

0 = Disables sending GPS reports based on a distance interval (default)

With this option disabled, you can still receive reports based on time passed or the

vehicle being stationary for a configured time. (See Report Interval Time (secs) on

page 188 and Stationary Vehicle Timer (mins) on page 189.)

You can also use the AT Command, *PPDISTM , to set this value. For more information,

see

page 355 .

Note: An an additional AT Command, *PPDIST

, allows you to configure the GPS report distance interval in 100 meter units. This option is only available through AT Commands.

For more information, see page 354

.

Stationary Vehicle

Timer (mins)

Maximum Speed

Event Report (kph)

Note: If the Report Interval Time and Report Interval Distance fields are both set, a GPS report is sent when the first of the two intervals is reached. For example, if the time interval is reached before the vehicle (or device) has travelled the specified distance, a GPS report is sent based on the time interval. Conversely, if the vehicle (or device) travels the specified distance before the time interval has passed, a GPS report is sent based on the distance interval.

You can use this field if you want to receive less frequent reports when the vehicle is stationary. A GPS report is sent every x minutes the vehicle (or device) is stationary, where x is the value configured in this field. When the vehicle is stationary, this value overrides the value configured in the Report Interval Time field.

Options are:

1–255

0 = Disables GPS reporting based on a vehicle being stationary (default)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPTSV on page 359.

A GPS report is sent if the speed (in kilometers per hour) configured in this field is exceeded, and again when the speed goes back down below the configured value.

0 = Disable (default)

1–255

Note: If you are using one of the RAP GPS report types (see

GPS Report Type on page 191) the GPS report triggered by this feature includes:

A marker to indicate that it was triggered by the configured speed being exceeded and when the speed is goes back down below the configured value.

The standard GPS information for the configured report type

For more information, refer to the RAP Protocol Guide.

If you are not using a RAP GPS report, a standard report is sent.

Rev 1 Oct.13

189

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Send Stationary

Vehicle Event in

Seconds

A GPS report is sent if the vehicle (or device) has been in one location for more than the specified time (in seconds) and again when the vehicle (or device) moves from that location. Options are:

1–255

0 = Disables sending GPS reports based on a vehicle being stationary (default)

Enable Digital Input

Event

Note: If you are using one of the RAP GPS report types (see

GPS Report Type on page 191) the GPS report triggered by this feature includes:

A marker to indicate that it was triggered by the vehicle either being stationary or starting to move again

The standard GPS information for the configured report type

For more information, refer to the RAP Protocol Guide.

If you are not using a RAP GPS report, a standard report is sent.

You can configure Stationary Vehicle Event in Seconds and Stationary Vehicle Timer together to receive a special report when the device is stationary longer than x seconds, a normal report every x minutes it is stationary (instead of the Report Interval Time) and a special report when the vehicle begins moving again.

A GPS report is sent if the configured digital input changes. For example, this could be used to trigger a report being sent when an emergency light or siren is turned on or off, or when a door is opened or closed. The GPS data in the report informs you of where the event took place.

Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

Note: If you are using one of the RAP GPS report types (see

GPS Report Type on page 191) the GPS report triggered by this feature includes:

A marker to indicate that it was triggered by a change in status of the configured digital input

The standard GPS information for the configured report type

For more information, refer to the RAP Protocol Guide.

If you are not using a RAP GPS report, a standard report is sent.

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPINPUTEVT on page 356.

190 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Report Type

GPS Report Type

Sets the type of GPS Report

Options are:

RAP

GPS Data—RAP GPS report that contains only GPS data

GPS+Date—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data with the UTC time and date

(default)

GPS+Date+RF—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data, the UTC time and date, and radio frequency information for the cellular connection

GPS+Date+RF+EIO—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data, the UTC time and date, radio frequency information for the cellular connection, and the current I/O state

NMEA

NMEA GGA+VTG—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, and speed over ground

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, speed over ground, and recommended minimum GPS data

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC+GSA+GSV—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, speed over ground, the recommended minimum GPS data, overall satellite data, and detailed satellite data

TAIP

TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains position and velocity

Compact TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains the compact position

TAIP LN report—TAIP GPS report that contains a long navigation message

TAIP TM report—TAIP GPS report that contains the time and date

XORA

XORA data—GPS report used with Xora asset tracking

Note: Only RAP GPS reports can be configured to include odometer and digital I/O information.

Note: You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPGPSR on page 356.

Rev 1 Oct.13

191

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Servers

—Configure where the reports are sent

Report Server IP

Address

IP address or FQDN (fully qualified domain name) of the server where GPS reports are sent

Example: 192.100.100.100

The IP address can be for a local host or a remote server that is accessed over-the-air or via a VPN tunnel.

If an IP with the last octet of 255 is configured (i.e. 192.168.13.255), a report would be broadcast to all IPs on that subnet. When configured to a local host subnet, any connected host would receive the report.

Note: If you want to use it as a LAN host, it must have a private IP address. If you want to use a public IP address, use LATS. (See

Local/Streaming—LATS on page 200.)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPIP on page 356.

192 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Report Server Port

Number

Destination port on the server where GPS reports are sent

The destination port can be the same for all servers or you can configure a different destination port for each server. Options are: 1–65535

Defaults:

Server 1 destination port: 22335

Server 2 destination port: 22336

Server 3 destination port: 22337

Server 4 destination port: 22338

You can also use an AT Command to set these values. For more information, see

*PPPORT on page 358.

Note: If the account is behind a firewall (for example, an account that is not Internetroutable), the report may be redirected to come from a different source port when it arrives at the server.

The source ports on the device are not configurable. The following source ports are used:

Protocol

RAP / NMEA

TAIP

XORA

1

2

3

4

3

4

Server

1

2

1

2

3

4

Port

17335

17345

17346

17347

21000

21001

21002

21003

9494

9495

9496

9497

Rev 1 Oct.13

193

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Redundant Servers — Only available for Server 1

If the redundant server is configured, anytime a report is sent to server 1, an identical report is sent to any configured redundant server(s). Transport/SNF configuration settings do not apply to redundant servers.

Commands from redundant servers are ignored. Reports originate from port 17335. The redundant servers can be a local host or a remote server that is accessed over-the-air or via a VPN tunnel.

IP address or FQDN of the first redundant server

Redundant Server 1

IP Address

Redundant Server 1

Port Number

Port number of the first redundant server

The port number can be the same as or different from that of other servers.

IP address or FQDN of the second redundant server

Redundant Server 2

IP Address

Redundant Server 2

Port Number

Port number of the second redundant server

The port number can be the same as or different from that of other servers.

Minimum Report Time

(secs)

Specifies the minimum time (in seconds) between partial reports or grouped packets being sent

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPMINTIME on page 357.

Transport / Store and Forward (SNF) — This feature is designed to accommodate periods when the AirLink device is outside the area of cellular network coverage or otherwise unable to reach the report server.

Reports are stored and then “forwarded” in a combined packet when the device is again able to contact the server.

Enable SNF for

Unreliable Mode

Store and Forward causes GPS reports to be stored if the AirLink Device goes out of network coverage. Once the device/vehicle is in coverage the stored GPS reports are sent to the server. Options are:

Disable (default)—If there is no cellular network coverage, reports are not stored.

Enable—If there is no cellular network coverage, reports are stored until the AirLink device can access the server.

Note: When you are using GPS and Wi-Fi Client mode: If the Wi-Fi client is connected, reports are sent over the Wi-Fi WAN connection rather than the cellular network. With SNF for Unreliable Mode enabled, if the Wi-Fi WAN connection is active and the cellular connection is not (i.e. out of the cellular coverage area) reports continue to be sent over

Wi-Fi. Only if both networks are down are the reports stored and forwarded later when either network is back up.

Note: You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPSNF on page 358.

194 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

SNF Reliable Mode

Store and Forward Reliability: GPS reports are retransmitted if not acknowledged by the server.

Options are:

OFF (Unreliable Mode) (default)—If this field is Off, the device does not expect acknowledgment to any GPS report sent to the server.

Reliable Mode—A sequence number (1–127) is added to each packet (window). The server acknowledges every 8th packet. If there is no ACK from the server, ALEOS pings the server and re-sends the packets when the server responds. If the server receives packets out of sequence, the server NAKs the first and last missed packets.

ALEOS retransmits the missing packets.

Simple Reliable Mode—ALEOS attempts to contact the server the configured number of times, after which it stops attempting to contact the server and discards messages that cannot be transmitted or received after the configured number of tries. When contacted, the server responds with the ASCII string UDPACK. For information on configuring the maximum number of retries see

SNF Simple Reliable Max Retries on page 195. For information on configuring the backoff time, see SNF Simple Reliable

Backoff Time (secs) on page 195.)

UDP Sequence Mode—A hex sequence number (30–7f) is prepended to the packet.

The server responds with SEQACK and the sequence number. The sequence number is not stored and is re-initialized when the AirLink device is reset or power cycled.

Unacknowledged packets are dropped after the configured number of retries.

TCP Listen Mode—This mode is the same as UDP Sequence Mode, except that the server initiates the connection using TCP. Use this mode if your server is behind a firewall. If you are using this mode, the AirLink device must have a mobile terminated/

Internet routable IP address.

TCP—When the AirLink device is out of coverage (no service, the link is down, etc.) reports are stored until the device can access the server.

Note: You can also use an AT Command to set this field. For more information, see

*PPSNFR on page 358.

SNF Simple Reliable

Max Retries

When the AirLink device is configured to use Simple Reliable Mode, use this field to set the

maximum number of retries when a report is sent and there is no response. Use the SNF

Simple Reliable Backoff Time (secs)

field to set the interval between retries.

Options are:

Disabled

1–255 retries (Default is 10.)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPMAXRETRIES on page 357.

SNF Simple Reliable

Backoff Time (secs)

When the AirLink device is configured to use Simple Reliable Mode, use this field to set the

interval for the retries. (Use the SNF Simple Reliable Max Retries

field to set the maximum number of retries.)

(Default is 10.)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPSIMPLETO on page 358.

Additional Data

When configured, these options add additional data to RAP reports (see

GPS Report Type on page 191)

sent in response to any trigger.

Rev 1 Oct.13

195

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-1: GPS: Servers 1 – 4

Field Description

Report Odometer

Enables odometer reporting. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPODOM on page 357.

Report Digital Inputs

Enables digital input reporting. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPREPORTINPUTS on page 358.

Redundant Servers

When one or two redundant servers are enabled, each time a message is sent out to the main server a second identical message is sent to the redundant server(s).

The redundant servers can be running the same or different application than the primary server. The messages to the redundant server are independent of the primary server settings or state.

You can configure one or both redundant servers. The messages are sent independently to either or both.

Note: Messages are sent whether or not the server is available and do not use any reliable mode format. Receipt of a message is not acknowledged nor is any message resent.

Messages to redundant servers are in UDP only.

196

GPS RAP Report Sequence Example

In this example:

The AirLink device is installed in a police car.

Digital input 2 is connected to the switch that controls the siren.

Digital input 3 is connected to the laptop docking station.

ACEmanager has the following configuration:

Report Interval Time: 30 seconds

Report Interval Distance: 150 meters

Stationary Vehicle Timer: 5 minutes

Send Stationary Vehicle Event in Seconds: 6 seconds

Maximum Speed Event: 100 km/h

Enable Digital Input Event: Enable

Report Type: GPS + Date (RAP GPS report type 0x12)

Low Power Mode: Low Voltage (See Services > Low Power on page Low

Power on page 147.)

4114514

GPS Configuration

Figure 9-3: GPS > Server 1—Example

The following table provides a sample scenario for this ALEOS configuration.

Event / Action

The AirLink device in the police car is connected to power for the first time.

GPS RAP report sent to the server

A 0x10 (power up) report is sent.

The police car is driving around the patrol area.

The police officer spots a speeding vehicle, switches on the siren, and pursues the vehicle.

A 0x12 (GPS + Date) report is sent every 150 meters or every 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Digital input 2 which is connected to the siren switch is triggered and a

0x27 (DIN 2 changes to 1) report is sent.

The vehicle speeds up, with the police car in pursuit.

When the police car exceeds 100 km/h, a 0x2e (maximum speed exceeded) report is sent. A 0x12 (GPS + Date) report is sent every 150 meters.

The vehicle being pursued and the police car slow down.

When the police car’s speed goes below 100 km/h, a 0x2f (return to normal speed) report is sent.

The speeding vehicle pulls over and stops at the side of the road. The police car pulls in behind it. The officer turns off the siren, leaves the engine idling, gets out of the car, and walks over to the other vehicle.

Digital input 2 which is connected to the siren switch is triggered, and a

0x26 (DIN 2 changes to 0) report is sent. Six seconds after the police car comes to a stop, a 0x2c (stationary vehicle event) report is sent. While the car remains stopped with the engine idling, a 0x12 (GPS + Date) report is sent every 5 minutes.

The officer issues a ticket, returns to the police car and drives away.

When the police car is back in motion, a 0x2d (started moving event) report is sent. A 0x12 (GPS + Date) report is sent every 150 meters or

30 seconds, whichever is less.

The police car stops in front of the police station.

The officer disconnects the laptop from the dock.

Six seconds after the car stops, a 0x2c (stationary vehicle event) report is sent.

Digital input 3 connected to the docking station is triggered. A 0x28 (DIN

3 changes to 0) report is sent.

Rev 1 Oct.13

197

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Event / Action

The officer turns off the ignition.

The officer on the next shift gets into the car and turns on the ignition.

GPS RAP report sent to the server

Before the AirLink device goes into Low Power (sleep) mode, it sends a

0x30 (entering low power mode) report.

When the AirLink device wakes up from Low Power mode, it sends a

0x31 (Wake up from Low Power mode event) report.

Local/Streaming

Some in-vehicle/navigation applications accept GPS reports via a serial connection, generally using either NMEA or TAIP. To configure serial streaming for DB-9 (RS-232) ports and/or USB Serial ports, go to GPS > Local Streaming. If you have an AirLink GX Series device with an I/O card installed, you can also use the I/O X-Card serial ports to stream GPS data.

Figure 9-4: ACEmanager: GPS > Local/Streaming

198 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-2: GPS: Local/Streaming

Field Description

Serial

GPS Reports Port

The serial port or USB serial link that reports are sent to

Options are:

NONE (default)

DB9 Serial

USB Serial

DB9 and USB

X-Card Serial

X-Card Serial and DB9

X-Card Serial and USB

X-Card Serial, DB9 and USB

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PGPS on page 353.

Note: If you want to stream GPS data to a USB port, the USB port must be configured on

the LAN > USB window to act as a serial port. See USB Device Mode on page 77.

GPS Reports Type

GPS Reports

Frequency (secs)

Note: The X-Card options are only available for a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed.

ASCII text GPS Report type to send via the serial link:

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information and vector track and speed over ground, and recommended minimum GPS data (default)

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC+GSA+GSV—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information and vector track and speed over ground, the recommended minimum GPS data, overall satellite data, and detailed satellite data

TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains position and velocity

TAIP compact data—TAIP GPS report that contains the compact position

TAIP LN report—TAIP GPS report that contains a long navigation message

TAIP TM report—TAIP GPS report that contains the time and date

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PGPSR on page 354.

How frequently (in seconds) the GPS report is sent to the serial link

Options are:

1– 65535—(up to 18.2 hours)

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PGPSF on page 354.

Note: In devices with radio module MC8705, setting this field to 1 sec may result in the device providing GPS locations in intervals ranging from 1 to 3 secs (generally under

2 seconds). To determine which radio module your device has, in ACEmanager go to

Status > About and check the Radio Module Type field.

Rev 1 Oct.13

199

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-2: GPS: Local/Streaming

Field Description

Advanced

GPS Coverage

This field refers to the cellular network coverage.

Options are:

ALWAYS (default)—GPS reports are always streamed to the serial link.

Out of Coverage—GPS reports are only streamed to the serial link when the device has no cellular connection.

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PGPSC on page 353.

Tip:

The Out of Coverage option enables you to use a back-up in-vehicle mapping application that does not rely on cellular network access.

GPS Reports Delay

(secs)

The delay (in seconds) before the out of the coverage stream begins. This field only applies if the GPS coverage field is set to “Out of Coverage”.

0 (default)

1–255

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PGPSD on page 354.

Local/Streaming—LATS

LATS is a local IP report. LATS reports are limited to tethered IP-based LAN hosts

(Ethernet, USB/net, DUN, PPPoE). LATS does not have any transport/SNF options. The reports are always sent regardless of cellular coverage.

The destination IP cannot be configured directly. The first connected LAN host is used. If multiple hosts are connected, the priority is the host using the Public IP address, or if all hosts are using Private IP addresses, the priority is:

Ethernet

USB

DUN

200 4114514

GPS Configuration

Figure 9-5: ACEmanager: GPS > Local/Streaming: LATS

Table 9-3: GPS: Local/Streaming — LATS

Field Description

Local Reporting Time

Interval (Secs)

The frequency (in seconds) of the reports

Options are:

0 = Disable (default)

1–255

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPLATS on page 356.

Note: If the Local Reporting Time Interval is set to 1 second, there may be some variation in the report interval, with the report interval sometimes being less than 1 second and sometimes more than 1 second. Other settings for this field are accurate.

Rev 1 Oct.13

201

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-3: GPS: Local/Streaming — LATS

Field Description

Local Report Type

Sets one of the following Local Report types:

RAP

GPS Data—RAP GPS report that contains only GPS data

GPS+Date—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data with the UTC time and date

(default)

GPS+Date+RF—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data, the UTC time and date, and radio frequency information for the cellular connection

GPS+Date+RF+EIO—RAP GPS report that contains GPS data, the UTC time and date, radio frequency information for the cellular connection, and the current I/O state

NMEA

NMEA GGA+VTG—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, and speed over ground

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, speed over ground, and recommended minimum GPS data

NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC+GSA+GSV—NMEA GPS report that contains fix information, vector track, speed over ground, the recommended minimum GPS data, overall satellite data, and detailed satellite data

TAIP

TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains position and velocity

Compact TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains the compact position

TAIP LN report—TAIP GPS report that contains a long navigation message

TAIP TM report—TAIP GPS report that contains the time and date.

Note: You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPLATSR on page 357.

Note: LATS does not have an option for Xora reports.

Starting Destination

Port

Number of Extra

Destination Ports

The primary port that reports are sent to

The LATS source port is 17335. This is not configurable.

You can send the report to up to 7 additional consecutive ports. For example, if the starting port is 12351 and you set this field to 5, reports are sent to ports 12351, 12352, 12353,

12354, 12355, and 12356.

The default is 0 which means only the starting port is used.

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPLATSEXTRA on page 356.

202 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-3: GPS: Local/Streaming — LATS

Field Description

Device ID in Local

Reports

Allows use of the IMEI/ESN or phone number in LATS local IP RAP reports to identify a device/vehicle. Options are:

None (default)

Phone Number

ESN/IMEI

Tip:

Including the device ID is especially useful when your devices have dynamic IP addresses.

Local Report

Destination IP

Note: If you want the device ID included in all other RAP GPS reports, see

Use Device ID in Location Reports on page 205.

This read-only field shows the IP address of the destination that LATS reports are send to.

Through its use of DHCP, ALEOS detects if there is a connected host and designates that host's IP as the LATS destination. When no host is connected at startup, ALEOS uses the first IP address in the Ethernet DHCP pool as the destination. When using Public mode for an interface, that interface will be the LATS destination even if it's not the first host connected.

Note: The Local Report Destination IP is not configurable. If you want a GPS report to go to a specific host IP, user Server 1–4 configuration. (See

Servers 1 to 4 on page 187.)

Report Odometer

Enables odometer reporting

Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

Note: Only applies for RAP report types.

Report Digital Inputs

Enables digital input reporting. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

Note: Only applies for RAP report types.

Rev 1 Oct.13

203

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Global Settings

Most of the Global settings apply to all GPS Server and Local reports.

Figure 9-6: ACEmanager: GPS > Global Settings

Table 9-4: GPS: Global Settings

Field Description

GPS Settings

Enable GPS

Diversity/GPS

Antenna Bias

This option only appears on AirLink devices with one of the following radio modules:

MC8705, SL8090, and SL8092. (You can view the radio module type on the Status > Home screen.)

If your device has one of these radio modules, Sierra Wireless recommends that you disable GPS if you are not using it. Options are:

Enable (default)

Disable

This field applies only to the LS300.

Configure this field according to the type of GPS antenna you are using. Check the antenna manufacturer’s documentation to determine if you have an active or passive GPS antenna.

Options are:

Enable (default)—Use the default setting if you are using an amplified (active) GPS antenna.

Disable—Disable this feature if you are using a passive GPS antenna.

204 4114514

GPS Configuration

Table 9-4: GPS: Global Settings (Continued)

Field Description

General

Odometer Value

(meters)

The odometer value increments based on the GPS distance traveled. You can include this

value in RAP GPS reports. (See GPS Report Type on page 191).

You can set the odometer value to an initial value. Maximum value is 4 294 967 295 meters

(4,294,967 kilometers or 2,668,769 miles).

Default: 0

Note: The RAP report displays the odometer value in 100s of meters.

TAIP ID

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPODOMVAL on page 357.

The four character alphanumeric ID used in all TAIP reports

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPTAIPID on page 358.

Send SnF Buffer immediately on input

If this feature is enabled, any pending stored reports are sent if the I/O input changes, a stationary vehicle is moved, or a maximum speed is exceeded, provided those events are enabled on the GPS > Server > Events screen. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPFLUSHONEVT on page 355.

Use Device ID in

Location Reports

Allows use of the IMEI/ESN or phone number in RAP reports configured for Servers 1–4 to identify a device/vehicle. Options are:

None (default)

Phone Number

ESN/IMEI

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see *PPDEVID on page 355.

Tip:

Including the device ID is especially useful when your devices have dynamic IP addresses.

Note: The device ID in RAP reports is in hex, not plain text.

Note: This option does not apply to LATS reports. If you want the device ID included in

LATS GPS reports, see

Device ID in Local Reports on page 203.

Note: If you want this Device ID included in the TCP PAD connections, enable the Include

Device ID on TCP Connect field on the Serial screen (Serial > Port Configuration > TCP).

See Port Configuration on page 221.

Rev 1 Oct.13

205

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 9-4: GPS: Global Settings (Continued)

Field Description

Advanced

TCP GPS Port

You can obtain a single location snapshot from the device via a TCP session using the

AirLink device’s IP address and the device port configured in this field.

1–65535 (default 9494)

0 = Disable

You can also use an AT Command to set this value. For more information, see

*PPTCPPOLL on page 359.

Note: Access is restricted to the IP address defined for server 1. (See

Report Server IP

Address on page 192.)

GPS Fix Mode

Heading Sensitivity

Specifies the GPS fix mode. Options are:

Standalone (default)

MS Based—(Mobile Station Based fix) Uses assistance GPS data from a remote server over the WAN interface

Sets the sensitivity of the GPS heading reading

Normal (default)

High

It is recommended that you leave the field set to Normal to avoid showing misleading heading values from poor GPS signal (poor sky view, reflections in urban canyon, etc.), but if your GPS application has its own GPS heading sensitivity algorithms, try changing this setting to High.

206 4114514

10: Events Reporting Configuration

Introduction

Events Reporting allows you to generate reports or perform actions in response to the events that are configured in the ALEOS software.

An Event is a measurement of a physical property AND a state change or a threshold crossing. For example, radio module signal strength (RSSI) is a physical property. A threshold crossing could be set to -105 dBm. You can configure an Event which consists of the

RSSI with the -105 dBm threshold. There are many Events that can be configured; these are described in detail below.

An Action is an activity which can be performed, such as sending a report to a remote server, sending an SNMP trap, changing the value on a digital signal line, or turning off cellular communication with any devices connected to a host port. If a report is to be sent, you can select the data to include in the report.

Events and Actions work together. When an Event is triggered, this means that, for the physical property being measured, the state change or the threshold crossing has occurred. The Event will then effect the Action to occur. For example, if you have configured an

RSSI Event, then you can have a report sent (example: SMS

Message) once the threshold is crossed. This relationship is shown

conceptually in Figure 10-1

.

10

1) User Configuration of

Events And Actions

2) Measure

Physical Input

Physical Input

One of the following : RSSI, Digital Input ,

Speed , Heading , etc.

Rev 1 Oct.13

N

3) Threshold

Exceeded or

State Change?

Y

Event

4) Perform Activity

Send Report , change digital signal , turn off services, etc

Action

Figure 10-1: Events Reporting Concept

The procedure of how Events Reporting works is described below:

1.

Configure the events and actions.

207

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

2.

After deployment, the device begins measuring a physical input.

3.

The measurement is compared to the user-configured threshold or state change. If there is no change, then another measurement is performed. If a

state change (or threshold crossing) occurs, then the flow moves to step 4.

4.

The Action associated with the Event. In this step, a report may be generated, or some other activity is performed. Afterwards, the flow returns to step 1.

Additional Behavior and Features

Events/Actions are not one shot activities. After an Action is performed, the Event is still active and will trigger the next time the state change or threshold crossing occurs.

A single Event may activate one or more Actions. For example, if RSSI is below threshold, you can turn off data services (Action 1) and send an SMS message

(Action 2).

A single Action may be activated by one or more Events. For example, if the vehicle speed is above a threshold or if the vehicle heading changes, either Event can perform the same action.

After defining an Event, always select the Apply button to save these definitions and apply them to an Action.

Selecting the Delete button on the Events Reporting tab will delete all current

Event and Action data.

Configuration Overview

To configure Events and Actions, complete the following steps:

Note: All Events Reporting configuration changes take effect after a short delay (about one minute). No reboot of the AirLink device is necessary.

1.

Define an Event – Events can be configured using the ACEmanager user interface. Select the Events Reporting Tab, and then select the

Add New

subtab to add an event (e.g., RSSI).

Note in the Action Description frame that there are no actions listed.

208 4114514

Events Reporting Configuration

Figure 10-2: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Events > Add New

2.

Define an Action – This is done on the Actions group.

Rev 1 Oct.13

209

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

210

Figure 10-3: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Actions > Add New

3.

Associate the Action with the Event – This is done by clicking on the Events group. On the Events page, note that the new Action (Low Signal) is displayed in the Action Description frame. You can select the check box to associate this action with the Radio Signal Event.

4114514

Events Reporting Configuration

Figure 10-4: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Events > Cell Radio Sign

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click Actions.

6.

To send a test report, wait about 1 minute after you click Apply, and then click the Test report button.

Table 10-1: Event Types

Event Name Event Type

Digital Inputs

Digital Input #

The number of digital inputs depends on the device and in the case of the GX Series device, whether or not you have an I/O X-

Card installed.

State Change

Pulse Accumulator #

The number of pulse accumulators depends on the device and in the case of the GX Series device, whether or not you have an I/O X-

Card installed.

Threshold Crossing

Rev 1 Oct.13

Threshold or State Change Options

Switch Closed

Switch Opened

On any change

When Changed By

211

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 10-1: Event Types (Continued)

Analog Input #

Threshold Crossing

Note: The number of analog inputs depends on the device and in the case of the GX Series device, whether or not you have an I/O X-

Card installed.

Transformed Analog #

Note: The number of transformed analogs depends on the device and in the case of the GX Series device, whether or not you have an

I/O X-Card installed.

Threshold Crossing

AVL

GPS Fix

State Change

Vehicle Speed

Heading Change

Engine Hours

Network

RSSI

Network State

Network Service

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

State Change

State Change

Other Report Types

Periodic Reports

Power In

Board Temperature

CDMA HW Temperature

Data Usage

Daily Data Usage

Monthly Data Usage

Threshold Crossing (Time)

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

Threshold Crossing

212

When value crossed above a threshold, below a threshold, or either (volts)

When value crossed above a threshold, below a threshold, or either (units configured on the I/O screen) See

Transformed Analog on page 258.

Fix Lost

Fix Obtained

Any Fix Change

Vehicle Speed (KM/h)

Heading Change (degrees)

Engine Hours

Signal Power (-dBm)

When Device is Ready

Roaming

2G Service

Rev A or HSUPA

Any Data Service

Period to compare (seconds)

Power threshold (volts)

Degrees Celsius

Degrees Celsius

Percentage of daily threshold

Percentage of monthly threshold

4114514

Events Reporting Configuration

Note: ALEOS Data Usage is approximate and should not be compared with data usage recorded by the Mobile Network Operator.

SIERRA WIRELESS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DATA OVERAGES.

Action Description

Select a name for the action of your choice.

Action Type

Under the Events Reporting Action tab, there is an Action Type field which has different parameters listed in the scroll-down menu.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 10-5: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action > Action Type scroll down

There are several ways to send a report. The configuration will vary.

Email

·

Destination email address

·

Subject, Message

·

Data groups

SMS text message

·

Destination Phone number

·

Message

·

Data Groups

You can configure a maximum of 5 actions per event. If the action requires an IP connection, the following source ports are used. These are not configurable.

Actions (in the order configured)

Action 1 17348

Source port

Action 2

Action 3

17349

17351

213

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Actions (in the order configured)

Action 4

Action 5

17352

17353

Source port

Figure 10-6: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > Email (similar fields for SMS)

214

Figure 10-7: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > SMS

SNMP Trap notification

·

Destination IP is configured in the SNMP menu.

4114514

Events Reporting Configuration

Figure 10-8: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > SNMP TRAP

Relay Link

·

Select the relay to link to, and invert if necessary.

Figure 10-9: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > Relay Link

GPS RAP/Report 13 message

·

Configure the report server store and forward properties and report options.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 10-10: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > GPS RAP Report 13

Events Protocol message to a server

·

Destination report server is configured

·

Report format – TLV (Type, Length and Value), Binary, ASCII, or XML.

215

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

216

Figure 10-11: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action Type > Type, Length, Value

Turn-Off Services — This setting limits services and is primarily used in conjunction with monitoring data usage. For example, you could set the

AirLink device to limit network service when data usage exceeds a configured threshold.

Figure 10-12: ACEmanager: Events > Actions > Action Type > Turn off Services

Email/SMS

• To

— The email address where the report should be sent.

• Subject

— The subject that should be displayed.

• Message

— The message you want included with each report.

• Body Type

— Select message in ASCI Text, SVS SCI and XML.

• Test report

— Use to send a test report. After you have updated all the fields and clicked the Apply button, wait about 1 minute, and then click the Test report button.

Note: You cannot send an Email with your AirLink device unless the Email server you have configured allows your AirLink device as a relay host. Talk to your network administrator to ensure you can send email through the email server using your AirLink device.

Note: You can only send SMS from your AirLink device if your cellular account allows

SMS. You may need to have SMS added to the account. SMS from data accounts is blocked on some cellular networks.

Report Groups

You can select the data you want to be included in the report groups. The options are displayed. Check the box corresponding to the data displayed.

4114514

By default, all the boxes are clear.

Events Reporting Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 10-13: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Action (for GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed)

The reports attributes are:

Digital and Analog I/O

The options available in this section depend on the AirLink device, and in the case of the AirLink GX Series device, whether or not it has an I/O X-Card installed.

·

Enable for Digital Inputs 1–5—The status of the specific digital inputs

·

Enable for Digital Outputs 1–5—The status of the specific digital outputs

·

Enable for Pulse Accumulator 1–5—The pulse count of the specific digital inputs

·

Enable for Analog Inputs 1–5— The status of the specific analog input

(reported in volts)

·

Enable for Transformed Analog Inputs 1–5— The status of the specific analog input (reported in units configured in ACEmanager I/O >

Configuration—see Configuration on page 257)

AVL

·

Enable for Satellite Fix—Whether or not there is a usable GPS satellite fix

·

Enable for Latitude—The latitude reported by GPS

·

Enable for Longitude—The longitude reported by GPS

217

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

218

·

Enable for Satellite Count—The number of satellites the GPS is using to get a satellite fix

·

Enable for Vehicle Speed—The speed of the vehicle reported by GPS

·

Enable for Vehicle Heading—The direction the vehicle is traveling reported by GPS

·

Enable for Engine Hours—The number of hours the engine has been on, based on either Power In or Ignition Sense

·

Enable for Odometer—The number of miles reported by GPS

·

Enable for TAIP ID—The TAIP ID for the AirLink device

Device Name

These elements in the Device Name group are general identifiers for the Air-

Link device and its cellular account.

·

Enable for Device ID—The device ID (ESN or EID/IMEI) of the AirLink device (enable for a cellular account with a dynamic IP address)

·

Enable for Phone Number—The phone number of the AirLink device

·

Enable for Device Name—The name of the AirLink device

·

Enable for MAC Address—The MAC Address of the Ethernet port of the

AirLink device

·

Enable for SIM ID—The SIM ID of the AirLink device

·

Enable for IMSI—The IMSI of the SIM installed in the AirLink device

·

Enable for GPRS Operator—The wireless Mobile Network Operator the

SIM card is associated with

·

Enable for Time—The time the AirLink device is active

Network Data

The Network Data in this group relates to the cellular network and the connection state of the AirLink device.

·

Enable for Network State—The network state for the AirLink device

·

Enable for Network Channel—The network channel to which the AirLink device is connected

·

Enable for RSSI—The signal strength for the AirLink device

·

Enable for Network Service—The network service for the AirLink device

·

Enable for Network IP—The IP address given by the cellular network

·

Enable for Daily Usage MB—The daily usage (in MBs) of the AirLink device

·

Enable for Monthly Usage MB—The monthly usage (in MBs) of the AirLink device

Tx/Rx

The Network Traffic in this group relates to the cellular network and the network between the AirLink device and any directly connected device(s).

·

Enable for Bytes Sent—The number of bytes sent on the cellular network since last reset

·

Enable for Bytes Received—The number of bytes received from the cellular network since last reset

·

Enable for Host Bytes Sent—The number of bytes sent from the network between the AirLink device and the connected device(s) since last reset

·

Enable for Host Bytes Received—The number of bytes received from the network between the AirLink device and the connected device(s) since last reset

·

Enable for IP Packets Sent—The number of IP packets sent on the cellular network since last reset

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Events Reporting Configuration

·

Enable for IP Packets Received—The number of IP packets received from the cellular network since last reset

·

Enable for Host IP Packets Sent—The number of IP packets sent from the network between the AirLink device and the connected device(s) since last reset

·

Enable for Host IP Packets Received—The number of IP packets received from the network between the AirLink device and the connected device(s) since last reset

Misc Data

Miscellaneous Data includes temperature rates and other information that does not fit in the other categories

·

Enable for Power In—The voltage level of the power coming in to the

AirLink device at the time of the report

·

Enable for Board Temperature—The temperature of the internal hardware of the AirLink device at the time of the report

·

Enable for Host Comm State—The signal level between the AirLink device and the connected device(s)

·

CDMA HW Temperature—The temperature of the internal radio module

·

CDMA PRL Version—PRL version used by the AirLink device

·

CDMA EC/IO—The quality of the signal from the cellular CDMA network

·

GSM EC/IO—The quality of the signal from the cellular GSM network

·

Cell Info—The cellular network cell information for the AirLink device

Note: For each group you can enable individual fields.

Relay

The relay outputs on the AirLink device I/O port can be used to cause an external action.

1—Relay 1—Open

2—Relay 1, Inverted—Closed

The relays are capable of switching small loads. If you need a stronger signal, such as to open a door lock, connect the AirLink device’s relay to a stronger solenoid relay that has enough power to cause the desired effect.

Configure Events

To configure events,

1.

Enter an Event Description. The event description will be displayed in the

Events group in the left hand side panel.

2.

Select any action and click Add Action. Then select any Action Type and configure accordingly.

3.

Click Save and the action will be displayed in the Available Actions menu.

219

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Events Protocol

The Events Reporting protocol is a collection of messaging formats. The messages are sent to the Reports Server.

The Events Protocol includes four message types.

• 1 — Type, Length, Value

— The TLV consists of the MSCI ID as the type, the length of the data, and the actual data.

• 2 — Binary

— A binary condensed form of the TLV message will be sent.

• 3 — CSV-ASCII

— An ASCII condensed and comma delimited form of the

TLV message will be sent.

• 4 — XML

— An XML form of the data will be sent.

Tip:

Because of its flexibility and robustness, the TLV message type is recommended for most reports using the Events Protocol. The Binary and ASCII forms do not contain a “type field” which can result in misinterpretation of data. Since the TLV and XML forms always includes the type as well as the data, an unintentional type can be identified much easier.

220 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

11: Serial Configuration

Use the serial port to connect devices or computers using a DB9-

RS232 connection.

Note: These commands are specific to the RS232 port and generally do not apply to USB/serial.

11

Port Configuration

Serial Port Configuration consists of five categories of configurable parameters:

Port Configuration

Advanced

TCP

UDP

PPP

These categories and their parameters are shown in

Figure 11-1

,

Figure 11-2

, and Figure 11-3

and described in Table 11-1 ,

Table 11-2 , and

Table 11-3 .

221

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Port Configuration

Figure 11-1: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration > Port Configuration

222 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-1: Serial Port Configuration > Port Configuration

Field Description

Port Configuration

Startup Mode Default

Default power-up mode for the serial port. When the AirLink device is power-cycled, the serial port enters the communication mode specified.

Note: It can take up to 5 minutes to establish a connection.

Autologin reverse telnet

This field only appears when the Startup Mode Default field is set to reverse telnet/SSH.

Determines the log in procedure when using reverse telnet.

Enable—Do not enter a user name and password when you telnet to a a router or other device that has a serial connection to your AirLink device. Login is automatic.

Disable—Enter a user name and password when you telnet to a a router or other device that has a serial connection to your AirLink device. (Default)

For more information about reverse telnet, see

Reverse Telnet/SSH on page 224.

Configure Serial Port

Format: [speed][data bits][parity][stop bits]

Valid speeds are 300–115200, data bits: 7 or 8, parity: O,E,N,M, stop bits: 1,1.5.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S23 on page 370.

Flow Control

DB9 Serial Echo

Normal (AT command) default

PPP

UDP

TCP

Reverse Telnet/SSH—Allows you to telnet or SSH into a router or other device connected to the AirLink device via a serial port. For information on configuring

reverse telnet, see Reverse Telnet/SSH on page 224.

Modbus ASCII

Modbus RTU (Binary)

BSAP—Bristol Standard Asynchronous Protocol

Variable Modbus

UDP Multiple Unicast—Data from the serial port is packed into UDP packets and sent to multiple IP addresses (for example, multiple AirLink devices). For more information, see

UDP Multiple Unicast on page 227.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See MD on page 361.

Serial port flow control setting

None—No flow control is being used (default)

Hardware—RTS/CTS hardware flow control is being used

Transparent SW—Transparent software flow control. Uses escaped XON and XOFF for flow control. XON and XOFF characters in data stream are escaped with the @ character (0x40). @ in data is sent as @@.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See \Q on page 369.

AT command echo mode

Enable—Text is visible as you type (default)

Disable—Text you type is not visible

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See

E on page 368.

Rev 1 Oct.13

223

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 11-1: Serial Port Configuration > Port Configuration

Field Description

Data Forwarding

Timeout (.1 seconds)

Data Forwarding

Character

Device Port

Destination Port

Destination Address

Data forwarding time-out. (How long the application waits before bundling characters to send) If set to 0, a forwarding time-out of 10 ms is used. Used in UDP or TCP PAD mode.

Increments in tenths of a second.

Default value is 1 (The forward time-out is 100 ms)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S50 on page 364.

PAD data forwarding character. ASCII code of character that causes data to be forwarded.

Used in UDP or TCP PAD mode

Default is No forwarding character.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S51 on page 364.

The port on the AirLink device used for incoming TCP/UDP communication (Default is

12345)

If either, or both, of the UDP Auto Answer or TCP Auto Answer parameters are enabled, when the AirLink device receives incoming TCP or UDP packets that are destined for this port, it strips off the IP header and send the packet payload out its serial port.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DPORT on page 360.

The destination port that TCP/UDP communication is sent to

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S53 on page 364.

IP address TCP/UDP communication is sent to

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S53 on page 364.

Default Dial Mode

Host Authentication

Mode

PPP User ID

PPP Password

Protocol used to send messages

Options are:

TCP

UDP (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See

S53 on page 364.

Sets the authentication method the host uses for PPP. Options are:

None

CHAP—The stronger of the two protocols. Recommended, provided it is supported by all the client devices

PAP and CHAP—If CHAP is not supported by the client, the host reverts to PAP.

Sets the User ID for authentication

Sets the User Password for authentication

For information on configuring an AirLink device to use SSH PAD mode, see SSH

PAD Mode on page 22.

Reverse Telnet/SSH

The Reverse Telnet/SSH feature allows you to connect to and configure a router or other device that has a serial connection to your AirLink device.

Note: If you have all 5 VPN tunnels configured, you cannot use Reverse Telnet/SSH.

224 4114514

Serial Configuration

To configure Reverse Telnet/SSH:

1.

Log into ACEmanager and go to Serial > Port Configuration.

2.

In the Startup Mode Default field, select Reverse Telnet/SSH and click Apply.

3.

In the Configure Serial Port field, set the speed, data bits, parity, and stop bits. (The serial port configuration depends on the router you want to connect to. For example, to connect to a Cisco router that has a default baud rate of

9600, enter 9600,8N1 in the Configure Serial Port field.)

Rev 1 Oct.13

4.

Optional—If you are planning to use telnet (rather than SSH), you can be automatically logged in when you telnet to the AirLink device without having to enter a user name and password. Autologin is not supported with SSH.

To set up automatic login:

a.

In the Autologin Reverse Telnet field, select Enable.

b.

Click Apply.

5.

Go to Services > Telnet/SSH.

6.

In the Remote Login Server Mode field, select:

·

Telnet—if you want to Telnet into the connected device

·

SSH—if you want to SSH into the connected device

Note: If you enabled Autologin, select Telnet.

225

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Reboot the AirLink device.

9.

Use a Telnet or SSH terminal client such as Putty or Teraterm to connect to the appropriate port:

·

If you are using Autologin, Telnet to the port specified in the Device Port field (default is 12345). SSH is not available with Autologin.

·

If you are not using Autologin, you can Telnet or SSH into the port specified in the Remote Login Server Telnet/SSH Port field (default is 2332).

10.

If prompted, log in with the following credentials:

·

User name: sconsole

·

Password: 12345 (default)

226

For information on changing the default reverse telnet password, see

Change

Password on page 261.

ALEOS redirects you to the router or other device connected to the AirLink device serial port. You can use this connection to configure connected device.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Serial Configuration

Note: You may be required to enter a user name and password to access the router or other device.

UDP Multiple Unicast

With UDP Multiple Unicast, data from the serial port is packed into UDP packets and sent to multiple IP addresses. To configure UDP Multiple Unicast:

1.

Log in to ACEmanager as “user” and go to Serial > Port Configuration > Port

Configuration.

2.

In the Startup Mode Default field, select UDP Multiple Unicast.

3.

In the Destination Port field, enter the remote port to be used.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Go to Serial > Modbus Address List and enter the index numbers and IP

addresses of the devices you want the data sent to. (See Modbus Address

List on page 234.)

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Reboot the device.

Note: To avoid flooding the network, there is a 20 millisecond pause between sending the

UDP packet to each destination.

227

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Advanced

Figure 11-2: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration > Advanced

Table 11-2: Serial Port Configuration > Advanced

Field Description

Advanced

Assert DSR

Assert DCD

Assert DSR always when the device is in a data mode (UDP, TCP, etc.), or when the device is in network coverage. Options are:

Always (default)

In Data Mode

In Coverage

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See &S on page 369.

Assert DCD always, or when the device is in a data mode (UDP, TCP, etc.) or when the device is in network coverage. Options are:

Always (default)

In Data Mode

In Coverage

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See &C on page 366.

228 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-2: Serial Port Configuration > Advanced

Field Description

Enable CTS

Assert CTS when there is network coverage. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *CTSE on page 360.

DTR Mode

Quiet Mode

AT Verbose Mode

Use DTR from the serial device, or ignore DTR (same as S211 on page 370). Options are:

Use DTR

Ignore DTR (default)

Disable or enable display of device responses. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See Q on page 368.

Sets the level of information returned for AT commands

Options are:

Verbose (default)

Numeric

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See V on page 371.

Call Progress Result

Mode

Convert 12 digit

Number to IP Address

Choose whether a 12-digit number is converted to an IP address (eg. 111222333444 to

111.222.333.444). Options are:

Use as Name (default)

Use as IP

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *NUMTOIP on page 363

Disable ATZ Reset

When enabled adds 19200 to CONNECT messages

Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See X on page 371.

IP List Dial

The value set in this field determines whether or not issuing an ATZ Command resets the

AirLink device. Options are:

On — Block is enabled—ATZ does not reset the device.

Off —Block is disabled—ATZ resets the device. (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DATZ on page 368.

This allows access to the Modbus IP Address using the first two digits of the dial string. For example, ATDT1234567 would imply ID index 12 on the Modbus Address list and use the associated IP Address as the destination. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See IPL on page 363.

Rev 1 Oct.13

229

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 11-2: Serial Port Configuration > Advanced

Field Description

Keep Alive Mode

Keep Alive Delay

When this feature is enabled, the AirLink device reboots if there is no traffic for longer than the period configured in the Keep Alive Delay field. Options are”

Disable (default)

Enable

When Keep Alive Mode is enabled, use this field to set the delay (in minutes) before the

AirLink device reboots if there is no traffic on the serial port. Accepted values:

10–65535

TCP

Figure 11-3: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration > TCP

Table 11-3: Serial Port Configuration > TCP

Field Description

TCP

TCP Auto Answer

This determines how the AirLink device responds to an incoming TCP connection request.

The AirLink device remains in AT Command mode until a connection request is received.

The AirLink device sends a “RING” string to the host. A “CONNECT” sent to the host indicates acknowledgment of the connection request and the TCP session is established.

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S0 on page 369.

230 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-3: Serial Port Configuration > TCP

Field Description

TCP Connect Timeout

(seconds)

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for a TCP connection to be established when dialing out

You can also use an AT command to configure this field.

TCP Idle Timeout

TCP idle time-out in the configured units (See TCP Idle Timeout Unit on page 231.)

Specifies a time interval upon which if there is no in or outbound traffic through a TCP connection, the connection is terminated.

Default is 0.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See TCPT on page 365.

TCP Idle Timeout Unit

Units used for the TCP Idle Timeout Interval.

Options are:

Minutes (default)

secs

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See TCPS on page 365.

TCP Connect

Response Delay

(seconds)

Include Device ID on

TCP Connect

The number of seconds to delay the “CONNECT' response upon establishing a TCP connection, or the number of tenths of seconds to delay before outputting ENQ on the serial port after the CONNECT when the ENQ feature is enabled.

n=0–255

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S221 on page 370.

If this option is enabled, after a TCP connection is established, ALEOS sends a packet that contains the device ID (and optionally a prefix, suffix, and CRLF). Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

Note: To use this feature, ensure that the Device ID is configured in the Use Device ID in

Location Reports field on the GPS screen (GPS > Global Settings > General). See

Global

Settings on page 204.

Device ID Prefix

Device ID Suffix

Send CR LF after

Device ID

Sets the Prefix DID in the device identification packet upon TCP connection. Maximum length of the prefix is 80 characters.

Sets the Suffix DID in the device identification packet upon TCP connection. Maximum length of the suffix is 80 characters.

Enables a carriage return to be inserted in the device identification packet after the Suffix

DID. Options are:

no CR LF

send CR

send CR LF (carriage return, line feed) Default

Rev 1 Oct.13

231

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

UDP

Figure 11-4: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration > UDP

Table 11-4: Serial Port Configuration > UDP

Field Description

UDP

UDP Auto Answer

UDP Idle Timeout

(seconds)

UDP Connect Last

Whether the AirLink device auto answers and incoming UDP connection request

Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S82 on page 364.

UDP Idle Time-out in seconds

Specifies a time interval upon which if there is no in or outbound traffic through a UDP connection, the connection is terminated.

n=0 No idle time-out (Default)

n=1–255 Time-out in seconds

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S83 on page 365.

Allows you to choose to use the last accepted IP address and port number as the default settings, instead of using S53 (destination address)

Options are:

Do not change S53 (default)

Set S53 last IP

Note: Resetting the device restores the configured S53 (destination address).

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *UDPLAST on page 365.

232 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-4: Serial Port Configuration > UDP

Field Description

Allow Any Incoming IP

When UDP auto answer is enabled, use this field to select whether to allow any incoming

IP address to connect or to only allow the configured destination IP address to connect.

Options are:

Allow only S53 (default)

Allow any IP address

If you select Allow only S53, the Destination Port and Destination Address fields under

Serial > Port Configuration must be configured. (See Table 11-1 on page 223.)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See AIP on page 360.

Allow All UDP

UDP Auto Answer

Response

Accepts UDP packets from all IP addresses when a UDP session is active. If there is no

UDP session active, an incoming UDP packet is treated according to the UDP auto answer and AIP settings. Options are:

No effect (default)

Allow all—The AirLink device accepts all UDP traffic from any IP address during a

UDP session.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *UALL on page 365.

Half-Open Response—In UDP auto answer (half-open) mode. Options are:

No Response—No Response codes when UDP session is initiated (default)

RING CONNECT—RING CONNECT response codes sent out serial link before the data from the first UDP packet

Dial UDP Always

UDP Serial Delay

(.1 seconds)

Note: Quiet Mode must be Off.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See HOR on page 368.

The dial command always uses UDP, even when using ATDT. Options are:

Disable—Dial using the means specified (default)

Enable—Dial UDP always, even when using ATDT

Note: When this parameter is set you cannot establish a TCP PAD connection.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DU on page 361.

Waits the specified delay before sending the first received UDP packet and the subsequent

UDP packets out to the port Ethernet (in 100 ms units).

No UDP packet delay (default)

1–255— Delay in 100ms units, from 100 ms to 25.5 sec.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *USD on page 365.

Rev 1 Oct.13

233

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

PPP

Figure 11-5: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration > PPP

Table 11-5: Serial Port Configuration > PPP

Description Field

PPP a

Device PPP IP

Host PPP IP

Sets the device IP address (in private mode)

Sets the host IP address (in private mode) a.

Note: This section is only visible when PPP is selected in the Startup Mode Default field.

Modbus Address List

To add a Modbus Address:

1.

Log in to ACEmanager as “user” and go to Serial > MODBUS Address List.

2.

Click Add More.

3.

Enter the Index number, an equal sign, and the IP address. For example:

10=123.123.123.123 (decimal)

0xA=123.123.123.123 (hex) Prefix 0x to hex numbers.

Including the port number after the IP address is optional. If you include the port number, separate the port number and IP address by a colon.

For example:

10=123.123.123.123:11223

0xA=123.123.123.123:11223

234 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Serial Configuration

Figure 11-6: Serial > MODBUS Address List

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Reboot.

To delete an address from the list, click the X beside it.

Note: You can also use the AT Commands MLIST and MLISTX to add address entries and

MLIST? or MLISTX? to query the entries on the list. See

MLIST on page 362, and MLISTX on page 362.

I/O X-Card Serial Port Configuration

This section applies only to the AirLink GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed. The serial port on the I/O X-Card is a standard RS232 port using five wires: RX, TX, RTS, CTS, and GND. The following are not supported: RI, DCD,

DTR, and DSR. For more information on the I/O X-Card, refer to the AirLink GX

Series User Guide.

To configure the serial port for the installed I/O X-Card:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Serial > I/O X-Card Serial Port.

235

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 11-7: ACEmanager: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > IO X-Card Serial Configuration

Table 11-6: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > IO X-Card Serial Configuration

Field Description

Startup Mode Default

Configure Serial Port

Flow Control

The default startup mode for the serial port

Options are:

Normal (AT command) default

UDP

TCP

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See MD on page 361.

Format: [speed],[data bits][parity][stop bits]

Valid speeds are 300–115200, data bits: 7 or 8, parity: O,E,N,M, stop bits: 1,1.5,2

115200, 8N1 (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S23 on page 370.

Serial port data flow control setting

None—No flow control is being used (default)

Hardware—RTS/CTS hardware flow control is being used

Transparent SW—Transparent software flow control. Uses escaped XON and

XOFF for flow control. XON and XOFF characters in data stream are escaped with the @ character (0x40). @ in data is sent as @@.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See \Q on page 369.

236 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-6: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > IO X-Card Serial Configuration

Field

Description

DB15 Serial Echo

AT command echo mode

Options are:

Enable—Text is visible as you type. (default)

Disable—Text you type is not visible.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See E on page 368.

Data Forwarding Timeout

(.1 second)

Data forwarding time-out. (How long the application waits before bundling characters to send) If set to 0, a forwarding time-out of 10ms is used. Used in UDP or TCP PAD mode. Increments in tenths of a second.

Default is 1 (The forwarding time-out is 100 ms.)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S50 on page 364.

Data Forwarding

Character

Device Port

Destination Port

Destination Address

PAD data forwarding character. ASCII code of character that causes data to be forwarded. Used in UDP or TCP PAD mode

Default is No forwarding character

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S51 on page 364.

The port on the AirLink device used for incoming TCP/UDP communication (Default is

54321)

If either, or both, of the UDP Auto Answer or TCP Auto Answer parameters are enabled, when the AirLink device receives incoming TCP or UDP packets that are destined for this port, it strips off the IP header and send the packet payload out the serial port on the

I/O X-Card.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DPORT on page 360.

The destination port that TCP/UDP communication is sent to

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S53 on page 364.

The IP address TCP/UDP communication is sent to

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S53 on page 364.

Default Dial Mode

Protocol used to send messages

Options are:

TCP

UDP (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S53 on page 364.

Rev 1 Oct.13

237

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Advanced Settings

Figure 11-8: ACEmanager: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > Advanced

Table 11-7: Serial > X-Serial Port Configuration >Advanced and TCP Configuration

Field Description

Enable CTS

Quiet Mode

AT Verbose Mode

Call Progress Result

Mode

Assert CTS when there is network coverage. Options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *CTSE on page 360.

Disable or enable display of device responses.

Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See Q on page 368.

Sets the level of information returned for AT commands

Options are:

Verbose (default)

Numeric

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See V on page 371.

When enabled adds 19200 to CONNECT messages.

Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See X on page 371.

238 4114514

Serial Configuration

Table 11-7: Serial > X-Serial Port Configuration >Advanced and TCP Configuration

Field Description

Convert 12 digit Number to IP Address

Choose whether or not a 12-digit number is converted to an IP address

For example, converts 111222333444 to 111.222.333.444

Options are:

Use as Name (default)

Use as IP

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *NUMTOIP on page 363.

Disable ATZ Reset

IP List Dial

The value set in this field determines whether or not issuing an ATZ Command resets the AirLink device. Options are:

On (default) — ATZ does not reset the AirLink device

Off —ATZ resets the AirLink device.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DATZ on page 368.

This allows access to the Modbus IP Address using the first two digits of the dial string.

For example, ATDT1234567 would imply ID index 12 on the Modbus Address list and use the associated IP Address as the destination.

Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See IPL on page 363.

TCP Settings

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 11-9: ACEmanager: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > TCP

239

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 11-8: Serial > X-Serial Port Configuration >Advanced and TCP Configuration

Field Description

TCP Auto Answer

TCP Connect Timeout

(seconds)

This determines how the AirLink device responds to an incoming TCP connection request. The AirLink device remains in AT Command mode until a connection request is received. The AirLink device sends a “RING” string to the host. A “CONNECT” sent to the host indicates acknowledgment of the connection request and the TCP session is established.

Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S0 on page 369.

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for a TCP connection to be established when dialing out

You can also use an AT command to configure this field.

TCP Idle Timeout

TCP Idle Timeout Unit

TCP Connect Response

Delay (seconds)

TCP idle time-out in the configured units (See TCP Idle Timeout Unit on page 231.)

Specifies a time interval upon which if there is no in or outbound traffic through a TCP connection, the connection is terminated.

Default is 0.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See TCPT on page 365.

Units used for the TCP Idle Timeout interval

Options are:

Minutes (default)

secs

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See TCPS on page 365.

The number of seconds to delay the “CONNECT' response upon establishing a TCP connection, or the number of tenths of seconds to delay before outputting ENQ on the serial port after the CONNECT when the ENQ feature is enabled.

n=0–255

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S221 on page 370.

240 4114514

UDP Settings

Serial Configuration

Figure 11-10: ACEmanager: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > UDP

Table 11-9: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > UDP

Field

UDP Auto Answer

UDP Idle Timeout

(seconds)

UDP Connect Last

Description

Whether the AirLink device auto answers an incoming UDP connection request

Options are:

Enable

Disable (default)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S82 on page 364.

UDP idle time-out in seconds

Specifies a time interval upon which if there is no in or outbound traffic through a UDP connection, the connection is terminated.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See S83 on page 365.

Allows you to choose to use the last accepted IP address and port number as the default settings, instead of using S53 (destination address)

Options are:

Do not change S53 — Does not change the destination IP address (default)

Set S53 as last —Uses the last accepted IP address

Note: Resetting the device restores the configured S53 (destination address).

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *UDPLAST on page 365.

Rev 1 Oct.13

241

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 11-9: Serial > IO X-Card Serial Port > UDP

Field

Allow Any Incoming IP

Allow All UDP

Description

When UDP auto answer is enabled, use this field to select whether to allow any incoming IP address to connect or to only allow the configured destination IP address to connect.

Options are:

Allow only S53 —Allows only the configured destination IP address (default)

Allow any IP

If you select Allow only S53, the Destination Port and Destination Address fields under

Serial > X-Serial Port Configuration must be configured (See Table 11-6 on page 236.)

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See AIP on page 360.

Accepts UDP packets from all IP addresses when a UDP session is active. If there is no

UDP session active, an incoming UDP packet is treated according to the UDP auto answer and AIP settings.

Options are:

No effect (default)

Allow all—The AirLink device accepts all UDP traffic from any IP address during a

UDP session

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *UALL on page 365.

UDP Auto Answer

Response

Half-Open Response—In UDP auto answer (half-open) mode. Options are:

No Response—No Response codes when UDP session is initiated (default)

RING CONNECT—RING CONNECT response codes sent out over the serial link before the data from the first UDP packet

Dial UDP Always

UDP Serial Delay

(.1 seconds)

Note: Quiet Mode must be Off.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See HOR on page 368.

The dial command always uses UDP, even when using ATDT. Options are:

Disable—Dial using the means specified (default)

Enable—Dial UDP always, even when using ATDT

Note: When this parameter is set you cannot establish a TCP PAD connection.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *DU on page 361.

Waits the specified delay before sending the first received UDP packet and the subsequent UDP packets out to the Ethernet port (in 100 ms units).

No UDP packet delay (Default)

1–255 — Delay in 100ms units, from 100 ms to 25.5 sec.

You can also use an AT command to configure this field. See *USD on page 365.

242 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

12: Application Configuration

The Applications tab consists of a Data Usage section, a Garmin application, and an ALEOS Application Framework section.

Data Usage

The Data Usage feature available in the Application tab provides you with a way to actively monitor cellular data usage.

You can:

Actively monitor the cellular data usage by configuring usage level thresholds that result in notifications being sent to you.

Halt device data traffic until the end of the billing period. In the event that you decide to halt the data traffic, the management interface to ALEOS is still available.

Set usage levels and thresholds on a monthly and/or daily limit.

Note: ALEOS Data Usage is approximate and should not be compared with data usage recorded by the Mobile Network Operator.

SIERRA WIRELESS IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DATA OVERAGES.

To Configure Data Usage:

1.

Select the Applications tab and the Data Usage section, and enter the data usage fields, such as monthly limit (in GB or MB) and the day of the month that starts the cellular billing cycle.

12

243

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

244

Figure 12-1: ACEmanager: Applications: Data Usage

Field

General

Usage Monitoring

Data Service

Plan Units

Description

Use this field to enable or disable data usage monitoring. Options are:

Disable (Default)

Enable

If Data Service is on, “Available” appears on the user interface. If data usage exceeds the configured data limit, “Not Available” appears on the screen.

Select the units used for your data plan. The options are:

MB—Megabytes (Default)

KB—Kilobytes

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Application Configuration

Field

Daily Limit

Daily Limit (MB)

Description

This is the user-specified daily data usage (in MBs) limit (24 hour limit).

You can specify data usage limits on a daily or monthly basis. A limit is essentially a threshold that can trigger the software to take a userspecified action if the usage goes above the threshold.

Note: The Daily Limit value MUST be expressed as an integer (i.e., a whole number) and NOT as a fraction (e.g., “3.5”).

Caution:

Data usage limits are approximate and based on reporting conditions in ALEOS. Data usage may run over the amount set in this field before ALEOS takes the specified action.

Tip:

ALEOS reads the data usage every 3 to 5 minutes. If you are using an application that requires high data usage, you can set an alert to warn you when data usage reaches a safe limit that takes into account the amount of data expected over the 3 to 5 minutes between data usage readings. For information on how to set an alert, see

Events Reporting Configuration on page 207.

Current Daily Usage

(MB)

Displays the current daily data usage (in MBs). For example, if the daily limit is 60, the current daily usage should not exceed 60. The usage limit is 90%. You cannot access the cellular world if you exceed the limit. You can, however, Telnet, OTA, etc.

Monthly Limit

Monthly Limit Units

Monthly Limit

Select an MB (default) or GB unit for monthly data usage.

This is the user-specified monthly data usage limit. Data usage accumulates on a monthly basis and on the date you specified (the

“rolling month”). Data usage will accumulate during the month until the end of the next billing period at which point the data usage totals will be reset.

Note: The Monthly Limit value MUST be expressed as an integer (i.e., a whole number) and NOT as a fraction (e.g., “3.5”)

Caution:

Data usage limits are approximate and based on reporting conditions in ALEOS. Data usage may run over the amount set in this field before ALEOS takes the specified action.

Current Monthly

Usage (MB)

Start of Billing Cycle

(Day of Month)

Displays the current monthly data usage

Enter the desired start of the billing cycle. For example, 3 (Day 3 of every month)

245

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field Description

Previous Day

Previous Daily Usage

(MB)

Shows the data usage for the previous day (in MB)

2.

Select the Events Reporting tab and configure a data usage threshold. The threshold is specified as a percentage value of the monthly or daily limit. For example, if you have specified 5 GB as the monthly limit, and the threshold is set at 80%, then the threshold is reached when 4 GB of data usage is reached.

Figure 12-2: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Events

3.

Select the Actions group under Events Reporting tab, and specify an action to be performed when the Event is triggered.

246

Figure 12-3: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Actions

4.

Select the Events group page again to associate the Data Usage Action with the Data Usage Event.

4114514

Application Configuration

Figure 12-4: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Events

Note: Daily and monthly limits will reset at the end of the billing cycle.

Once the data plan limit is reached, you may want to turn off cellular communication with any user devices connected to the host port until the next billing cycle starts.

To configure the device to turn off services, another event and action must be configured.

If you decide to disable the events and actions associated with the Data Usage feature, then the Data Usage Events must be deleted.

To turn off services on the data plan when the limit is reached:

1.

Configure an event and an action. The event (shown below) is triggered when

100% of the monthly plan limit is reached.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 12-5: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Events >Turn off Service

2.

Create an action to turn off the services. When triggered, this action will prevent cellular communication to any user device connected to a host port.

247

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 12-6: ACEmanager: Events Reporting > Actions > Add New

Garmin

Garmin provides navigation devices for versatile fleet monitoring solutions. AirLink devices provide Internet access to Garmin devices and a mechanism to enable via cellular. ALEOS also monitors links to the Garmin device and communication between the Garmin device and the server.

To configure Garmin in ACEmanager:

1.

Under the Applications > Garmin tab, set the Garmin Device Attached feature to Enabled.

Figure 12-7: ACEmanager: Applications > Garmin

2.

Set the Host Mode to TCP. Under the Serial > Port Configuration tab, set the

Startup Mode Default parameter to TCP.

248 4114514

Application Configuration

Figure 12-8: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration

3.

Set the Server Address and Port for TCP. Under the Serial > Port

Configuration tab, set the Destination Port and the Destination Address to the port and address of the AVL server that the TCP application will be communicating with.

Figure 12-9: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration

4.

Configure the serial port. To communicate with Garmin:

·

Input

9600, 8N1

in Configure Serial Port

·

Select

None

in Flow Control

·

Select

Ignore DTR

in DTR Mode.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 12-10: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration parameters

5.

Check the Garmin’s communications status under the Status > Applications tab. Garmin data service states are:

·

Not Enabled — Not acknowledged by the AVL server

249

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

·

Enabled — Acknowledged by the AVL server.

250

Figure 12-11: ACEmanager: Status > Applications > Garmin Status

6.

Reboot the AirLink device to apply the changes. The “Garmin Status” now appears:

·

Enabled — Acknowledged by the AVL server.

Note: The Garmin Status field appears only if the Garmin application is Connected.

ALEOS Application Framework

ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS AF) allows you to develop your own applications to run inside an AirLink device and leverage the AirVantage M2M

Cloud Platform ( www.sierrawireless.com/AirVantage ) or a customer-developed server platform. Embedded and server application developers can start using

ALEOS AF by accessing the Sierra Wireless Developer Zone

( http://developer.sierrawireless.com/ALEOS_AF ).

You may want to reserve the serial port for an ALEOS AF application. To do so, select Enable in Applications > ALEOS Application Framework > Serial Port

Reserved.

It is not necessary to reserve the serial port before activating ALEOS AF.

Reserving the serial port is mandatory only if the ALEOS AF application will be using the serial port.

Note: When you reserve the serial port for ALEOS AF, it cannot be used for any other serial-related ALEOS features.

4114514

Application Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 12-12: ACEmanager: Applications > ALEOS Application Framework

Field

General

Description

ALEOS Application

Framework

Serial Port Reserved

Select Enable to reserve the serial port for ALEOS AF. When this field is set to Enable, the serial port cannot be used for any other serialrelated ALEOS features. The options are:

Disable (default)

Enable

QCOM DM Port

Resource Reserve

Enable or disable (default) the ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS

AF). If enabled, ALEOS AF starts at boot time. When the Reset to

Factory default button on the Admin > Advanced page is pressed,

ALEOS AF is disabled.

Reserves the QCOM DM port for ALEOS AF applications. Options are:

Enable (Reserve access for ALEOS AF) or Disable (Reserve access for ALEOS). Default: Disable

Advanced

M3DA provisioning key

AAF now includes the M3DA provisioning key field. This field only appears if ALEOS AF is enabled.

M3DA is the communication protocol used by AAF to send/receive data from AVMS.

The M3DA provisioning key field contains the current M3DA provisioning key. Upon modification the M3DA keys are re-generated.

251

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

252 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

13: I/O Configuration

The I/O tab in ACEmanager is applicable across all Sierra Wireless

AirLink devices that feature I/O ports.

You can use the input/outputs on AirLink devices to generate reports based on a threshold being crossed, a switch being open or closed, or the number of times a switch has changed its state.

Use the Events Reporting screen to configure reports. (See Events

Reporting Configuration on page 207.) Use the I/O screen to view the

current state of the analog and digital inputs, to turn the relays on and off, and to configure the units you want used in the reports based on analog inputs.

Analog inputs

Analog inputs monitor a voltage range in small increments. This allows you to monitor equipment that reports status as an analog voltage. Examples include:

Power supply voltage

Temperature, weight, volume, flow represented as voltage

An incremental gauge with a voltage output

Vehicle battery voltage

Using Event Reporting, you can create event thresholds, which when crossed (either higher or lower) generate a report to a defined external system. See

Events Reporting Configuration on page 207.

The raw data for the changes being monitored is in volts, but you can use the I/O Configuration screen in ACEmanager to convert voltage to the desired units of measurement.

Digital inputs

Digital inputs monitor contact closures on a switch. This allows you to monitor changes such as:

When a door or latch is open or closed

When a container is full or empty

When a switch or valve is open or closed

The level of fuel in a vehicle (connected to an on/off sensor)

When the trunk of a vehicle is opened or closed

13

253

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

You can use Events Reporting to generate reports and actions based on the digital input values.

Volts

-0.5 –1.2

2.2 – 30

Digital 0

Digital 1

Interpreted as

Relay outputs

You can use relay outputs to trigger an intermediary switch and change the state of equipment.

AirLink GX Series device

The AirLink GX Series device without the I/O X-Card installed:

Has one digital input or one relay output (configurable)

Does not support analog input

The AirLink GX Series device with the I/O X-Card installed has:

Five digital inputs or five relay outputs (configurable)

Four analog inputs

Note: The fields for configuring the additional digital inputs/relay outputs are only available if you have an AirLink GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed.

LS300

The LS300 has one pin that can be used as a digital input, relay output, or analog input.

More information

For more information on the basic features of the I/O settings for your AirLink device, refer to the applicable AirLink device user guide.

For more information on setting up reports, see Events Reporting Configuration on page 207.

Note: Changes to the relay outputs go into effect immediately. No reboot of the AirLink device is necessary. A reboot is required after configuring the transformed analog values.

(See Transformed Analog on page 258.)

254 4114514

I/O Configuration

Current State

The Current State screen allows you to view the current values (as of the last refresh) of analog and digital inputs, pulse counts for digital inputs, and raw and transformed values for analog inputs. You can also use this screen to change the current values for Relay outputs. This change occurs immediately without a reboot.

Figure 13-1: ACEmanager: I/0 > Current State (GX Series device with I/O X-Card)

Table 13-1: I/O: Current State

Command Description

Digital Input # value

Query individual digital inputs. The digital inputs report either a 0 (open) or 1 (closed).

n= digital Input number

Note: Five digital inputs are available on an the AirLink GX Series device with an I/O

X-Card. Otherwise, there is one digital input value.

You can also use an AT command to read these values. See *DIGITALIN[n]?

on page 372.

Rev 1 Oct.13

255

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 13-1: I/O: Current State

Command Description

Pulse Count #

The pulse count increments when the input value changes from high to low.

Note: Five pulse counts are available on an AirLink GX Series device with an I/O X-

Card. Otherwise, there is one pulse count.

Analog Input # (Volts)

Transformed Analog #

Relay Output #

Note: To reset the pulse count to zero, reset the device to the factory defaults.

Shows the current state of individual analog inputs

The analog inputs report the voltage in volts. Range is 0–30 volts.

You can also use an AT command to read these values. See *ANALOGIN[n]?

on page 371.

Shows the individual analog inputs in the units configured on the I/O Configuration screen

Configure Relay Output signal. Options are:

OFF (default) The circuit is open.

Drive Action Low—equivalent to ON. The circuit is closed.

Note: Five relay outputs are available on an AirLink GX Series device with an I/O

X-Card installed. Otherwise, there is one relay output.

Note: If the same pin can be used for input or output, be aware that changing the output setting could change the input values. For pinout information for your AirLink device, refer to the applicable AirLink product user guide.

You can also use an AT command (see *RELAYOUT[#] on page 372), an SMS

command (see [prefix]relay x y on page 378), or a RAP command (refer to the Remote

Application Protocol User Guide) to configure this field.

Pulse Count

Pulse Count details:

Pulses are counted on falling edge (high to low).

Repeated pulses cannot be counted when the device is powered off, or being reset. However, a single change in state while the device is powered off or being reset is counted properly.

To reset the pulse count to zero, reset the device to the factory defaults.

256 4114514

I/O Configuration

Configuration

This screen allows you to configure the initial relay settings and to transform units of measurement for the analog inputs from volts to a more appropriate unit, if applicable. Generated reports use the transformed value configured on this screen.

Refer to the user guide for your AirLink products for pinout information.

Figure 13-2: ACEmanager: I/O > Configuration

Field

Relay # Initial Setting

Coefficient for

Analog #

Description

The initial relay value when the AirLink device is powered on

Options are:

ON

OFF (default)

Last Value (The value remains the same as it was before the AirLink device was powered down).

When you change this field, the corresponding digital input value on this screen reflects the change after a screen refresh.

This value may be found in the user guide for the equipment you want to monitor, or you can calculate it from information in the user guide. If this information is not available in the documentation that came with the equipment you want to monitor, contact the manufacturer.

For an example of how to calculate the coefficient, see Transformed Analog on page 258.

Rev 1 Oct.13

257

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Field

Offset for Analog #

Units for Analog #

Description

The offset (difference) between 0 volts and the equivalent value for the desired unit of measurement

The unit of measurement used in event reporting for the parameter being monitored by the analog input

For example: degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, liters, mm, etc.

Transformed Analog

The raw analog data is displayed in volts. However, that is not always the most convenient unit of measurement to view the data. The I/O Configuration screen enables you to transform the voltage readings to a more convenient unit of measurement, for example degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit for temperature, liters for volume, etc.

Step 1—Coefficient and Offset

Before you configure ACEmanager, you need to locate or calculate the coefficient and the offset values.

Consult the user documentation for the equipment you want to monitor. It should provide you with the coefficient to convert volts to the appropriate unit of measurement and the offset value (the difference between the equivalent value for 0 volts and 0), or provide information on equivalent values for voltage readings from which you can calculate the coefficient and offset. (If this information is not available in the user documentation, contact the manufacturer.)

For example, if the equipment monitors temperature, and has a scale from 0 volts to 30 volts, the equipment specifications should provide information similar to the following:

0 V is equivalent to - 20°C

30 V is equivalent to 100°C

This is expressed algebraically as follows:

a

0

V

+

b

= – 20

C a

30

V

+

b

= 100

C

where: a = coefficient b = offset

For this example, you can calculate a as follows:

a

30

V

+

b

a

0

V

+

b

=

100

C

20

a

30

V

= 120

V a

= 4

258 4114514

I/O Configuration

To calculate b, substitute a into the first equation above:

4

0

V

+

b

= – 20

b

= – 20

Step 2—Configure ACEmanager

For each of the analog inputs you want to configure:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to I/O > Configuration.

2.

Enter the values for the coefficient and offset. (In this example, the coefficient is 4 and the offset is -20.)

3.

Enter the desired unit of measurement. (In this example, the unit of measurement is C, for degrees Celsius).

ACEmanager shows the value of the transformed analog input as temperature in

C.

Rev 1 Oct.13

259

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

260 4114514

14: Admin

Change Password

For system security reasons, changing the default password of the

AirLink device is highly recommended.

14

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 14-1: ACEmanager: Admin

To change the default password:

1.

Select the User Name associated with the password you want to change: user, viewer, or sconsole.

2.

Enter the old password.

3.

Enter the new password twice.

The password can be 4 to 32 characters long and can contain a mixture of letters, numbers, and/or special characters. The password is case sensitive.

4.

Click Change Password.

You will be prompted to restart the AirLink Device. When the device has restarted, reconnect to ACEmanager and enter the new password.

Note: There are two user levels in the User Name drop-down menu. The

‘user’ has full administrator rights and can edit the configuration; the ‘viewer’ can only view the configuration and status of the device. Viewer can change the ‘viewer’ password. User can change both.

Advanced

Features which should be rarely changed and will affect the operation of the device are present on the Advanced screen.

261

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure 14-2: ACEmanager: Admin > Advanced

Field Description

Date and Time

Queries the internal clock. The date and time are always specified in 24-hour notation

(UTC).

mm/dd/yyyy= date in month/day/year notation

hh:mm:ss= time in 24-hour notation

Enable Over-the-Air

Programming

Enables/disables over-the-air ALEOS software upgrading of the AirLink device. When

Sierra Wireless releases a new version of ALEOS, you can upgrade your remote devices with Over-the-Air Programming (OPRG) enabled.

Enable (default)

Disable

Default Configuration

Reset

Enables or disables the hardware reset button

Sets the AirLink device to allow (or not allow) the hardware reset button to reset the device to the factory default settings.

Allowed—Pressing the hardware reset button for 10 seconds reboots the device and resets it to the factory defaults.

Not Allowed—Pressing the hardware reset button for 10 seconds reboots the device, but does not reset it to the factory defaults.

Note: Regardless of the setting selected in this field, you can still reset the device by clicking the “Reset to Factory Defaults” button in ACEmanager.

Status Update

Address

Enter the device Name/Port. Name is the domain name or IP address, and Port is the port of the device where the device status updates will be sent. This report can be sent to a LAN connected host (e.g., 192.168.13.100/1122) or a remote location

(e.g., newb.eairlink.com/17000). The status parameters are sent in an XML format.

262 4114514

Admin

Field

Power Input Voltage

(volts)

Board Temperature

(celsius)

Description

Status Update Period

(seconds)

The time interval (in seconds) when a status update should be sent

Displays the power input voltage in volts. If the input voltage ground is connected to the

AirLink device case (without serial connection), this value reads .3 V (approx.) less; if ground is connected (with serial connection), the value reads .3 V (approx.) more.

Displays the board temperature in degrees (Celsius)

Radio Module Internal

Temperature (celsius)

Displays the temperature of the internal radio module in degrees (Celsius).

Number of System

Resets

Counter of the number of system resets over the life of the device or since the configuration was reset

Periodic Reset Timer

(hours)

ToD Reset: Reset

Interval in (days)

Resets the device after the specified number of hours. 0 = disabled

Number of days between resets

0 = Disabled

Example: If this field is set to 3, the device resets every third day.

ToD Reset: Time Zone

Offset from UTC

Time zone adjustment (Offset in easterly direction from UTC Time)

Possible values are 0–23

Example: Pacific Standard Time would be 17

ToD Reset: Hour of day when Reset occurs

The local hour of the day when the reset occurs

Possible values are 0–23

Example: 4 is 4:00 am

Ping

Use this button to confirm that a connected device is responding.

1.

Click Ping.

2.

In the pop-up window, enter the device IP address or DNS name and click Ping Now.

Reset to Factory

Default

Rev 1 Oct.13

Erases all customer-defined settings and resets all settings (passwords, LAN and WAN configuration, security settings, ALEOS Applications Framework, etc.) to the original factory settings. ALEOS AF is also reset to disabled.

Radio Passthru

Radio Passthru allows a direct connection, using USB, to the internal radio.

Normal cellular radio operation is suspended while Radio Passthru is enabled.

Radio Passthru is generally used only in certain troubleshooting scenarios.

263

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

The hardware bypass will remain in effect until the ALEOS software resets either via ACEmanager command or the hardware Reset button.

Note: Because Radio Passthru is not USB/net or USB/serial, a different set of drivers are required to connect to the radio installed inside an AirLink device. Additionally, while it is possible to send AT commands to the radio using a terminal connection, there are software applications designed to communicate with the radio directly. If you need to use Radio

Passthru, contact your Sierra Wireless AirLink representative to obtain the needed drivers and/or software application.

Figure 14-3: ACEmanager: Admin > Radio Passthru

Log

The Log file is a system log of the AirLink device.

The Logging configuration screen enables you to configure log verbosity and display filtering. The View Log screen enables you to view and save logs. The logs are in plain text.

To configure what you want to include in the logs:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Admin > Log.

264 4114514

Admin

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure 14-4: ACEmanager: Admin > Log, Configure Logging

2.

For each subsystem listed:

a.

Select whether or not to display it in the log.

Separate filters, based on subsystem and severity, are applied when the messages are generated and when the messages are displayed. Four severity levels are supported for filtering in the drop-down lists for verbosity:

·

Critical

·

Error

·

Info (information)

·

Debug

Note: The VPN Sub System only allows for Info and Debug. For maximum information, set the VPN verbosity to Debug.

b.

Select the verbosity level.

Note: Some log messages are only displayed if you display Linux Syslog. For example, If you are debugging a VPN or LAN setup, the relevant information is only displayed in the

Linux Syslog.

3.

Optional: To display Linux Syslog:

a.

Ensure that Display (default value) is selected the drop-down menu beside Linux Syslog.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

If you have changed any of the verbosity levels or the Linux syslog setting:

a.

Reboot the AirLink device.

265

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

b.

Log into ACEmanager, go to Admin > Log.

6.

Select View Logs from the menu on the left side of the window.

266

Figure 14-5: ACEmanager: Admin > Log, View Log

Note: VPN info and debug information uses the term racoon (rather than VPN), as shown

in Figure 14-5

.

Note: If you toggle the “Display in Log?” field, clear and refresh the View Log page. (You do not need to reboot the device.)

Tip:

Use View Log for troubleshooting purposes (e.g., when setting up the IPsec configuration). The Log page allows you to establish the tunnel connection and monitor the results directly. To change the intervals at which the log is displayed, you can change the settings in Auto Refresh.

Actions on the View Log screen include:

Auto Refresh — The drop-down menu allows you to set up an automatic log page refresh, and the interval between refreshes: 30 secs, 1 minute, or

2 minutes.

Refresh button — Initiates a manual page refresh

Clear button — Clears out the tunnels

Save button — Creates a text file of the log

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

A: Windows Dial-up Networking (DUN)

Dial-up Networking (DUN) allows a computer or other device to use the serial port on your AirLink device to connect to the Internet or private network using PPP just like an analog device using a standard phone line.

A

Note: Dial-up Networking is not available for the AirLink LS300.

Caution:

To install any driver on your computer, you may need to be logged in as Administrator or have Administrator privileges for your login.

Microsoft Windows 7 is used in the examples below. The device driver installation and DUN setup and configuration is similar in other

Microsoft Windows operating systems, including Windows XP and

Windows CE.

Note: If your device is new, or has recently been reset to factory default settings, ensure that the device has been on air at least once before being used with a DUN connection.

Installing a Device Driver

Connect the AirLink device

1.

Connect the device to the computer with a DB-9 cable from one

RS-232 port to the other.

2.

Log in to ACEmanager.

3.

Go to Serial > Port Configuration.

4.

Set the DB9 Serial Echo field to Disable.

5.

Reboot.

Note: You need to set the DB9 Serial Echo field echo to Disable any time you want to set up a PPP connection.

267

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Install the driver

1.

Select Start > Control Panel > Phone and Modem Options.

Figure A-1: Phone and Modem Options

2.

Select the Modems tab.

268

Figure A-2: Phone and Modem Options: devices

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

3.

Click Add.

Figure A-3: Add Hardware Wizard

4.

Select Don’t detect my modem; I will select it from a list.

5.

Click Next.

269

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

270

Figure A-4: Add Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem

6.

Under Manufacturer, select (Standard Modem Types).

7.

Under Models, select Standard 33600 bps Modem.

Tip:

If you have the speed for your device configured as something other than the default, use the Standard device that matches the speed you configured.

8.

Click Next.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-5: Add Hardware Wizard: Select Ports

9.

Select Selected Ports.

10.

Select the COM port the device is connected to (commonly COM1).

11.

Click Next.

271

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure A-6: Add Hardware Wizard: Finish

12.

Once the device driver is installed, click Finish.

When you return to the Phone and Modem Options window, you should see the newly installed device “attached to” the correct COM port.

272

Figure A-7: Phone and Modem Options > Modems

13.

Highlight the modem, and click Properties. The following window appears:

4114514

Figure A-8: Modem Properties

14.

Select the Modem tab.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-9: Modem Properties > Modem

15.

Confirm that the Maximum Port Speed is set to 115200 (default).

273

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

16.

Click OK to exit.

17.

Click OK again to exit out of the Phone and Modem Options.

18.

Go to Start > Control Panel > Device Manager.

274

Figure A-10: Device Manager

19.

Under Modems, highlight Standard 33600 bps Modem. Right-click and select

Update Driver Software....

4114514

Figure A-11: Update Driver Software—Browse

20.

Select Browse my computer for driver software.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-12: Update Driver Software—Let me pick...

275

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

21.

Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer.

Figure A-13: Update Driver Software—Select Standard Modem

22.

Deselect Show compatible hardware.

23.

Under Manufacturer, select (Standard Modem Types).

24.

Under Models, select Standard Modem.

25.

Click Next.

If you see an Update Driver Warning, click Yes.

276

Figure A-14: Update Driver Software—Warning

The software driver updates and the following window appears:

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-15: Update Driver Software—Success

26.

Click Close.

Creating a Dial-Up Networking (PPP)

Connection

Once you have the driver for the modem installed on your computer, you can set up and configure Dial Up Networking (DUN) to use the modem as your connection to the Internet using PPP.

Note: No other device or program can use the COM port (serial port) configured for the modem driver while the DUN session is active.

Caution:

If you have an existing LAN connection, installing DUN for the modem may interfere with the LAN connection. We recommend disconnecting your LAN connection before using a PPP connection with your AirLink device.

Once you have configured the DUN connection on your computer:

The DUN connection may be set as the default connection for all network and

Internet communication.

The computer may be configured to dial the DUN connection when it cannot detect any network connection.

For instructions on changing these options, see Connection settings on page 285.

277

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

If you are using a DUN connection with any other network connection (such as

Ethernet or Wi-Fi), you may need to use the route command in Windows to set up a static route through the device to access the location remotely over the PPP link and the cellular network. This guide does not provide information on the route command. Consult your network administrator for information on properly configuring routing.

Create a new network connection.

1.

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.

278

Figure A-16: Network and Sharing Center Window

2.

Select Set up a new connection or network.

4114514

Figure A-17: Set up a Connection or Network

3.

Select Set up a dial-up connection.

4.

Click Next.

If you are asked which modem you want to use, select Standard 33600.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-18: Create a Dial up Connection

279

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

5.

In the Dial-up phone number field, type “#777”.

6.

Ignore the User name and Password fields.

7.

In the Connection name field, type “ALEOS Dial-up Connection” or other desired name.

8.

Click Connect.

Alternatively, to connect to the ALEOS Dial-up network:

a.

Click the network connection icon

1

in the system tray.

b.

Select ALEOS Dial-up Connection.

c.

Click Connect.

Configure the DUN connection

After you complete the New Connection Wizard:

1.

Click the network connection icon, select ALEOS Dial-up Connection, and click Connect.

280

Figure A-19: DUN Connection

2.

If you have a user name and password configured in ACEmanager for PPP connections, enter them in the User name and Password fields. Otherwise, leave these fields blank.

3.

Click Properties.

1. The appearance of the connection icon varies depending on the type of connections available. For example, It may appear as

4114514

Figure A-20: DUN Properties

4.

Confirm that the check box beside Use dialing rules is not selected.

5.

Click Configure... (below the Connect using box).

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-21: Modem Configuration

6.

Confirm that the Maximum speed (bps) is set to 115200.

7.

Confirm that Enable hardware flow control is selected. Do not select any other options.

8.

Click OK.

281

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

9.

In the main properties window, select the Options tab.

282

Figure A-22: Networking

10.

Click PPP Settings.

Figure A-23: PPP Settings

11.

Clear the check boxes beside all three PPP settings.

12.

Click OK.

13.

Select the Networking tab.

4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-24: DUN Connection > Networking tab

14.

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.

Tip:

For most configurations, getting the IP address and the DNS server address are automatic.

283

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Figure A-25: TCP/IP Properties

15.

Click Advanced.

284

Figure A-26: Advanced TCP/IP

4114514

16.

Select Use default gateway on remote network.

17.

Click OK.

Tip:

You may want to check the Options tab and change the settings for applications you use. The default options are generally applicable for most uses.

Caution:

Unless specifically directed to do so by Support or your network administrator, you do not need to make any changes to the options on the Security tab.

18.

Click OK until you return to the Connect window.

19.

Log in to ACEmanager and go to Serial > Port Configuration.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Figure A-27: ACEmanager: Serial > Port Configuration

20.

Under Port Configuration:

a.

Set the Flow Control field to Hardware.

b.

Set the DB9 Serial Echo field to Disable.

21.

Click Apply and reboot the device.

Connection settings

1.

To set the default connection:

2.

Go to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.

3.

Select Change adapter settings.

285

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

4.

Right-click the icon for the DUN connection.

If you want this to be your default connection, select Set as Default Connection.

If it is already the default connection and you do not want it as your default connection, select Cancel as Default Connection.

If you do not want the DUN connection to be dialed when there is no other connection:

1.

Go to Start > Control Panel > Internet Options.

2.

Select the Connections tab.

3.

Highlight the DUN connection and select Never dial a connection.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click OK.

Connecting to the Internet Using DUN

There are two methods you can use to connect the AirLink device to the Internet using DUN: ACEview, and the Windows DUN direct connection.

ACEview

ACEview is a utility which can maintain your DUN connection and monitor the connection of your AirLink device to the provider. If you have not already installed

ACEview, obtain the most recent version from the Sierra Wireless AirLink website.

This guide assumes you have a default installation of ACEview.

1.

Start ACEview.

Go to Start > All Programs > Sierra Wireless > ACEview

2.

Right-click the ACEview window to open the menu.

Figure A-28: ACEview: Menu

3.

Select Settings.

286 4114514

Figure A-29: ACEview: Connection Settings

4.

Select Auto Start in the DUN section.

5.

Select Maintain Persistent Connection.

When selected, ACEview continually checks the DUN connection to ensure it is not down. If the connection is down, ACEview attempts to reconnect.

Tip:

When using the DUN connection, make sure the IP Address is set to the local IP address of the modem, i.e., 192.168.13.31 (by default).

6.

Click OK.

Windows DUN

You can directly use the Dial-up link for the DUN connection.

To start the DUN session:

1.

Click the network connection icon ( ), select ALEOS Dial-up Connection, and click Connect.

When you are connected, an icon should appear in the system tray showing the connection status.

Note: The speed shown in the connection is the speed between the modem and your computer. It is not the speed of the modem’s connection to the provider or the Internet.

Caution:

For DUN connections on a Windows Mobility or other non-personal computer, the DNS settings may not be configured with the DUN connection. Go into the network settings and add DNS servers manually.

Rev 1 Oct.13

287

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

288 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

B: Modbus/BSAP Configuration

The AirLink device supports Modbus ASCII, Modbus RTU, and BSAP, and can also emulate other protocols (like DF1) using the Modbus

Variable feature.

B

Modbus Overview

The Modbus Protocol provides for client-server (i.e., master-slave) communications between intelligent devices. As a de facto standard, it is the most widely used network protocol in the industrial manufacturing environment to transfer discrete/analog I/O and register data between control devices. Modbus, BSAP, and other

Modbus variations are often used in conjunction with telemetry devices.

Tip:

This section is just a brief overview of Modbus. For more information, refer to your Modbus equipment distributor or manufacturer or www.modbus.org

.

Telemetry

Telemetry is an automated communications process by which data is collected from instruments located at remote or inaccessible points and transmitted to receiving equipment for measurement, monitoring, display, and recording. Transmission of the information may be over physical pairs of wires, telecommunication circuits, radios, or satellites.

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)

Modbus was originally designed to be used in a radio environment where packets were broadcast from a central station (i.e., master or host) to a group of remote units. Each remote unit, or Remote

Terminal Unit (RTU), has a hexadecimal identification number (ID).

The first part of the broadcast packet contains an RTU ID which corresponds to the ID of one of the remote units. The Modbus host looks for the ID and only sends to the unit with the matching ID; the

RTU then replies back to the central station.

The RTU connects to such physical equipment as switches, pumps, and other devices, and monitors and controls these devices. The

RTU can be part of a network set up for Supervisory Control and

Data Acquisition.

289

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) describes solutions across a large variety of industries and is used in industrial and engineering applications to monitor and control distributed systems from a master location. SCADA encompasses multiple RTUs, a central control room with a host computer (or network), and some sort of communication infrastructure.

SCADA allows for “supervisory” control of remote devices as well as acquiring data from the remote locations. Programmable Logic Controllers allow for a higher degree of automated SCADA.

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

A Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a small industrial computer which generally monitors several connected sensor inputs and controls attached devices (motor starters, solenoids, pilot lights/displays, speed drives, valves, etc.) according to a user-created program stored in its memory. Containing inputs and outputs similar to an RTU, PLCs are frequently used for typical relay control, sophisticated motion control, process control, Distributed Control System and complex networking.

Modbus TCP/IP

Modbus TCP/IP simply takes the Modbus instruction set and wraps TCP/IP around it. Since TCP/IP is the communications standard for the Internet and most networked computers, this provides a simpler installation. Modbus TCP/IP uses standard Ethernet equipment.

Modbus on UDP

When Sierra Wireless AirLink devices are used in place of radios, a AirLink device is connected to the central station (host) and an AirLink device is connected to each remote unit. When the AirLink device is configured for Modbus with UDP, the

AirLink device connected to the host can store a list of IP addresses or names with matching IDs. When the host at the central station sends serial data as a poll request, the AirLink device at the host matches the RTU ID to a corresponding IP of a AirLink device at a remote unit. A UDP packet is assembled encapsulating the RTU ID and serial data transmitted from the host. The UDP packet is then transmitted to the specific AirLink device at the remote unit matching the RTU ID.

The remote AirLink device then disassembles the packet before transmitting the

RTU ID and serial data to the remote unit. The remote units operate in normal

UDP mode and their data is sent to the host via the remote AirLink device and host AirLink device.

290 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Configuring the AirLink Device at the Polling

Host for Modbus on UDP

This section covers a Polling Host with standard Modbus, variations may need additional AT commands.

1. Configure the ports.

The destination port for the device at the host needs to match the device port

(*DPORT) in use on all the modems at the remote sites. For example, if the remote device’s device port (*DPORT) is “12345”, then the Modbus host device's

S53

destination port should be set to “12345”.

Take note of (or set) the Device Port setting in *DPORT to configure the destination port on the remote modems.

In ACEmanager, select

UDP

in the side menu. Select the appropriate

MD

mode from the drop down menu.

• MD13

: Modbus ASCII

• MD23

: Modbus RTU (Binary)

• MD33

: BSAP

• MD63

: Variable Modbus — individual parameters are set up manually.

If you do not have a static IP, the host device should be configured to report its current IP to a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) server with Dynamic DNS.

In the Host device’s configuration, instead of an IP address for the Addr List

(ATMLIST or ATMLISTX), substitute a single unique name for each device, i.e. remote1, remote2, etc.

When you configure Dynamic DNS for the host device, make note of your device name and domain setting in ACEmanager in the menu selection

Dynamic IP

to be used with the remote modems.

With names instead of IP addresses for the Address List, the host device queries the DNS server for the current IP address assigned to the specific name of a remote device to send a message corresponding to the ID.

When you use names instead of IP addresses, to ensure your modems are updated quickly with the correct IP addresses for the names, set the DNS settings as well. In ACEmanager, select

DNS

.

Configure *DNSUSER to the same IP address as the Dynamic DNS

(*IPMANAGER1). If your modems have dynamic IP addresses and not static

(the IP address can change when it is powered up), configure *DNSUPDATE to a low interval to allow frequent updates.

291

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Configuring the Remote AirLink Devices for

Modbus with UDP

Note: With a name instead of IPs for the host device, the remote devices query the DNS server for the current IP assigned to the host device before sending data back to the host.

This section covers standard Modbus settings for the AirLink device at the remote unit; variations may need additional commands.

1.

Configure the ports

In ACEmanager, select Port Configuration in the side menu.

The destination port for the device at the host needs to match the device port in use on all the devices at the remote sites. For example, if the remote device’s device port (see below) is “12345”, then the Modbus host device’s

S53

destination port should be set to “12345”.

Set the destination port (S53) to match the device port of the host device

(*DPORT). Make sure the device port of the remote device (*DPORT) matches the destination port of the host device (S53).

Configure IP Addresses for the Host

If the Host device has a static IP address, enter it in the Destination Address for

S53.

If the device at the host has a dynamic IP and is using Dynamic DNS, instead of an IP address for S53, specify the name of the host device (**). If the remote devices are using a different DDNS than the host device, you need to specify the fully qualified domain name (**+*DOMAIN).

Note: Setting the Host device IP address as the S53 Destination Address provides a low level security. The device does not forward UDP traffic unless the source IP/port matches what is in S53. However, if you set *AIP=1, the device forwards UDP traffic from any source IP address as long as it is accessing the device on the configured *DPORT.

1.

Configure the default mode for start-up.

Each device at the remote locations needs to be configured to communicate with the device at the host. In ACEmanager, select

UDP

in the side menu.

a.

Enable

S82

, UDP auto answer.

b.

Set

S83

to the idle time-out applicable to your application, commonly 20.

2.

Configure other RTU settings.

Other parameters may need to be changed, but this is dependent on the RTU type being used. At a minimum, this typically involves setting the proper serial settings to match your RTU.

3.

Optional: Dynamic IP Address

If you do not have a static IP, the host device should be configured to report its current IP to a Dynamic DNS (DDNS) server with Dynamic DNS.

Match the name of the device to the names specified in the host device’s MLIST or MLISTX for the connected RTU.

292 4114514

When you configure Dynamic DNS for the host device, note your device name and domain setting in ACEmanager in the menu selection

Dynamic IP

to be used with the remote devices.

When you use names instead of IP addresses, to ensure your devices are updated quickly with the correct IP addresses for the names, set the DNS settings as well.

Configure *DNSUSER to the same IP address as the Dynamic DNS

(*IPMANAGER1). If your devices have dynamic IP addresses and not static (the

IP address can change when it is powered up), configure *DNSUPDATE to a low interval to allow frequent updates.

Rev 1 Oct.13

293

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

294 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

C: SNMP: Simple Network Management

Protocol

Management Information Base

(MIB)

ALEOS includes a Management Information Base (MIB) that contains information specific to the AirLink device. Reports based on this database are sent in a form designed to be parsed by the NMS.

The data is hierarchical with entries addressed through object identifiers.

The MIB complies with:

RFC 1213 and MIB-II

RFC 2665 — Ethernet-Like Interface Types

RFC 2863 — The Interfaces Group MIB

C

SNMP Traps

SNMP traps are alerts that can be sent from the managed device to the Network Management System when an event happens. Your

AirLink device is capable of sending traps when the network connection becomes available.

To send SNMP traps:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > Management (SNMP).

2.

Configure the fields under Trap Server User. (For more information, see

Management (SNMP) on page 177.)

3.

Go to Events Reporting > Actions.

4.

In the Action Type field select SNMP trap. (For more information,

see Action Type on page 213.)

5.

Go Events Reporting > Events and configure monitoring for the event type that will trigger the SNMP trap. For example, the event type could be RSSI, thresholds, network state, hardware temperature, etc.

Sierra Wireless MIB

This section show the contents of the Sierra Wireless MIB file. When this file is loaded onto a remote SNMP client, you can query the

Sierra Wireless specific objects listed in this file.

For a text copy of this MIB file, go to www.sierrawireless.com/en/

Support/Downloads.aspx

, and select your AirLink device.

295

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SIERRA-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN

IMPORTS

OBJECT-TYPE, NOTIFICATION-TYPE, MODULE-IDENTITY, IpAddress,

Integer32, Opaque, enterprises, Counter32, Unsigned32

FROM SNMPv2-SMI

TEXTUAL-CONVENTION, DisplayString, TruthValue

FROM SNMPv2-TC; sierrawireless MODULE-IDENTITY

LAST-UPDATED "201202290000Z"

ORGANIZATION "Sierra Wireless Inc"

CONTACT-INFO

"Sierra Wirelss Inc

"

DESCRIPTION

""

REVISION "201202290000Z"

DESCRIPTION

"This file defines the private Sierra MIB extensions."

::= { enterprises 20542 } sharks OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sierrawireless 9}

-- MIB versions mibversion1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { sharks 1}

-- GUI Tabs for Sharks statustab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 1} cellulartab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 2} lantab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 3} vpntab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 4} securitytab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 5} servicestab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 6} gpstab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 7} eventsreportingtab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 8} serialtab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 9} iotab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 10} admintab OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 11} snmpconfig OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 12}

-- status elements home OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 1} cellular OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 2} lan OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 3}

296 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

vpn OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 4} security OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 5} services OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 6} gps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 7} serial OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 8} about OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { statustab 9}

-- home status elements phoneNumber OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (10))

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 17 } ipAddress OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX IpAddress

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 301 } networkState OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 259 } rssi OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER(-125..-50)

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 261 } gprsnetworkOperator OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 770 } cdmanetworkOperator OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 644 }

297

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

gprsECIO OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 772 } cdmaECIO OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 643 } powerIn OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 266 } boardTemprature OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 267 } networkServiceType OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 264} aleosSWVer OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 4 } netChannel OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 260 } cellularBytesSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

298 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 283 } cellularBytesRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 284 } deviceName OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { home 1154 }

-- cellular status elements wanIP OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX IpAddress

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 301 } electronicID OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 10 } iccid OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 771 } cellid OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 773 } lac OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

299

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 774 } imsi OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 785 } keepAliveIpAddress OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX IpAddress

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 1105 } keepAlivePingTime OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 1104 } dnsServer1 OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 1082 } dnsServer2 OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 1083 } cellBand OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 2056 } apn OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 2151 }

300 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

wanUseTime OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 5046 } rscp OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 10249 } errorRate OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 263 } bytesSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 283 } bytesRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 284 } packetsSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 281 } packetsRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 282 } prlVersion OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

301

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 642 } prlUpdateStatus OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 646 } sid OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 648 } nid OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 649 } pnOffset OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 650 } baseClass OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { cellular 651 }

-- LAN status elements usbMode OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 1130 } vrrpEnabled OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

302 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 9001 } lanpacketsSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 279 } lanpacketsRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 280 } wifipacketsSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 10405 } wifipacketsRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 10406 } wifiBridgeEnabled OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 10401 } wifiSecurityType OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 4509 } wifiAPStatus OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 4506 }

303

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

wifiSSID OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 4507 } wifiChannel OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { lan 4508 }

-- VPN status elements incomingOOB OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3177 } outgoingOOB OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3178 } outgoingHostOOB OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3179 } vpn1Status OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3176 } vpn2Status OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

304 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

::= { vpn 3205 } vpn3Status OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3231 } vpn4Status OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3257 } vpn5Status OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { vpn 3283 }

-- Security status elements dmz OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 5113 } portForwarding OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 5112 } portFilteringIn OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 3505 } portFilteringOut OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 3506 }

305

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

trustedHosts OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 1062 } macFiltering OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 3509 } badPasswdCount OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 385 } ipRejectCount OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 386 } ipRejectLog OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { security 387 }

-- Services status elements aceNet OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { services 5026 } aceManager OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { services 1149 }

306 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

dynamicDnsService OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { services 5011 } fullDomainName OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { services 5007 }

-- GPS status elements gpsFix OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 900 } satelliteCount OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 901 } latitude OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 902 } longitude OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 903 } heading OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 904 } speed OBJECT-TYPE

307

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 905 } engineHours OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { gps 906 }

-- Serial status elements serialPortMode OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { serial 1043 } tcpAutoAnswer OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { serial 1048 } udpAutoAnswer OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { serial 1054 } serialPacketsSent OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { serial 273 } serialPacketsRecvd OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { serial 274 }

-- About status elements

308 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

deviceModel OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 7 } radioModelType OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 9 } radioFirmwareVersion OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 8 } deviceID OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 25 } macAddress OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 66 } aleosSWVersion OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 4 } deviceHwConfiguration OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 5 } msciVersion OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

309

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

MAX-ACCESS read-only

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { about 3 }

-- Read Write values snmpenable OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

disabled(0),

enabled(1)}

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10040 } snmpversion OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

snmpv2c(2),

snmpv3(3)}

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10041 } snmpport OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10042 } snmpContact OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 2730 } snmpName OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 2731 } snmpLocation OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 2732 }

310 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

rocommunity OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10063 } rouser OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10045 } rosecuritylvl OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

noauthnopriv(0),

authnopriv(1),

authpriv(2)}

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10046 } roauthtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

md5(0),

sha(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10047 } roauthkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10048 } roprivtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

aes(0),

des(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10049 } roprivkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

311

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10050 } rwcommunity OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10064 } rwuser OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10051 } rwsecuritylvl OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

noauthnopriv(0),

authnopriv(1),

authpriv(2)}

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10052 } rwauthtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

md5(0),

sha(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10053 } rwauthkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10054 } rwprivtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

aes(0),

des(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

312 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10055 } rwprivkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10056 } trapipAddress OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX IpAddress

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 1166 } trapport OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10043 } engineid OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10044 } trapcommunity OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10065 } trapuser OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10057 } trapsecuritylvl OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

noauthnopriv(0),

authnopriv(1),

authpriv(2)}

313

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10058 } trapauthtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

md5(0),

sha(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10059 } trapauthkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10060 } trapprivtype OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

aes(0),

des(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10061 } trapprivkey OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 10062 } rebootmodem OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER {

nop(0),

reboot(1) }

MAX-ACCESS read-write

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION ""

::= { snmpconfig 65001 }

-- Notifications starting at 1000

314 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

modemNotifications OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { mibversion1 1000 } value OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX DisplayString

MAX-ACCESS accessible-for-notify

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"value of MSCIID that triggered this event"

::= { modemNotifications 500 } digitalInput1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Digital Input 1 MSCIID 851"

::= { modemNotifications 1 } digitalInput2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Digital Input 1 MSCIID 852"

::= { modemNotifications 2 } digitalInput3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Digital Input 1 MSCIID 853"

::= { modemNotifications 3 } digitalInput4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Digital Input 1 MSCIID 854"

::= { modemNotifications 4 } pulseAccumulator1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Pulse Accumulator 1 MSCIID 4002"

::= { modemNotifications 5 } pulseAccumulator2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

315

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

"Pulse Accumulator 2 MSCIID 4003"

::= { modemNotifications 6 } pulseAccumulator3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Pulse Accumulator 3 MSCIID 4004"

::= { modemNotifications 7 } pulseAccumulator4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Pulse Accumulator 1 MSCIID 4005"

::= { modemNotifications 8 } analogInput1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Analog Input 1 MSCIID 855"

::= { modemNotifications 9 } analogInput2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Analog Input 2 MSCIID 856"

::= { modemNotifications 10 } analogInput3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Analog Input 3 MSCIID 857"

::= { modemNotifications 11 } analogInput4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Analog Input 4 MSCIID 858"

::= { modemNotifications 12 } scaledAnalogInput1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Scaled Analog Input 1 MSCIID 4041"

::= { modemNotifications 13 }

316 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

scaledAnalogInput2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Scaled Analog Input 2 MSCIID 4042"

::= { modemNotifications 14 } scaledAnalogInput3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Scaled Analog Input 3 MSCIID 4043"

::= { modemNotifications 15 } scaledAnalogInput4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Scaled Analog Input 4 MSCIID 4044"

::= { modemNotifications 16 } gpsFixNotification NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"GPS Fix MSCIID 900"

::= { modemNotifications 17 } vehicleSpeed NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Vehicle Speed MSCIID 905"

::= { modemNotifications 18 } engineHoursNotification NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Engine Hours MSCIID 906"

::= { modemNotifications 19 } headingChange NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Heading Change MSCIID 904"

::= { modemNotifications 20 } rssiNotification NOTIFICATION-TYPE

317

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"RSSI MSCIID 261"

::= { modemNotifications 21 } networkStateNotification NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Network State MSCIID 259"

::= { modemNotifications 22 } networkService NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Network Service 264"

::= { modemNotifications 23 } networkErrorRate NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Network Error Rate MSCIID 263"

::= { modemNotifications 24 } periodicReports NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Periodic Reports MSCIID 270"

::= { modemNotifications 25 } powerInNotification NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Power In MSCIID 266"

::= { modemNotifications 26 } boardTemp NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Board Temperature MSCIID 267"

::= { modemNotifications 27 } cdmaTemp NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

318 4114514

"CDMA Temperature MSCIID 641"

::= { modemNotifications 28 } dailyDataUsage NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Daily Data Usage MSCIID 25001"

::= { modemNotifications 29 } monthlyDataUsage NOTIFICATION-TYPE

OBJECTS { value }

STATUS current

DESCRIPTION

"Monthly Data Usage MSCIID 25002"

::= { modemNotifications 30 }

END

Rev 1 Oct.13

319

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

320 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

D: AT Commands

AT Command Set Summary

Using a terminal connection (Telnet) or SSH protocol, you can send

AT commands to configure the device, command it to do something, or query a setting.

• AT commands must always be terminated by a carriage return

<CR> (ASCII character 0x0D), i.e., pressing enter on the keyboard. Some may also include a new line or line feed <LF>.

• If

E=1

(Echo On), the AT command (including the terminating

<carriage return>) is displayed (output) before any responses.

• Two settings affect the format of AT command output: V

(Verbose) and Q (Quiet).

• If Q=1 (Quiet On), no result codes are output whatsoever, so there is no response generated by a (non-query) command.

• If Q=0 (Quiet Off), result codes are output. The format of this output is then affected by the Verbose setting.

If Quiet mode is off, the result code is affected as follows:

For V=1 (Verbose mode), the textual result code is surrounded by a carriage return and new line. Any AT query response is also surrounded by a carriage return and new line.

For V=0 (Terse mode), a numeric result code is output with a single trailing carriage return (no new line is output), while any AT query response is followed by a carriage return and new line (there is no preceding output).

• For example, possible output to the AT command “AT” with carriage return (assuming quiet mode is not on) is: carriage return — if V=0 carriage return and new line OK another carriage return and new line — if V=1

Note: AT commands work for the port on which they are executed. For example, if the user types ATE1 and then AT&W using a USB/serial port connection, it sets the USB/serial port to Echo On but not the telnet connection or the RS232 serial port.

If you need to change the port for Telnet (for example, you have the default port blocked on your firewall), the option is on the Services >

Telnet/SSH tab. The default Telnet port is 2332. You can also change the Telnet timeout; if the connection is idle, default timeout is 2 minutes. This is the internal Telnet on the device to pass AT commands and not TCP PAD.

D

321

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

AT commands are shown in upper case, but they are not case sensitive.

This appendix organizes the commands into functional groups to allow you to more quickly locate a desired command when you know the operation but not the command. Commands under each topic are listed alphabetically.

Note: Some of the configuration commands listed here are only available as AT commands.

Reference Tables

Result codes are not shown in the command tables unless special conditions apply. Generally the result code

OK

is returned when the command has been executed.

ERROR

may be returned if parameters are out of range, and is returned if the command is not recognized or is not permitted in the current state or condition of the AirLink device.

AT command topics in this appendix:

Standard (Hayes) commands on page 366

Device Updates on page 323

Status on page 323

WAN/Cellular on page 328

LAN on page 334

Wi-Fi on page 336

VPN on page 339

Security on page 344

Services on page 345

GPS on page 353

Serial on page 359

I/O on page 371

Applications on page 372

Admin on page 373

322 4114514

Device Updates

Table D-1: Device Update AT Commands

Command Description

*TPLUPDATE

This AT command updates templates (configuration files) remotely.

The template files must be accessible on an FTP server.

The command parameters are:

AT*TPLUPDATE=Server_IP,USER_NAME,PASSWORD,FILE_NAME where:

• SERVER_IP is the IP address of the FTP server.

• USER_NAME is the user name used to access the FTP server.

• PASSWORD is the password used to access the FTP server.

• FILE_NAME is the name of the template file on the FTP server that you want to apply to the AirLink device. The must be stored on the FTP User_Name home, not in a subfolder.

Example:

AT*TPLUPDATE=192.168.17.111,MyUserName,MyPassword,NewTemplate.xml

When the template is successfully applied, the message displayed is:

Template applied successfully

OK

Status

Table D-2: Status AT Commands

Command Description

*BAND?

*CELLINFO?

*CELLINFO2?

+CIMI?

*DEVICEID?

HSPA and LTE fallback to HSPA only.

Query the current radio module band.

Query cellular connection information.

Query in depth cell information.

HSPA and LTE only.

Query the IMSI.

When the device is configured to use the device ID with GPS reports, this command displays the 64-bit device ID created from the ESN/IMEI or phone.

Note: If the device is not configured to use the device ID with GPS reports, the command returns “NOT SET”.

*DNS1?

*DNS2?

+ECIO?

Rev 1 Oct.13

Query the primary DNS (*DNS1) and secondary (*DNS2) IP addresses.

AT*DNS1? to query DNS1

AT*DNS2? to query DNS2

Query the signal quality.

323

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-2: Status AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*ETHMAC?

*ETHSTATE?

*GLOBALID?

*HOSTCOMMLVL?

+HWTEMP?

I[n]

+ICCID?

*LTERSRQ?

*LTERSRP?

*NETCHAN?

Query the MAC address of the Ethernet port

• AT*ETHMAC? — Returns the MAC address of the main Ethernet port

If you have a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed:

• AT*ETHMAC?2 — Returns the MAC address of the Ethernet X-Card port marked eth2

• AT*ETHMAC?3 — Returns the MAC address of the Ethernet X-Card port marked eth3

Query the connection state (speed and duplex) of the Ethernet port.

• AT*ETHSTATE? — Returns the speed and duplex state of the main Ethernet port (e.g.

100Mb/s Full Duplex)

If you have a GX Series device with a Dual Ethernet X-Card installed:

• AT*ETHSTATE2? — Returns the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet X-Card port marked eth2

• AT*ETHSTATE3? — Returns the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet X-Card port marked eth3

Query the global ID used by AVMS to identify the device.

Query the serial host signal level.

Response example: DCD:LOW; DTR:LOW; DSR:HIGH; CTS:HIGH; RTS:LOW

Query the internal temperature of the radio module (in degrees Celsius).

Query device information.

• n omitted—device model

• n=0—device model

• n=1—ALEOS software version, hardware revision, boot version

• n=2—Radio module firmware version

• n=3—Radio module’s unique ID (ESN, IMIEI, or EID)

HSPA and LTE only.

Query the SIM ID.

LTE only

Query the LTE signal quality (in dB).

For more information, see

LTE Signal Quality (RSRQ) on page 45.

LTE only

Query the LTE signal strength (in dBm).

For more information, see

LTE Signal Strength (RSRP) on page 44.

Query the current cellular network channel.

324 4114514

Table D-2: Status AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

NETIP?

Query the current WAN IP address of the device reported by the internal module (generally obtained from your Mobile Network Operator). If the device is connected in Wi-Fi Client mode, the

Wi-Fi IP address is returned.

If you have an Internet-routable IP address, you can use this address to contact devices from the Internet. If your device uses a different WAN (such as a Wi-Fi client) or is on a private cellular network, you can use this address to contact the device from another host on the same WAN network.

If required, use AT*

*NETALLOWZEROIP

to allow displaying an IP address ending in a zero.

Note: If there is no current network IP address, 0.0.0.0 is returned.

*NETOP?

Query the Mobile Network Operator of the active connection. If you are roaming, the roaming operator is returned, if the home operator allows this.

Query the device's cellular phone number, if applicable or obtainable.

*NETPHONE?

*NETRSSI?

Query the current RSSI (Receive Signal Strength Indicator) for non-LTE cellular connections, as a negative dBm value.

Query the current connection type (e.g., LTE, HSPA+, EV-DO Rev A, etc.).

*NETSERV?

*NETSERVICE_RAW?

Query the numeric value for the network service type.

• 8—2G (1x, EDGE, GPRS)

• 10—2G roaming

• 16—3G (EV-DO Rev. A, HSPA, HSPA+, UMTS)

• 18—3G roaming

• 64—4G

Rev 1 Oct.13

325

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-2: Status AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*NETSTATE?

Query the network state of the current WAN connection.

AT*NETSTATE? returns:

• Connecting To Network—The device is in the process of trying to connect to the cellular network.

• Network Authentication Fail—Authentication to the cellular network has failed. Verify settings to activate the device.

• Data Connection Failed—The device failed to connect, and it is now waiting a set time interval before it attempts to reconnect. Verify settings to activate the device.

• Network Negotiation Fail—Network connection negotiation failed. This is usually temporary and often clears up during a subsequent attempt.

• Network Ready—The device is connected to the 1x cellular network and ready to send data.

• Network Ready - Wi-Fi —Device is connected to a Wi-Fi network in client mode.

• Network Dormant—The device is connected to the 1x cellular network, but the link is dormant. It will be woken up when data is sent or received.

• No Service—There is no cellular network detected.

• Hardware Reset—The internal module is being reset. This is a temporary state.

• No SIM or Unexpected SIM status—No SIM, SIM installed incorrectly, or another SIM error.

• Awaiting Provisioning—EV-DO device without an account and hasn't had an account or the provisioning has been erased from the radio.

• Provisioning... —An EV-DO device in the process of writing the account data to the radio.

• Not Connected-Waiting for Activity — “Always On Connection” has been disabled and the device is waiting for outgoing traffic to mount the PDP context.

• Not Connected-Radio Connect off—the RADIO_CONNECT AT command was entered, and the PDP context is manually disabled.

• SIM Locked, but bad SIM PIN.

• SIM PIN incorrect 3 attempts left.

• SIM PIN incorrect 2 attempts left.

• SIM PIN incorrect 1 attempts left.

• SIM PIN incorrect 0 attempts left.

• SIM Blocked, Bad unlock code.

• SIM Blocked, unblock code incorrect.

326 4114514

Table D-2: Status AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*NETSTATE_RAW?

Query numeric value of the network state of the current WAN connection:

• 1—Connecting To Network—The device is in the process of trying to connect to the cellular network.

• 4—Network Access Denied—Connection rejected.

• 5—Network Ready—WAN is using cellular and is online.

• 7—No Service—The WAN link is down or unavailable

• 9—No SIM or Unexpected SIM status—No SIM, SIM installed incorrectly, or another

SIM error.

• 11—Awaiting Provisioning—EV-DO device without an account and hasn't had an account or the provisioning has been erased from the radio.

• 12—Data Connection Failed - Waiting to Retry—The device failed to connect, and it is waiting a set time interval before it attempts to reconnect.

Or

• 12—Provisioning... —An EV-DO device in the process of writing the account data to the radio.

• 13—SIM Locked, but bad SIM PIN.

• 14—SIM PIN incorrect 3 attempts left.

• 15—SIM PIN incorrect 2 attempts left.

• 16—SIM PIN incorrect 1 attempts left.

• 17—SIM PIN incorrect 0 attempts left.

• 18—SIM Blocked, Bad unlock code.

• 19—SIM Blocked, unblock code incorrect.

• 27—Network Ready - Wi-Fi—WAN is using WiFi Client and is connected.

• 30—Not Connected-Waiting for Activity — "Always On Connection" has been disabled and the device is waiting for outgoing traffic to mount the PDP context.

• 31—Not Connected-Radio Connect off—the RADIO_CONNECT AT command was entered, and the PDP context is manually disabled.

+PRL?

*PRLSTATUS?

*USBNETSTATE?

CDMA and LTE fallback to EV-DO only

Query CDMA Preferred Roaming List (PRL) version.

CDMA only

Query the status of the most recent PRL update

• n=0—None (No update)

• n=1—In progress

• n=2—Update successful

The return of any other value indicates that the update failed.

Query the status of the USB connection.

AT*USBNETSTATE? returns:

• None—There are no USB connections to the AirLink device.

• 8 MB/s Half Duplex—There is a USB connection to the device.

Rev 1 Oct.13

327

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

WAN/Cellular

A reboot is required before the WAN/Cellular AT Commands described in the following table take effect.

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*AUTOPRL

Description

CDMA only.

Query or set automatic Preferred Roaming List updates

AT*PRL? to query

AT*PRL=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Note: To query the current PRL, use +PRL?

.

*AUTOPRLFREQ

!BAND

CDMA only.

Query or set how often the PRL automatically updates.

AT*AUTOPRLFREQ? to query

AT*AUTOPRLFREQ=n to set

• n= interval to check for updates (in days)

HSPA and LTE fallback to HSPA only.

Query or set the RF band range or technology.

AT!BAND? to query a value sent since the device was last rebooted.

AT!BAND=hh to set at the next reboot.

• hh=00—All bands

• hh=03—GSM 900/1800

• hh=05—GSM All

• hh=08—WCDMA All

• hh=10—WCDMA 900/2100

Note: To query the current band, use

*BAND?

.

Note: For some Mobile Network Operator SIM Cards, you may need to set the radio band before installing the SIM card.

328 4114514

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

+CGDCONT

Description

HSPA only

Query or set the PDP context, APN, and other information required to establish a connection to o an HSPA network. You only need to configure this once. The parameters are saved and used each time a connection is made to the HSPA network.

AT+CGDCONT? to query

AT+CGDCONT = PID,PDP_TYPE,APN [,IPADDR] to set

PID= PDP context identifier

PDP_TYPE = numeric parameter that specifies a PDP context definition

APN = Access Point Name

IPADDR = IP address

Examples:

AT+CGDCONT=1,IP,proxy

AT+CGDCONT=1,IP,internet

Note: When using the APN-related optons in ACEmanager, you generally do not need to configure +CGDCONT.

*CLIENT_PPP_AUTH

Query or set the Force Network Authentication mode.

AT*CLIENT_PPP_AUTH? to query

AT*CLIENT_PPP_AUTH=n to set

• n=0—None

• n=1—PAP

• n=2—CHAP

+COPS

HSPA only

Query or set the network operator and the connection mode.

AT+COPS? to query

AT+COPS=MODE[,FORMAT[,OPER]] to set

MODE

• MODE=0 — Automatic (default)

• MODE= 1 — Manual

• MODE=4 — Manual/Automatic; if manual failed, it defaults to automatic

FORMAT

• FORMAT=0 — Alphanumeric (“Name”)

• FORMAT=2 — Numeric

OPER

• OPER= the operator numeric code

Example, AT+COPS=1,2,302610

Manual mode, numeric format, operator code 302610

Note: On some cellular networks, explicit use of +COPS allows you to select the roaming

Mobile Network Operator to use.

Rev 1 Oct.13

329

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*EVDODATASERV

Description

CMDA and LTE fallback to EV-DO only.

Query or set the allowable network type.

AT*EVDODATASERV? to query

AT*EVDODATASERV=n to set

• n=0 — EV-DO Preferred — can “fall back” on CDMA/1x

(only available on EV-DO devices)

• n=0 — LTE Preferred — can “fall back” on CDMA/EV-DO

(only available on LTE devices)

• n=1 — EV-DO Only — fall back disabled (only available on 1x/EV-DO devices)

• n=2 — 1x Only — EV-DO disabled (only available on 1x/EV-DO devices)

• n=3—CDMA Only — LTE disabled (only available on LTE devices)

• n=4—LTE Only — Fall back disabled (only available on LTE devices)

Note: If you choose one of the options where fall back is disabled and the selected network type is not available, the device will not be able to connect to the cellular network. For example, if you select LTE Only and you are in an area where there is no LTE network available, the device will not be able to connect to a cellular network until you change this setting or move to an area with LTE coverage.

*EVDODIVERSITY

CDMA only. For HSPA device, see

*RXDIVERSITY on page 333.

Query or set EV-DO Diversity, which allows two antennas to provide more consistent connection.

AT*EVDODIVERSITY? to query

AT*EVDODIVERSITY=n to set

• n=0 — Disabled

• n=1 — Enabled

Note: If you are not using a diversity antenna, *EVDODIVERSITY should be disabled.

*EVDOROAMPREF

*HANGUPTORESET

CDMA and LTE fallback to EV-DO only

Query or set the network roaming preference

AT*EVDOROAMPREF? to query

AT*EVDOROAMPREF=n to set

• n=0—Automatic

• n=1—Home only

HSPA only.

Query or set forcing the radio module to reset when the device disconnects.

AT*HANGUPTORESET? to query

AT*HANGUPTORESET=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

330 4114514

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*IPPING

Description

Query or set the interval between keepalive pings (in minutes) if no valid packets have been received by the IP address or FQDN specified in *IPPINGADDR.

AT*IPPING? to query the keepalive PING time interval

AT*IPPING=n to set the keepalive PING time interval

• n=0 — Disable pinging (default)

• n=15–255 minutes

Note: 15 minutes is the minimum interval for Keep Alive. If you set *IPPING for a value between 0 and 15, the idle interval for pings will be 15 minutes.

*IPPINGADDR

*IPPINGFORCE

Query or set the Keepalive PING IP address or FQDN for the device to ping when

Keepalive Ping Time ( *IPPING

) is set.

AT*IPPINGADDR? to query

AT*IPPINGADDR=[d.d.d.d] or [n]

• d.d.d.d=IP address

• n=domain name

Note: AT*IPPING must to be set to a value other than 0 to enable pinging.

Query or set the Force Keepalive Ping setting. When this feature is enabled, the Keepalive ping is sent even if IP traffic has occurred during the configured interval.

AT*IPPINGFORCE? to query

AT*IPPINGFORCE=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Note: To enable this command, *IPPING must be enabled and *IPPINGADDR configured.

*NETALLOWZEROIP

*NETAPN

Query or set allowing the device to get an IP address from the cellular network that has the last octet as 0 (zero).

AT*NETALLOWZEROIP? to query

AT*NETALLOWZEROIP=n to set

• n=0 — Do not allow

• n=1 — Allow

Allows the device to use a WAN IP address that ends in zero (e.g. 192.168.1.0).

HSPA and LTE fallback to HSPA only

Query or set the user entered APN.

AT*NETAPN? to query

AT*NETAPN=APN to set (up to 80 characters)

Note: When you set this command, the APN type is automatically set to User Entry so that the APN you enter with this AT command is used on reboot.

Rev 1 Oct.13

331

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*NETPW

Description

Set the cellular network account password, if required.

AT*NETPW=PW to set (up to 30 characters)

Note: AT*NETPW? returns a dotted display for privacy.

*NETUID

*NETWDOG

PING

$QCMIP

Query or set the cellular network account user ID, if required.

AT*NETUID? to query

AT*NETUID=USER ID (up to 64 bytes)

Query or set the interval (in minutes) that the network connection watchdog waits for a network connection. If no connection is established within this interval, the device resets.

AT*NETWDOG? to query

AT*NETWDOG=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1–255 (minutes) default is 120

Sends 5 PING to a single address. Returns OK if there is a response: ERROR if there is no response.

ATPING[ip address or FQDN]

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

Example: ATPINGsierrawireless.com

CDMA and LTE fallback to EV-DO only

Query or set use of Mobile IP (MIP) preferences.

$QCMIP? to query

$QCMIP=n to set

• n=0—Disabled, Simple IP (SIP) only

• n=1—Mobile IP preferred

• n=2—Mobile IP only

332 4114514

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*RADIO_CONNECT

Description

HSPA only

Query or set the wireless connection setting.

AT*RADIO_CONNECT? to query

AT*RADIO_CONNECT=n to set

• n=0—Disables data traffic. The only way to change this mode is to issue a radio_connect=1 or radio_connect=2 AT command.

• n=1—Enables Always on connection.

• n=2—Disables Always on connection. The device listens for outgoing traffic and establishes a mobile network data connection for a specified time:

• When there is outgoing traffic or

• When it receives a Wakeup SMS, provided Wakeup SMS is configured.

(Use *TRAFWUPTOUT on page 334 to set the timeout period.)

Note: This command is not persistent over device resets.

*RADIO_CONNECT_

STARTUP

*RXDIVERSITY

HSPA only

This command is the same as *RADIO_CONNECT, except

• The change does not take effect until the next reboot.

• The setting is persistent over subsequent reboots.

HSPA only. For CDMA devices, see

*EVDODIVERSITY on page 330.

Query or set the RX Diversity setting.

Rx Diversity allows you to use two antennas for a more consistent connection. If you are not using a diversity antenna, Rx Diversity should be disabled.

AT*RXDIVERSITY? to query

AT*RXDIVERSITY=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Note: This AT Command is not available for all AirLink devices.

*SIMPIN

Note: You can only send this command locally over a serial, serial USB, or local telnet/SSH connection.

HSPA and LTE fallback to HSPA only

Query or enter the SIM pin.

AT*SIMPIN? to query

AT*SIMPIN=n to enter the SIM pin

Rev 1 Oct.13

333

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-3: WAN / Cellular AT Commands

Command

*SIMPINENABLE

*TRAFWUPTOUT

Description

HSPA and LTE fallback to HSPA only

Query or set the SIM pin.

AT*SIMPINENABLE? to query

AT*SIMPINENABLE=n to set

• n=0—Don’t change

• n=1—Enable (SIM pin required on startup)

• n=2—Disable

HSPA only

Query or set the timeout period after which, if there is no outgoing WAN traffic the connection is terminated.

The timeout period only takes effect if *RADIO_CONNECT

or

*RADIO_CONNECT_

STARTUP

is set to 1, or Always on connection is disabled in ACEmanager. (See Always on connection on page 110.)

AT*TRAFWUPTOUT? to query

AT*TRAFWUPTOUT=n to set

• n=2–65535 minutes (default is 2)

Note: This timer is reset to zero each time a WAN packet goes out.

LAN/WiFi

LAN

Note: A reboot is required before these commands take effect.

Table D-4: LAN AT Commands

Command Description

*DHCPHOSTEND

*DHCPNETMASK

*DHCPSERVER

Query or set the ending IP address for the Ethernet DHCP pool

AT*DHCPHOSTEND? to query

AT*DHCPHOSTEND=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d=last IP address in Ethernet DHCP pool

Query or set the Ethernet DHCP subnet mask

AT*DHCPNETMASK? to query

AT*DHCPNETMASK=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d=Ethernet DHCP subnet mask

Query or set the Ethernet DHCP server.

AT*DHCPSERVER? to query

AT*DHCPSERVER=n to enable or disable the DHCP server mode

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

334 4114514

Table D-4: LAN AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*DNS1?

*DNS2?

*DNSUSER

*HOSTAUTH

*HOSTPEERIP

Query the primary DNS (*DNS1) and secondary (*DNS2) IP addresses.

AT*DNS1? to query DNS1

AT*DNS2? to query DNS2

Query or set the first alternate server for DNS override. (Applies only to primary DNS.)

AT*DNSUSER? to query

AT*DNSUSER=d.d.d.d

• d.d.d.d=IP address of domain server

Query or set the Host Authentication mode for PPPoE only. (It does not set host authentication for PPP/DUN.)

AT*HOSTAUTH? to query

AT*HOSTAUTH=n to set

• n=0—None/Disables authentication for PPPoE (Default).

• n=1— Authentication through PAP

• n=2—Authentication through PAP & CHAP

Query or set the IP address of the device’s Ethernet port. By default this is 192.168.13.31.

*HOSTPRIVIP

*HOSTPRIVMODE

*HOSTPW

Note: Any connected LAN host can access this IP addresses, whether using a private or public IP address. This IP address must be in the same subnet as the Ethernet DHCP pool.

AT*HOSTPEERIP? to query

AT*HOSTPEERIP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d=local or peer IP address of the device

Query or set the starting IP for the Ethernet DHCP pool.

AT*HOSTPRIVIP? to query

AT*HOSTPRIVIP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d=IP Address

Query or set the host communication mode used for tethered IP connections.

AT*HOSTPRIVMODE? to query

AT*HOSTPRIMODE=n to set which user interface uses the Public IP address

• n=0—Ethernet Uses Public IP

• n=1—All Hosts Use Private IPs

• n=2—USB Uses Public IP

• n=3—DUN Uses Public IP

• n=4—First Host gets Public IP

Query or set the host password for PPPoE only. (It does not set the password for PPP/

DUN.)

AT*HOSTPW? to query

AT*HOSTPW=PASSWORD to set

Note: PASSWORD cannot be “password”.

Rev 1 Oct.13

335

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-4: LAN AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*HOSTUID

Query or set the Host user ID for PPPoE only. (It does not set the user ID for PPP/DUN.)

AT*HOSTUID? to query

AT*HOSTUID=USER ID to set (up to 64 bytes)

Note: USER ID cannot be “user”.

*USBDEVICE

Query or set the USB Device Mode.

This parameter alters the default startup data mode.

AT*USBDEVICE? to query

AT*USBDEVICE=n to set

• n=0— USB Serial

• n=1— USBNET

• n=2— Disabled

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi AT Commands are only applicable if the AirLink device has an installed

Wi-Fi X-Card and is in Access Point Mode.

Note: You need to configure Client Mode in ACEmanager. There is no AT Command for

Wi-Fi Client mode. See WiFi Mode on page 72.

Note: A reboot is required before these commands take effect.

Table D-5: Wi-Fi AT Commands

Command Description

*APBRIDGED

*APCHANNEL

*APEN

Query or set the Bridge Wi-Fi Access Point to Ethernet feature.

AT*APBRIDGED? to query

AT*APBRIDGED=n to set

• n=0 —Disable

• n=1 —Enable

Query or set the Wi-Fi Access Point channel to use.

AT*APCHANNEL? to query

AT*APCHANNEL=n to set

• n = 1 – 11 (available channels)

Query or set the Wi-Fi Access Point mode.

AT*APEN? to query

AT*APEN=n to set

• n=2 —b/g Enabled

• n=3 —b/g/n Enabled

336 4114514

Table D-5: Wi-Fi AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*APENDIP

*APHOSTIP

*APMAXCLIENT

*APNETMASK

*APSECURITYTYPE?

Query or set the ending IP address for the Wi-Fi Access Point DHCP pool.

AT*APENDIP? to query

AT*APENDIP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d= IP Address

Query or set the Host Wi-Fi Access Point device IP address.

AT*APHOSTIP? to query

AT*APHOSTIP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d= IP Address

Query or set the maximum number of Wi-Fi Access Point clients.

AT*APMAXCLIENT? to query

AT*APMAXCLIENT=n to set

• n=0–8

Query or set the Wi-Fi DHCP subnet mask.

AT*APNETMASK? to query

AT*APNETMASK=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d = IP Address

Query the Wi-Fi Access Point Security Encryption type.

AT*APSECURITYTYPE?

• n=0—Open (WEP encryption)

• n=3—WPA Personal

• n=5—WPA2 Personal

Note: WEP is not a recommended Wi-Fi Security protocol because of its vulnerabilities and because only alphanumeric characters can be used for the passphrase.

Use WPA/WPA2 instead.

*APSSIDBCAST

*APSSIDVAL

*APSTARTIP

Query or set the broadcast Wi-Fi Access Point SSID.

AT*APSSIDBCAST? to query

AT*APSSIDBCAST=n to set

• n=0 —Disable

• n=1 —Enable

Query or set the Access Point SSID/Network name.

AT*APSSIDVAL? to query

AT*APSSIDVAL=n to set

• n = ASCII SSID STRING

Query or set the Query or set the Access Point DHCP start of IP address pool.

AT*APSTARTIP? to query

AT*APSTARTIP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d= IP Address

Rev 1 Oct.13

337

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-5: Wi-Fi AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*APTXPWR

*APWEPENCTYPE?

Query or set the Wi-Fi Access Point Transmit Power mode.

AT*APTXPWR? to query

AT*APTXPWR=n to set

• n=0—Low

• n=1—Normal

Query the Wi-Fi Access Point WEP encryption type.

AT*APWEPENCTYPE?

• n=0—Disabled (Open)

• n=1—WEP

Note: WEP is not a recommended Wi-Fi Security protocol because of its vulnerabilities and because only alphanumeric characters can be used for the passphrase.

Use WPA/WPA2 instead.

*APWEPKEY?

*APWEPKEYLEN?

*APWPACRYPT?

WCC?

*WIFIMAC?

Query the Wi-Fi Access Point WEB key generated at boot from the WEP passphrase.

AT*APWEPKEY?

Query the length of the Wi-Fi Access Point WEP key.

AT*APWEPKEYLEN?

• n=0—64-bit

• n=1—128-bit

• n=2—Custom

Query the Wi-Fi Access Point WPA/WPA2 encryption type.

AT*APWEPKEY?

• n=0—TKIP

• n=1—AES

Note: If you are using WPA2, only AES is allowed.

Query the Wi-Fi country code.

Query the MAC address of the Wi-Fi Access Point.

Note: Wi-Fi Client uses a different MAC address.

*WIFIMODE

Query or set the WI-Fi Mode.

AT*WIFIMODE? to query

AT*WIFIMODE=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1—AP (Access Point)

• n=2—Client

• n=3—AP and Client

For more information, see

Wi-Fi on page 85.

338 4114514

VPN

Table D-6: VPN Commands

Command

*IPSEC1_AUTH

*IPSEC2_AUTH

*IPSEC3_AUTH

*IPSEC4_AUTH

*IPSEC5_AUTH

*IPSEC1_DH

*IPSEC2_DH

*IPSEC3_DH

*IPSEC4_DH

*IPSEC5_DH

*IPSEC1_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC2_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC3_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC4_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC5_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC1_GATEWAY

*IPSEC2_GATEWAY

*IPSEC3_GATEWAY

*IPSEC4_GATEWAY

*IPSEC5_GATEWAY

Description

Query or set the authentication type for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_AUTH? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_AUTH=n to set

• n=0 — None

• n=1 — MD5

• n=2 — SHA1 (default)

• n=3 — SHA 256

Note: MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit digest for authentication. SHA is a more secure algorithm that produces both 160-bit

(SHA1) and 256-bit (SHA256) digests.

Query or set how the AirLink Device VPN creates an SA with the VPN server. The DH (Diffie-Hellman) key exchange protocol establishes preshared keys during the phase 1 authentication. The AirLink Device supports three prime key lengths, including Group 1 (768 bits), Group 2

(1,024 bits), and Group 5 (1,536 bits).

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_DH? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_DH=n to set

• n=0 — None

• n=1 — DH1

• n=2 — DH2 (default)

• n=5 — DH5

Query or set the type/length of encryption key used to encrypt/decrypt

ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) packets for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_ENCRYPT? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_ENCRYPT=n to set

• n=0 — None

• n=1 — DES

• n=2 — 3DES

• n=3 — AES-128 (default)

• n=7 — AES-256

Note: 3DES supports 168-bit encryption. AES (Advanced Encryption

Standard) supports both 128-bit and 256-bit encryption.

Query or set the IP address of the server that # VPN client connects to.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_GATEWAY? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_GATEWAY=[IP address] to set

Rev 1 Oct.13

339

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-6: VPN Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*IPSEC1_IKE_AUTH

*IPSEC2_IKE_AUTH

*IPSEC3_IKE_AUTH

*IPSEC4_IKE_AUTH

*IPSEC5_IKE_AUTH

Query or set the IKE authentication type for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_AUTH? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_AUTH=n to set

• n=1 — MD5

• n=2 — SHA1

• n=3 — SHA 256

Note: MD5 is an algorithm that produces a 128-bit digest for authentication. SHA is a more secure algorithm that produces both 160-bit

(SHA1) and 256-bit (SHA256) digests.

*IPSEC1_IKE_DH

*IPSEC2_IKE_DH

*IPSEC3_IKE_DH

*IPSEC4_IKE_DH

*IPSEC5_IKE_DH

*IPSEC1_IKE_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC2_IKE_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC3_IKE_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC4_IKE_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC5_IKE_ENCRYPT

*IPSEC1_IKE_LIFETIME

*IPSEC2_IKE_LIFETIME

*IPSEC3_IKE_LIFETIME

*IPSEC4_IKE_LIFETIME

*IPSEC5_IKE_LIFETIME

*IPSEC1_LIFETIME

*IPSEC2_LIFETIME

*IPSEC3_LIFETIME

*IPSEC4_LIFETIME

*IPSEC5_LIFETIME

Query or set how the AirLink Device VPN creates an SA with the VPN server. The DH (Diffie-Hellman) key exchange protocol establishes preshared keys during the phase 1 authentication. The AirLink Device supports three prime key lengths, including Group 1 (768 bits), Group 2

(1,024 bits), and Group 5 (1,536 bits).

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_DH? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_DH=n to set

• n=1 — DH1

• n=2 — DH2 (default)

• n=5 — DH5

Query or set the type/length of IKE encryption key used to encrypt/ decrypt ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) packets for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_ENCRYPT? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_ENCRYPT=n to set

• n=1 — DES

• n=5 — 3DES

• n=7 — AES-128 (default)

• n=9 — AES-256

Note: 3DES supports 168-bit encryption. AES (Advanced Encryption

Standard) supports both 128-bit and 256-bit encryption.

Query or set how long the # VPN tunnel is active (in seconds).

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_LIFETIME? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_IKE_LIFETIME=n to set

• n= 180–86400

• Default is 7200.

Query or set how long the # VPN tunnel is active (in seconds).

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LIFETIME? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LIFETIME=n to set

• n= 180–86400

• Default is 7200.

340 4114514

Table D-6: VPN Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*IPSEC1_LOCAL_ADDR

*IPSEC2_LOCAL_ADDR

*IPSEC3_LOCAL_ADDR

*IPSEC4_LOCAL_ADDR

*IPSEC5_LOCAL_ADDR

*IPSEC1_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC2_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC3_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC4_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC5_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC1_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC2_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC3_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC4_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC5_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE

Query or set the device subnet address for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR? returns the device subnet address

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR=[subnet address] to set

Query or set the device subnet mask information (24-bit netmask)

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR_NETMASK? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR=[subnet mask] to set

Default is 255.255.255.0

*IPSEC1_LOCAL_ID

*IPSEC2_LOCAL_ID

*IPSEC3_LOCAL_ID

*IPSEC4_LOCAL_ID

*IPSEC5_LOCAL_ID

*IPSEC1_LOCAL_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC2_LOCAL_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC3_LOCAL_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC4_LOCAL_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC5_LOCAL_ID_TYPE

Query or set the network address type for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ADDR_TYPE=n to set

• n=1 — Use the Host Subnet

• n=5 — Single Address

• n=17 — Subnet Address (default)

Query or set the local (My Identity) ID for the # VPN.

• If IP is selected as the local (My Identity) type,

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL _ID? returns the WAN IP address assigned by the Mobile Network Operator

• If FQDN or User FQDN is selected as the local (My Identity) type,

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ID? returns the FQDN (for example [email protected])

To set the local ID:

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL _ID=[IP address] or [FQDN], depending on the setting for Local ID (My Identity) type.

Query or set the local (My Identity) ID type for the # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ID_TYPE? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_LOCAL_ID_TYPE=n to set

• n=1 — IP

• n=2 — FQDN

• n=3 — User FQDN

Note:

• IP (default) allows you to use an IP address

• FQDN allows you to use a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) e. g., modemname.domainname.com

• User FQDN allows you to use a user FQDN whose values should include a username (e.g. [email protected])

Rev 1 Oct.13

341

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-6: VPN Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*IPSEC1_NEG_MODE

*IPSEC2_NEG_MODE

*IPSEC3_NEG_MODE

*IPSEC4_NEG_MODE

*IPSEC5_NEG_MODE

Query or set the negotiation mode for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_NEG_MODE? returns

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_NEG_MODE=n to set

• n=1 — Main

• n=2 — Aggressive

Note: Aggressive mode offers increased performance at the expense of security.

*IPSEC1_PFS

*IPSEC2_PFS

*IPSEC3_PFS

*IPSEC4_PFS

*IPSEC5_PFS

Query or set the Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) setting for # VPN.

PFS provides additional security through a DH shared secret value.

When this feature is enabled, one key cannot be derived from another.

This ensures previous and subsequent encryption keys are secure even if one key is compromised.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_PFS? to query PFS

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_PFS=n to set PFS

• n=0 — Yes (default)

• n=1 — No

Query or set the IP address of the device behind the gateway for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR=[IP address] to set

*IPSEC1_REMOTE_ADDR

*IPSEC2_REMOTE_ADDR

*IPSEC3_REMOTE_ADDR

*IPSEC4_REMOTE_ADDR

*IPSEC5_REMOTE_ADDR

*IPSEC1_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC2_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC3_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC4_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE

*IPSEC5_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE

Query or set network information of the IPsec server behind the IPsec gateway for # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR_TYPE=n to set

• n=5 — Single Address

• n=17 — Subnet Address (default)

*IPSEC1_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC2_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC3_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC4_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK

*IPSEC5_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK

Query or set the remote subnet mask information (24-bit netmask).

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR_NETMASK? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ADDR=[subnet mask] to set

Default is 255.255.255.0

*IPSEC1_REMOTE_ID

*IPSEC2_REMOTE_ID

*IPSEC3_REMOTE_ID

*IPSEC4_REMOTE_ID

*IPSEC5_REMOTE_ID

Query or set the remote (Peer Identity) ID for the # VPN.

• If IP is selected as the remote (Peer Identity) type,

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ID? returns the WAN IP address assigned by the Mobile Network Operator

• If FQDN or User FQDN is selected as the remote (Peer Identity) type, AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ID? returns the FQDN (for example [email protected])

To set the remote ID:

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE _ID=[IP address] or [FQDN], depending on the setting for remote ID (Peer Identity) type.

342 4114514

Table D-6: VPN Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*IPSEC1_REMOTE_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC2_REMOTE_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC3_REMOTE_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC4_REMOTE_ID_TYPE

*IPSEC5_REMOTE_ID_TYPE

Query or set the remote (Peer Identity) ID type for the # VPN.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ID_TYPE? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_REMOTE_ID_TYPE=n to set

• n=1 — IP

• n=2 — FQDN

• n=3 — User FQDN

Note:

• FQDN allows you to use a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) e. g., modemname.domainname.com

• User FQDN allows you to use a user FQDN whose values should include a username (e.g. [email protected])

*IPSEC1_SHARED_KEY1

*IPSEC2_SHARED_KEY1

*IPSEC3_SHARED_KEY1

*IPSEC4_SHARED_KEY1

*IPSEC5_SHARED_KEY1

*IPSEC1_STATUS?

*IPSEC2_STATUS?

*IPSEC3_STATUS?

*IPSEC4_STATUS?

*IPSEC5_STATUS?

Query the pre-shared Key (PSK) used to initiate the # VPN tunnel.

AT*IPSEC[n]_SHARED_KEY1?

[n]=server number

*IPSEC1_TUNNEL_TYPE

*IPSEC2_TUNNEL_TYPE

*IPSEC3_TUNNEL_TYPE

*IPSEC4_TUNNEL_TYPE

*IPSEC5_TUNNEL_TYPE

Query the VPN # connection status.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_STATUS? to query

• Disabled

• Not Connected

• Connected

Note: Use this when troubleshooting a VPN # connection.

Query or set the VPN # tunnel type.

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_TUNNEL_TYPE? to query

AT*IPSEC[VPN number]_TUNNEL_TYPE=n to set

• n=0 — Disable the tunnel (default)

• n=1 — IPsec Tunnel

• n=2 — GRE Tunnel

• n=3 — SSL Tunnel

Note: For a successful configuration, all settings for the VPN tunnel must be identical between the AirLink Device VPN and the enterprise

VPN server.

Rev 1 Oct.13

343

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Security

Table D-7: Security AT Commands

Command Description

F0 (F1, F2, ... F9)

Query or set the Inbound Trusted IP List.

ATF? to query the list

ATF[n]=d.d.d.d to set

• n=0–9 Trusted IP list index number

• d.d.d.d = IP Address

Using 255 in the IP address will allow any number

Example: 166.129.2.255 allows access by all IPs in the range 166.129.2.0–166.129.2.255.

Example: atf?

0=192.32.32.21

1=192.32.32.22

2=192.32.32.23

3=0.0.0.0

4=0.0.0.0

5=0.0.0.0

6=0.0.0.0

7=0.0.0.0

8=0.0.0.0

9=0.0.0.0

OK

If the index number does not have an IP address associated with it, the query returns

0.0.0.0 for that index number.

Note: You can only query or configure the first nine Inbound Trusted IP addresses with this

AT Command. You cannot query or configure Trusted range entries with this AT Command.

FM

Query or set the Inbound Trusted IP mode (Friends List) — Only allow specified IPs to access the device.

ATFM? to query the setting

ATFM=n to set

• n=0 — Disable Trusted IP mode

• n=1 — Enable Trusted IP mode — Only packets from IP addresses in the Trusted IP list are allowed. Packets from other IP addresses are ignored.

344 4114514

Services

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

AirVantage Management System

*AVMS_ENABLE

*AVMS_INTERVAL

*AVMS_NAME

*AVMS_SERVER

*AVMS_STATUS?

Query or set the AVMS activation status.

AT*AVMS_ENABLE? to query

AT*AVMS_ENABLE=n to set

• n=0—Disable device initiated AVMS management

• n=1—Enable device initiated AVMS management

Query or set the AVMS communication (heartbeat) interval in seconds.

AT*AVMS_INTERVAL? to query

AT*AVMS_INTERVAL= n to set

• n= INTERVAL (in seconds)

Assigns or queries the name to the AirLink device as it appears in AVMS.

AT*AVMS_NAME? to query

AT*AVMS_NAME= n to set

• n= AVMS NAME

Query or set the AVMS server IP address or FQDN.

AT*AVMS_SERVER? to query

AT*AVMS_SERVER=n to set

• n=IP Address or FQDN of AVMS server

Query the AVMS connection status

Low Power

*ENGHRS

*POWERMODE?

Query or set the number of hours the engine has been running.

AT*ENGHRS? to query

AT*ENGHRS=n to set

• n= HOURS

Maximum value is 65535.

Query the current power state/mode.

AT*POWERMODE? returns:

• Initial—The device is in the initial 5 minutes since power up, so power down event will be ignored

• On—Regular power on, a power down is not pending

• Low Cancellable—Power down is pending but still Cancellable if the power down trigger goes away

• Low Pending 1 and Low Pending 3—Power down is pending, any device tasks are gracefully preparing for the power down

• Low Final—Power down is imminent

• Low—Power is down

Rev 1 Oct.13

345

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

PTMR

Query or set the Low Power Mode Delay (in minutes) This is the delay between the time the power down trigger occurs and when the device enters the low power mode.

ATPTMR? to query

ATPTMR=n to set

• n=0–255 (minutes)

Note: There is always a minimum of 1 minute between power down event and actual shutdown (to give the device time to prepare); entering zero will not power down the device immediately.

VLTG

Query or set the voltage level (threshold for low power mode). When the power drops below this level Low Power Mode is triggered.

ATVLTG? to query

ATVLTG=n to set

• n= 0—Ignore voltage for power control

• n= 80–360—threshhold in .1 volt units

Example: ATVLTG=130 would place the device in a low power use, standby state if the voltage goes below 13.0V.

Dynamic DNS

*DOMAIN

Query or set the domain name used for the IP Manager Dynamic DNS configuration.

AT*DOMAIN? to query

AT*DOMAIN=DOMAIN to set (up to 20 characters)

Example: AT*DOMAIN=eairlink.com

Tip:

Only letters, numbers, hyphens, and periods can be used in a domain name.

*DYNDNS

Note: This AT command is only usable if the Dynamic DNS Service type is set to IP

Manager.

Query or set the Dynamic DNS Service type to use.

AT*DYNDNS? to query

AT*DNYDNS=n to set

• n=0—Disable (default)

• n=2—dyndns.org

• n=5—noip.org

• n=6—ods.org

• n=8—regfish.com

• n=9—tzo.org

• n=10—IP Manager

Note: Only IP Manager can be fully configured using AT Commands.

346 4114514

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*IPMANAGER1

*IPMANAGER2

Note: This AT command is only usable if the Dynamic DNS Service type is set to IP

Manager.

Query or set a FQDN or IP address of the IP server to send IP change notifications to. You can configure two independent IP Manager servers.

AT*IPMANAGER[n]? to query

AT*IPMANAGER[n]=SERVER to set.

• n=1—First IP Manager server

• n=2—Second IP Manager server

• SERVER = Server FQDN or IP address

Note: You can disable updates to a server by setting blank entry

(e.g., “AT*IPMANAGER1=”).

*IPMGRKEY1

*IPMGRKEY2

*IPMGRUPDATE1

*IPMGRUPDATE2

Note: This AT command is only usable if the Dynamic DNS Service type is set to IP

Manager.

Query or set the 128-bit password/key used to authenticate the IP update notifications. If the key's value is all zeros, a default key is used. If all the bytes in the key are set to FF, then no key is used (i.e., the IP change notifications will not be authenticated).

AT*IPMGRKEY[n]? to query

AT*IPMANAGER[n]=KEY to set

• n=1—First IP Manager server

• n=2—Second IP Manager server

• KEY=128-bit key in hexadecimal [32 hex characters]

Note: This AT command is only usable if the Dynamic DNS Service type is set to IP

Manager.

Query or set the interval (in minutes) to send an IP update notification to the corresponding server. This occurs even if the IP address of the device does not change. If the value is set to 0, then periodic updates are not issued (i.e., IP change notifications is only be sent when the IP actually changes).

AT*IPMGRUPDATE[n] to query

AT*IPMGRUPDATE[n]=INTERVAL to set

• n=0—Disables the update interval (updates only on changes)

• n=1—First IP Manager server

• n=2—Second IP Manager server

• INTERVAL=1–255—interval (in minutes) to send an update

Rev 1 Oct.13

347

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*MODEMNAME

Note: This AT command is only usable if AT*DYNDNS is set to 10 (IP Manager).

Query or set the device name used by IP Manager. (This name is displayed on the

Status > Home page.)

AT*MODEMNAME? to query

AT*MODEMNAME=NAME to set (up to 20 characters long)

• NAME= device name (for example, mydevice)

The value in *DOMAIN provides the domain zone to add to this name.

Example: If *MODEMNAME=mydevice and *DOMAIN=eairlink.com, the device's fully qualified domain name is mydevice.eairlink.com.

Tip:

Each device using IP Manager needs a unique name. I.e., two devices cannot both be called “mydevice”. One could be named “mydevice1” while the other could be named “mydevice2”.

SMS

*SMSM2M

*SMSM2M_8

*SMSM2M_u

• AT*SMSM2M sends an SMS in ASCII text (requires quotation marks; maximum 140 characters)

• AT*SMSM2M_8 sends an 8-bit SMS (requires quotation marks; maximum 140 characters)

• AT*SMSM2M_U sends a unicode SMS (requires quotation marks; maximum

140 characters)

Format:

AT*SMSM2M=“[phone] [ascii message]”

AT*SMSM2M_8=“[phone] [hex message]”

AT*SMSM2M_U=“[phone] [hex message]”

• The phone number can only consist of numbers (NO spaces or other characters). The phone number should be as it appears in the Last Incoming

Phone Number field.

• Example 1 (US): 14085551212 (including leading 1 and area code)

• Example 2 (US): 4085551212 (ignore leading 1, include area code)

• Example 3 (UK): 447786111717 (remove leading 0 and add country code)

Command Examples:

AT*SMSM2M=”18005551212 THIS IS A TEST” sends in ASCII.

AT*SMSM2M_8="17604053757 5448495320495320412054455354" sends the message “THIS IS A TEST” as 8-bit data.

AT*SMSM2M_U="17604053757

000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f808182838485868788898A8b8c8d8e8f" sends the bytes:

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f

Note: Not all cellular Mobile Network Operators support 8-bit or unicode SMS messages.

348 4114514

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*SMS_PASSWORD

Query or set the SMS password.

AT*SMS_PASSWORD? to query

AT*SMS_PASSWORD = n n= SMS password

If no password has ever been configured, a default password is created from the last four characters of the SIM ID (for all SIM-based devices) or the ESN (for devices without a SIM, such those using EV-DO).

Note: The configured password remains in place, even when the device is reset to factory default settings.

*SMSWUPTOUT

HSPA only

Query or set the connection timeout for the SMS Wakeup feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP connection is initiated on receipt of a specific type of SMS

. The

IP connection closes after the timeout period specified in this AT command.

Outgoing traffic sent after the timer is set does not reset the timer.

AT*SMSWUPTOUT? to query

AT*SMSWUPTOUT=n to set

• n=2–65535 minutes (default is 2)

See also *RADIO_CONNECT on page 333.

Telnet/SSH

*TELNETTIMEOUT

*TSSH

*TPORT

Query or set the Telnet/SSH idle time out.

By default, this value is set to close the telnet/SSH connection if no data is received for 2 minutes.

AT*TELNETTIMEOUT? to query

AT*TELNETTIMEOUT=n to set

• n=1—255 minutes (Default is 2.)

Query or set the remote login server mode.

AT*TSSH? to query

AT*TSSH=n to set

• n=0—Telnet (default)

• n=1—SSH

Query or set the Telnet/SSH port.

AT*PORT? to query

AT*PORT=n to set

• n=1–65535 (Default is 2332.)

Many networks have the ports below 1024 blocked. It is recommended to use a higher numbered port.

Management (SNMP)

SNMP General Configuration

Rev 1 Oct.13

349

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*SNMP

*SNMPCONTACT

*SNMPLOCATION

*SNMPNAME

*SNMPPORT

*SNMPVERSION

Query or set the SNMP option.

AT*SNMP? to query

AT*SNMP=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Add string contact information in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPCONTACT=string

• string= email address (Example: [email protected])

Add string location information in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPLOCATION=string

• string= location information (Example: Building 19–67B)

Add string name in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPNAME=STRING

• STRING=name (Example: John Doe)

Query or set the port number in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPPORT? to query

AT*SNMPPORT=n to set

• n=1–65535 (Default is 161.)

Query or set the SNMP version.

AT*SNMPVERSION? to query

AT*SNMPVERSION=n to set

• n=2—version 2

• n=3—version 3

SNMP Read Only Configuration

*SNMPPROCOMMUNITY

*SNMPROUSER

Read-only community string in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3

(SNMP equivalent of a password; for example: public)

Query or set a read only SNMP username string in SNMPv3.

*SNMPROUSERAUTHTYPE

Query or set the read only authentication type in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPROUSERAUTHTYPE? to query

AT*SNMPROUSERAUTHTYPE=n

• n=0—MD5

• n=1—SHA

*SNMPROUSERSECLVL

Query or set the read only security level in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPROUSERSECLVL? to query

AT*SNMPROUSERSECLVL=n to set

• n=0—none

• n=1—authentication only

• n=2—authentication + privacy

SNMP Read/Write Configuration

350 4114514

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*SNMPRWCOMMUNITY

*SNMPRWUSER

Read/write community string in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

(SNMP equivalent of a password; for example: private)

Query or set a read/write SNMP username string in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

*SNMPRWUSERAUTHTYPE

Query or set the read/write authentication type in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPRWUSERAUTHTYPE? to query

AT*SNMPRWUSERAUTHTYPE=n to set

• n=0—MD5

• n=1—SHA

*SNMPRWUSERSECLVL

Query or set the read/write security level in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPRWUSERSECLVL? to query

AT*SNMPRWUSERSECLVL=n to set

• n=0—none

• n=1—authentication only

• n=2—authentication + privacy

*SNMPRWUSERPRIVTYPE

Query or set the read/write privacy type in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPRWUSERPRIVTYPE? to query

AT*SNMPRWUSERPRIVTYPE=n to set

• n=0—DES

• n=1—AES

SNMP TRAP Configuration

*SNMPENGINEID

*SNMPTRAPAUTHTYPE

*SNMPTRAPCOMMUNITY

*SNMPTRAPDEST

*SNMPTRAPPORT

*SNMPTRAPPRIVTYPE

Specify an identification name string for a SNMP engine in SNMPv3.

(For example: Shark-0012E8)

Query or set the SNMP TRAP authentication type in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPTRAPAUTHTYPE? to query

AT*SNMPTRAPAUTHTYPE=n to set

• n=0—MD5

• n=1—SHA

SNMP TRAP community string in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

(SNMP equivalent of a password)

Query or set the SNMP TRAP destination in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

(for example: 192.168.13.33)

• Query or set the SNMP TRAP port in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3.

1–65535 (Default is 162.)

Query or set the SNMP TRAP privacy type in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPTRAPPRIVTYPE? to query

AT*SNMPTRAPPRIVTYPE=n to set

• n=0—DES

• n=1—AES

Rev 1 Oct.13

351

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-8: Services AT Commands

Command Description

*SNMPTRAPSECLVL

*SNMPTRAPUSER

Query or set the SNMP TRAP security level in SNMPv3.

AT*SNMPTRAPSECLVL? to query

AT*SNMPTRAPSECLVL=n to set

• n=0—none

• n=1—authentication only

• n=2—authentication + privacy

Query or set a SNMP TRAP username string in SNMPv3.

Email (SMTP) Commands

*SMTPADDR

*SMTPFROM

*SMTPSUBJ

Query or set the mail server IP address or FQDN.

AT*SMTPADDR? to query

AT*SMTPADDR=[d.d.d.d] or [NAME] to set

• d.d.d.d=IP Address

• NAME=domain name (maximum: 40 characters)

Query or set the email address from which the SMTP message is being sent

(required by some mail servers).

AT*SMTPFROM? to query

AT*SMTPFROM=EMAIL to set

• EMAIL=email address (maximum: 30 characters)

Query or set the email subject line to use for sending emails.

AT*SMTPSUBJ? to query

AT*SMTPSUBJ=STRING to set

*SMTPPW

*SMTPUSER

Query or set the email server password (required by some mail servers).

AT*SMTPPW? to query

AT*SMTPPW=PASSWORD to set

Query or set the email account username (required by some mail servers).

AT*SMTPUSER? to query

AT*SMTPUSER=USER to set (maximum: 40 characters)

Time (SNTP) Commands

*SNTP

*SNTPADDR

Query or set daily SNTP updates of the system time.

AT*SNTP? to query

AT*SNTP=n to set

• n=0—Off

• n=1—On

SNTP Server IP address, or fully-qualified domain name, to use if *SNTP=1.

AT*SNTPADDR? to query

AT*SNTPADDR=[d.d.d.d] or [NAME]

• d.d.d.d=IP Address

• NAME=FQDN

352 4114514

GPS

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands

Command Description

*GPSDATA?

*PGPS

*PGPSC

Query the device and provides a snap-shot of GPS data.

This command is independent of all GPS configuration. You don't need to have a server configured or any specific report type selected. The response to this command lists the fix status, satellite count, and latitude and longitude in decimal degrees. It is not formatted as a

GPS report. For example:

AT*GPSDATA? returns:

GPS Fix=1

Satellite Count=8

Latitude=+49.17081

Longitude=-123.06970

Query or set the serial streaming interface ports that the reports are sent to.

AT*PGPS? to query

AT*PGPS=n to set

• n=0—None

• n=1—DB9 Serial

• n=2—USB Serial

• n=3—DB9 and USB

• n=4—I/O X-Card Serial

• n=5—I/O X-Card Serial and DB9

• n=6— I/O X-Card Serial and USB

• n=7—I/O X-Card Serial, DB9 and USB

Query or set the out-of-coverage setting. This setting enables you to configure the AirLink device to stream GPS reports to the serial port only when the device has no cellular coverage. (This enables you to use a back-up in-vehicle mapping application that does not rely on cellular network coverage.

AT*PGPSC? to query

AT*PGPSC=n to set

• n=0: ALWAYS (default) GPS reports are always streamed to the serial port

• n=1: Out of Coverage—GPS reports are only streamed to the serial port when the

AirLink device has no cellular network connection.

Note: The two persistent GPS report parameters, *PGPSR and *PGPSF, control the report type and message frequency of reports sent out the serial port when the AirLink device is out of cellular network coverage.

Rev 1 Oct.13

353

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PGPSD

Query or set the delay (in seconds) before the out-of-coverage stream begins sending the messages out the serial port and not into SnF.

AT*PGPSD? to query

AT*PGPSD=n to set

• n=0 (default)

• n=1–255

Note: Any messages put into SnF during this switch-over delay period are sent over the air when coverage is re-acquired.

*PGPSF

*PGPSR

*PPDIST

*PP2DIST

*PP3DIST

*PP4DIST

Note: The two persistent GPS report parameters, *PGPSR and *PGPSF, control the report type and message frequency of reports sent out the serial port when the AirLink device is out of cellular network coverage.

Query or set how frequently (in seconds) the GPS report is sent to the serial link.

AT*PGPSF? to query

AT*PGPSF=n to set

• n= 0–65535

Query or set the GPS report type.

AT*PGPSR? to query

AT*PGPSR=n to set

NMEA reports:

• n=E0—NMEA GGA + VTG

• n=E1—NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC

• n=E2—NMEA GGA+VTG+RMC+GSA+GSV

TAIP reports:

• n=F0—TAIP data

• n=F1—TAIP compact data

• n=F2—TAIP LN report

• n=F3—TAIP TM report

Query or set the GPS report distance interval in 100 meter units. For example, if you entered a value of 635, it would translate to 63,500 meters (63.5 kilometers).

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]DIST? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]DIST=n to set

• n=0 — Disabled

• n=1–65535 — Distance in 100 meter units that the device moves before sending a

GPS report

354 4114514

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PPDISTM

*PP2DISTM

*PP3DISTM

*PP4DISTM

Query or set the GPS report distance Interval in meters.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]DISTM? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]DISTM=n to set

• n=0 — Disabled

• n=100–65535—Distance in meters that the device moves before sending a GPS report

Note: If you enter a value greater than zero, but less than 100, ALEOS rounds it up to 100.

*PPDEVID

*PPFLUSHONEVT

Query or set whether or not the RAP GPS report includes device ID and if so, which type of device ID is included.

AT*PPDEVID? to query

AT*PPDEVID=n to set

• n=0—None

• n=1—Phone number

• n=2—ESN/IMEI

Note: The device ID in the RAP report is in hex, not plain text.

Query or set Send SnF Buffer Immediately on input. If this feature is enabled, any pending stored reports are sent if the I/O input changes, a stationary vehicle is moved, or a maximum speed is exceeded.

AT*PPFLUSHONEVT? to query

AT*PPFLUSHONEVT=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Rev 1 Oct.13

355

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PPGPSR

*PP2GPSR

*PP3GPSR

*PP4GPSR

*PPINPUTEVT

*PP2INPUTEVT

*PP3INPUTEVT

*PP4INPUTEVT

*PPIP

*PP2IP

*PP3IP

*PP4IP

*PPLATS

*PPLATSEXTRA

Query or set the GPS report type.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]GPSR? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]GPSR=n to set

RAP reports:

• n=0 — Use legacy reports specified in *MF value. Note: Must also have *PPDEVID=0.

• n=11 — Standard GPS Report

• n=12 — Standard GPS Report + UTC Date

• n=13 — Standard GPS Report + UTC Date + RF data

• n=14—Standard GPS report + GPS + Date + RF + EIO

Xora reports

• n=D0 — Xora

NMEA reports

• n=E0 — GGA and VTG NMEA reports

• n=E1 — GGA, VTG and RMC NMEA reports

• n=E2 — GGA, VTG, RMC, GSA and GSV NMEA reports

TAIP reports

• n=F0 —TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains position and velocity

• n=F1 —TAIP GPS report that contains the compact position

• n=F2—TAIP LN report—TAIP GPS report that contains a long navigation message

• n=F3—TAIP TM report—TAIP GPS report that contains the time and date

Query or set ability to send a special report for digital input changes.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]INPUTEVT? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]INPUTEVT=n to set

• n=0 — Disable

• n=1 — Enable

Query or set the IP address where GPS reports are sent. See also

*PPPORT on page 358.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]IP? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]IP=d.d.d.d to set

• d.d.d.d=IP address

Example:

AT*PPIP=192.100.100.100

Query or set the local reporting interval (in seconds).

AT*PPLATS? to query

AT*PPLATS=n to set

• n=0—Disable (default)

• n=1–255 (seconds)

Query or set the number of additional consecutive ports that the local GPS report is sent to.

AT*PPLATSEXTRA? to query

AT*PPLATSEXTRA=n to set

• n=0—Just the original report is sent (default).

• n=1–7—Send GPS report copies to that number of ports.

Example: If AT*PPLATSEXTRA=7 and the port in S53 is 1000, then GPS reports will be sent to ports 1000–1008.

356 4114514

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PPLATSR

*PPMAXRETRIES

*PP2MAXRETRIES

*PP3MAXRETRIES

*PP4MAXRETRIES

*PPMINTIME

*PP2MINTIME

*PP3MINTIME

*PP4MINTIME

*PPODOM

*PP2ODOM

*PP3ODOM

*PP4ODOM

*PPODOMVAL

Query or set the GPS report type that is sent to the local client (Ethernet, USB/net, or PPP).

AT*PPLATSR? to query

AT*PPLATSR=n to set

RAP reports:

• n=11—GPS Data

• n=12—GPS + Date

• n=13—GPS + UTC + RF

• n=14—GPS + Date + RF + EIO

NMEA reports:

• n=E0—NMEA GGA + VTG

• n=E1—NMEA GGA + VTG + RMC

• n=E2—NMEA GGA + VTG + RMC + GSA + GSV

TAIP reports:

• n=F0 —TAIP data—TAIP GPS report that contains position and velocity

• n=F1 —TAIP GPS report that contains the compact position

• n=F2—TAIP LN report—TAIP GPS report that contains a long navigation message

• n=F3—TAIP TM report—TAIP GPS report that contains the time and date

Query or set maximum number retries when in Simple Reliable mode, UDP Sequence mode, and TCP transports.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]MAXRETRIES? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]MAXRETRIES=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1–255 retries (Maximum is 10.)

Query or set the minimum amount of time between report packets. Each packet can contain multiple reports. This is useful to limit network traffic and make more efficient use of bandwidth. You can also use it in conjunction with store and forward. The minimum value depends on the policies of the Mobile Network Operator.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]MINTIME? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]MINTIME=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1–65535 seconds

Query or set including the current odometer reading in the RAP report.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]ODOM? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]ODOM=n to set

• n=0—Disabled (default) Do not include odometer reading in report.

• n=1—Enabled Include odometer reading in report.

Query or set the odometer value (in meters). Maximum value is approximately 4.3 billion meters (2.7 million miles).

AT*PPODOMVAL? to query

AT*PPODOMVAL=n to set

• n=0–4294967295 meters

Rev 1 Oct.13

357

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PPPORT

*PP2PORT

*PP3PORT

*PP4PORT

*PPREPORTINPUTS

*PP2REPORTINPUTS

*PP3REPORTINPUTS

*PP4REPORTINPUTS

*PPSIMPLETO

*PP2SIMPLETO

*PP3SIMPLETO

*PP4SIMPLETO

Query or set the port GPS reports are sent to.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]PORT? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]PORT=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1–65535

Query or set input reporting and including the current digital input value in RAP reports.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]REPORTINPUTS? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]REPORTINPUTS=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1—Enabled

Query or set the first retry interval for Simple Reliable, UDP Sequence mode, and TCP transports (in seconds).

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SIMPLETO? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SIMPLETO=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1–255 (Default is 10.)

*PPSNF

*PP2SNF

*PP3SNF

*PP4SNF

*PPSNFR

*PP2SNFR

*PP3SNFR

*PP4SNFR

*PPTAIPID

Query or set the Store and Forward (SNF) setting. SNF causes GPS reports to be stored if the device/vehicle goes outside the area of network coverage. Once the vehicle is in the coverage area, the GPS reports are sent en masse to the server.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SNF? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SNF=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1—Enabled (default)

Query or set Transport /SNF mode. GPS reports are retransmitted if not acknowledged by the server.

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SNFR? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]SNFR=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1—Reliable mode

• n=2—Simple Reliable mode

• n=3—UDP Sequence

• n=4—TCP Listen

• n=5—TCP

Query or set the four character alphanumeric TAIP ID.

AT*PPTAIPID? to query

AT*PPTAIPID=nnnn to set

• nnnn=alphnumeric characters

358 4114514

Table D-9: GPS AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*PPTIME

*PP2TIME

*PP3TIME

*PP4TIME

Query or set the GPS report time interval (in seconds).

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]TIME? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]TIME=n to set

• n=0 – 65535 seconds

Note: Your cellular Mobile Network Operator may impose a minimum transmit time.

See also *PPMINTIME, *PPTSV, +CTA.

Note: A report time of less than 30 seconds may keep an RF link up continuously, tying up an RF resource to transfer small amounts of data. Generally, the RF channel is released and goes dormant in 10–20 seconds if no data is sent or received.

*PPTCPPOLL

*PPTSV

*PP2TSV

*PP3TSV

*PP4TSV

Query or set the port to listen on for TCP GPS report polling.

Note: The request to this port needs to come from the same IP address in

*PPIP on page 356 and uses the report type configured for server 1.

AT*PPTCPPOLL? to query

AT*PPTCPPOLL=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1–65535 (default 9494)

Query or set the time interval in minutes that the device sends in reports when it is stationary (Stationary vehicle timer).

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]TSV? to query

AT*PP[Server number if other than server 1]TSV=n to set

• n=0—Disabled

• n=1–255 minutes

For example, if *PPTIME=10, the device sends GPS reports at least once every 10 seconds while it is moving; however, once it stops moving, it slows the reports down to this *PPTSV value.

Note: In order for the PPTSV (Stationary Vehicle timer) to take effect, the PPTIME value must be set to a value greater than 0 and less than the PPTSV value. The PPTSV timer checks for vehicle movement at the PPTIME interval, so if PPTIME is disabled, then

PPTSV will also be disabled.

Rev 1 Oct.13

Serial

If you have a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed, you can execute many of the serial commands “as is” in a terminal session connected to the specific port for which the command is intended. However, you can explicitly specify which port the command takes effect on by adding a port identifier to the end of the full command.

359

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

If you use the command alone (without the “comma port identifier”) from any nonserial terminal session (for example, telnet), the command takes effect on the main port on the device.

Examples:

ATAIP=1 when executed in a terminal connected to the I/O X-Card serial port, sets the Allow IP Address for the X-Card's serial port.

ATAIP=1,0 when executed in a terminal connected to the I/O X-Card serial port sets the Allow IP Address for the serial port on the device port.

ATAIP=0,1 when executed in a terminal connected to the serial port on the device sets the Allow IP Address for the X-Card's serial port.

ATAIP=0 when executed in a telnet session sets the Allow IP Address for the device's serial port.

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands

Command Description

AIP

\APPP

Query or set the option to allow IP addresses to communicate on UDP over serial.

AT*AIP? to query

AT*AIP=n to set

• n=0 — Allow only the IP address specified in S53 to connect when UDP auto answer is enabled (S82=2)

• n=1 — Allow any incoming IP address to connect when UDP auto answer is enabled

(S82=2)

Always subject to any security filters that may be defined. (See Security on page 344.)

Initiates a PPP connection on serial terminal.

You can also initiate a PPP connection using the ADT command and one of the supported phone numbers.

Note: PPP is not available on the I/O X-Card serial port.

*CTSE

DAE

*DPORT

Query or set asserting Clear To Send (CTS) when there is a network coverage.

AT*CTSE? to query

AT*CTSE=n to set

• n=0 — Disabled (Default)

• n=1 — Enable assertion of CTS when there is network coverage

Query or set AT Escape Sequence detection.

ATDAE? to query

ATDAE=n to set

• n=0 — Enable

• n=1 — Disable (The escape sequence (+++) is ignored.)

Query or set the device port that the device listens on for inbound packets/data/polls.

AT*DPORT? to query

AT*DPORT=n to set

• n=1–65535

360 4114514

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*DU

*ENQ

*HOSTMODE?

Query or set the dial command to only use UDP.

AT*DU? to query

AT*DU=n to set

• n=0 — Dial using the means specified (default)

• n=1 — Dial UDP always, even when using ATDT

When this parameter is set you cannot establish a TCP PAD connection by using the Dial command.

Query or set the option to output an ENQ [0x05] after the TCP CONNECT, delayed by the

Delay Connect Response time (S221).

AT*ENQ? to query

AT*ENQ=n to set

• n=0 — Disable (Default)

• n=1 — Enable ENQ on TCP CONNECT

Query the current host mode.

AT*HOSTMODE? returns:

• AT

• PPP

• TCP

• UDP

Note: If the device is not in AT mode, Telnet into the device to execute this command.

MD

Query or set the default start-up mode for the serial port. When the device is power-cycled, the serial port enters the mode specified by this command after 5 seconds. On startup, typing ATMD0 within 5 seconds changes the mode to normal (AT command) mode. See also S53 to set the port for UDP.

AT*MD? to query

AT*MD=hh to set

• hh (hex byte)=00 — Normal (AT Command mode)

• hh=02 — PPP

• hh=03 — UDP

• hh=04 — TCP

• hh=08 — reverse telnet/ssh

• hh=13 — Modbus ASCII

• hh=23 — Modbus RTU (Binary)

• hh=33 — BSAP

• hh=63 — Variable Modbus

• hh=83 — UDP Multiple Unicast

Note: The I/O X-Card only supports AT, UDP, and TCP.

Rev 1 Oct.13

361

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

MLIST

Add IP addresses to the Modbus address list or query the Modbus address list, using decimal index values.

Format is MLISTIndex(decimal)=IP address

Example: ATMLIST10=123.123.123.123, where:

• 10 is the Index

• 123.123.123.123 is the IP address

MLISTIndex=IP to add an IP address to the list

Including the port number after the IP address is optional. If you include the port number, separate the port number and IP address by a colon.

For example: 10=123.123.123.123:11223

MLIST? to query the Modbus address list; returns the addresses in the list in the format

Index=IP. For example:

10=123.123.123.123

11=124.124.124.124

12=125.125.125.125

13=126.126.126.126

Range for index numbers is 0—65535. The Modbus address list accepts up to 100 entries.

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

MLISTX

Add IP addresses to the Modbus address list or query the Modbus address list, using hexadecimal index values.

Format is MLISTXIndex(hex)=IP address

Example: ATMLISTX000A=123.123.123.123, where:

• 000A is the Index

• 123.123.123.123 is the IP address

MLISTXIndex=IP to add an IP address to the list

Including the port number after the IP address is optional. If you include the port number, separate the port number and IP address by a colon.

For example: 0xA=123.123.123.123:11223

MLISTX? to query the Modbus address list returns; returns the addresses in the list in the format Index=IP. For example:

000A=123.123.123.123

000B=124.124.124.124

000C=125.125.125.125

000D=126.126.126.126

Range for index numbers is 0—FFFF. The Modbus address list accepts up to 100 entries.

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

MVLEN

Query or set the length of the Modbus Variant ID.

ATMVLEN? to query

ATMVLEN=[length of the RTU ID in bytes] to set

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

362 4114514

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

MVMSK

Query or set the Modbus Variant ID Mask (byte hex mask to use when extracting the ID).

This parameter is used when the when the Mode Default ( MD on page 361) is set to hex 63.

ATMVMSK? to query

ATMVMSK=[byte hex mask] to set

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

MVOFF

MVTYP

IPL

*NUMTOIP

Query or set the Modbus (Variable mode) offset in the data where the Modbus ID starts.

ATMVOFF? to query

ATMOFF=n to set

• n= 0–255

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

Query or set the Modbus Variant type (RTU ID data-type in a modbus-variant protocol). This parameter is used when

MD on page 361 is set to 63. It defines the data-type of the RTU ID

in Modbus-like protocol data packets.

ATMVTYP? to query

ATMVTYP=n to set

• n=0—Binary

• n=1—ASCII hex

• n=2—ASCII decimal

Note: This command is not supported on the I/O X-Card serial port.

Query or set the IP list dial.

AT*IPL? to query

AT*IPL=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

This allows you to access to the Modbus IP address list using the first two digits of the dial string.

Example: ATDT1234567 would go to ID “12” on the Modbus list and use the associated IP as the destination.

Query or set the option to convert a 12-digit number to an IP address

For example, converts 111222333444 to 111.222.333.444

AT*NUMTOIP? to query

AT*NUMTOIP=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Rev 1 Oct.13

363

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

S50

S51

S53

S60

S82

Query or set the data forwarding idle time-out.

ATS50? to query

ATS50=n to set

• n=0 — a forwarding time-out of 10ms is used.

• n= tenths of a second

Query or set the PAD data forwarding character. ASCII code of character that causes data to be forwarded. Used in UDP or TCP PAD mode.

ATS51? to query

AT51=CHARACTER to set

• n=0 — No forwarding character

• n= CHARACTER

Query or set the method (dial mode), destination IP address, and port used as defaults for the D (Dial) AT command.

ATS53? to query

ATS53=[method][d.d.d.d][/ppppp] to set

[method] can be:

• P — UDP

• T — TCP

[d.d.d.d] is the destination IP address

[pppp] is the port number.

Example:

ATS53=P111.22.33.44/5555 where:

• The first character is the dial mode (P in this example)

• Followed by destination IP address (111.22.33.44 in this example)

• A slash

• Followed by the destination port (5555 in this example)

You can also use this command to set only the port. For example, AT53=/7777.

Query or set the Telnet Client Echo Mode.

ATS60? to query

ATS60=n to set

• n=0 — No Echo

• n=1 — Local Echo (Default)

• n=2 — Remote Echo

Query or set UDP auto answer.

ATS82? to query

ATS82=n to set

• n=0 — Disable

• n=1 — Enable

364 4114514

Table D-10: Serial AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

S83

TCPS

TCPT

*UALL

*UDPLAST

*USD

Query or set the UDP auto answer idle time-out. If no data is sent or received before the time-out occurs, the current UDP session is terminated. While a session is active, packets from other IP addresses are discarded (unless *UALL is set).

ATS83? to query

ATS83=n to set

• n=0 — No idle time-out (Default)

• n=1 – 255 — Time-out in seconds

Query or set the TCP connection time-out (TCPS) units. If there is no traffic through the

TCP connection for the specified interval, the connection is terminated.

AT*TCPS? to query

AT*TCPS=n to set

• n=0 — minutes

• n=1—seconds

Query or set the interval to terminate a TCP connection when there s no traffic. This value affects only the TCP connection in TCP PAD mode.

AT*TCPT? to query

AT*TCPT=n to set

• n=0–255

Query or set the ability to accept UDP packets from any IP address when a UDP session is active. If there is no UDP session active, an incoming UDP packet will be treated according to the UDP auto answer and AIP settings.

AT*UALL? to query

AT*UALL=n to set

• n=0 — No effect (Default)

• n=1 — Accept UDP data from all IP addresses when in a UDP session

Query or set the option to set S53 to the last accepted IP address through UDP auto answer. This can be used in conjunction with MD3 so that when there is no UDP session, new Ethernet host data will cause a connection to be restored to the last IP accepted through UDP auto answer.

AT*UDPLAST? to query

AT*UDPLAST=n to set

• n=0 — Does not change destination IP (default)

• n=1 — Change destination IP to last received

Query or set the specified delay before sending the UDP packets out the serial port.

AT*USD? to query

AT*USD=n to set

• n=0 — No UDP packet delay (Default)

• n=1 – 255 — Delay in 100ms units, from 100 ms to 25.5 sec.

Rev 1 Oct.13

365

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Standard (Hayes) commands

The following table contains Hayes commands supported on AirLink devices.

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands

Command Description

+++

AT escape sequence (not preceded by AT)

If a serial terminal is in a data mode, typing this sequence on that serial terminal causes the terminal to re-enter AT command mode. There must be an idle time on the serial port before and after the sequence. The idle time is set by the value in S50.

After you type the AT escape sequence, the terminal remains in AT command mode for

15 seconds before it automatically leaves AT command mode and returns to the previous data mode.

Note: The “+” is ASCII character 0x2B.

&C

Note: The detection of this sequence is disabled if DAE=1.

Query or set Data Carrier Detect (DCD) mode.

DCD is a hardware signal that notifies the software that the device is communicating with another device.

AT&C? to query

AT&Cn to set

• n=0 — Always assert DCD

• n=1 — Assert DCD enable when network is ready (default)

If you have a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed, you can query or set the main port on the device or the port on the X-Card by specifying the port number. If no port is specified, the query or command affects the port your are telnetting to.

AT&C?,[p] to query

AT&Cn,[p] to set

• p=0—Main serial port on the device

• p=1—Serial port on the I/O X-Card

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

366 4114514

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

D[method] [d.d.d.d]

[/ppppp] or

D[method] [[@]name]

[/ppppp]

Dial a connection to a remote IP and Port using either UDP, TCP, or Telnet.

method =

P — Establish a UDP connection

T — Establish a TCP connection

N — Establish a Telnet connection

d.d.d.d = IP address to establish connection to

name = Domain name to establish connection to

ppppp = IP port to establish connection to

Examples:

ATD — Dial (establish) default connection per S53

ATDPnnn.nnn.nnn.nnn[/ppppp] — Dial (establish) UDP session to the specified IP address/ port.

If the method, IP address, or port is omitted, the values from S53 are used. If a Telnet connection is requested (N) and the port is not supplied, port 23 will be used instead of the value from S53.

Several special dialing numbers exist to make it easy to establish a PPP connection with the device. ATD#19788 or ATDT#19788 will establish a PPP connection (see

\APPP on page 360).

If a domain name is specified, the ‘@’ symbol can be used to explicitly indicate the start of the name. For example, if “ATDPHONY” is issued, this will be interpreted as dial a UDP connection to “HONY”. To dial using the default method to host “PHONY”, one would issue

“ATD@PHONY”.

To end the connection, issue the +++ escape sequence or drop the DTR line (if Ignore DTR

S211=0 or &D2).

Note: The source port of the session is the Device Port (set by *DPORT).

&D

Query or set Data Terminal Ready (DTR) mode.

AT&D? to query

AT&Dn to set

• n=0 — Devices ignores DTR, same effect as HW DTR always asserted (same as

S211=1); DTD is assumed to be on.

• n=1 — DRT drop causes the device to switch to AT command mode, but does not drop the connection.

• n=2 — DTR drop causes the connection to drop.

• n=3—DTR drop causes the connection to reinitialize.

If you have a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed, you can query or set the main port on the device or the port on the X-Card by specifying the port number. If no port is specified, the query or command affects the port your are telnetting to.

AT&D?,[p] to query

AT&Dn,[p] to set

• p=0—Main serial port on the device

• p=1—Serial port on the I/O X-Card

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

Rev 1 Oct.13

367

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*DATZ

E

Query or set the option to block device reset using ATZ.

AT*DATZ? to query

AT*DATZ=n to set

• n=0 — Off. Block is disabled—ATZ resets the device. (default)

• n=1 — On. Block is enabled—ATZ does not reset the device.

Toggle AT command echo mode.

ATE? to query

ATEn to set

• n=0 — Echo Off; does not echo commands to the computer

• n=1 — Echo On; echoes commands to the computer (so you can see what you type)

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

H

HOR

Q

ATH hangs up, immediately terminates the session (PAD or PPP).

Half-Open Response — In UDP auto answer (half-open) mode.

AT*HOR? to query

AT*HOR=n to set

• n=0 — No response codes when UDP session is initiated

• n=1 — RING CONNECT response codes sent out serial link before the data from the first UDP packet

Note: Quiet Mode must be Off.

Query or set AT quiet-mode. If quiet mode is set, there is no responses to AT commands except for data queried.

ATQ? to query

ATQn to set

• n=0 — Off (Default)

• n=1 — Quiet-mode on

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

368 4114514

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

\Q

Query or set the serial port flow control.

AT\Q? to query

AT\Qn to set

• n=0 — No flow control

• n=1 — Hardware flow control

• n=4 — Transparent software flow control

If you have a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed, you can query or set the main port on the device or the port on the X-Card by specifying the port number. If no port is specified, the query or command affects the port your are telnetting to.

AT\Q?,[p] to query

AT\Qn,[p] to set

• p=0—Main serial port on the device

• p=1—Serial port on the I/O X-Card

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

&S

S0

Query or set DSR.

AT&S? to query

AT&Sn to set

• n=0—Always assert

• n=1—Assert DSR while in data mode (UDP, TCP, PPP)

If you have a GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed, you can query or set the main port on the device or the port on the X-Card by specifying the port number. If no port is specified, the query or command affects the port your are telnetting to.

AT&S?,[p] to query

AT&Sn,[p] to set

• p=0—Main serial port on the device

• p=1—Serial port on the I/O X-Card

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

Query or set TCP auto answer (the number of rings required before the device automatically answers a call).

ATS0? to query

ATS0n to set

• n=0— Disable

• n=1—Enable

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

Rev 1 Oct.13

369

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

S23

Configure Serial Port

ATS23? to query

ATS23=[speed],[data bits][parity][stop bits] to set

Speed:

• 300

• 1200

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600

• 19200

• 38400

• 57600

• 115200

Data bits:

• 7

• 8

Parity:

• O=Odd

• E=Even

• N=None

• M=Mark

Stop bits:

• 1

• 1.5

• 2

Example:

ATS23=115200,8N1 (Sets the device to 115200, etc.)

The settings take effect after reset.

Note: Must be 8 data bits for PPP mode.

S211

S221

For applications or situations where hardware control of the DTR signal is not possible, the device can be configured to ignore DTR. When Ignore DTR is enabled, the device operates as if the DTR signal is always asserted.

ATS211? to query

ATS211=n to set

• n=0—Use hardware DTR (default)

• n=1—Ignore DTR

• n=3—Ignore DTR and assert DSR.

Query or set the Connect Delay—the number of seconds to delay the connect response when establishing a TCP connection.

ATS211? to query

ATS211=n to set

• n=0–255

370 4114514

Table D-11: Standard (Hayes) AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

V

Query or set the AT command responses (verbosity).

ATV? to query

ATVn to set

• n=0 — Numeric (terse) command responses (The numeric responses follow the Hayes

Standards for commands.)

• n=1 — Text string (verbose) command responses (default)

Note: Do not use an equal sign (=) when issuing the command.

&V

&W

X

Z

Lists most AT commands and their current values. If the parameter is not configured, the AT command returns “Not Set”.

Saves the settings for parameters that are temporarily set without being permanently written to the memory.

This command does not apply to ALEOS because once you issue an AT command or change a setting in ACEmanager and click Apply, the changes are saved in non-volatile memory and are persist across reboots.

Query or set the Extended Call Process Result mode

ATX? to query

ATXn to set

• n=0 — No extended code (default)

• n=1 — Adds the text 19200 to the connect response

Reboots the AirLink device.

Note: If *DATZ is set to 1, Z is blocked. See *DATZ on page 368.

I/O

Table D-12: Input / Output AT Commands

Command Description

*ANALOGIN[n]?

Query individual analog input values (in volts).

AT*ANALOGIN[n]?

• n=1–4

Note: Four analog inputs are available on an AirLink GX Series device with an I/O X-Card installed. To confirm that an I/O X-Card is installed, check the X-Card Type field on Status >

Home.

One analog input is available on the AirLink LS300.

Rev 1 Oct.13

371

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table D-12: Input / Output AT Commands (Continued)

Command Description

*DIGITALIN[n]?

Query individual digital inputs. The digital inputs report either a 0 (open) or 1 (closed).

AT*DIGITALIN[n]?

• n=1–5 (Input number)

Volts

-0.5 –1.2

1.3 – 30

0

Digital value

1

*PULSECNT[n]?

*RELAYOUT[#]

Note: Digital inputs 2, 3, 4, and 5 are only available on an AirLink GX Series device with an

I/O X-Card installed. To confirm that an I/O X-Card is installed, check the X-Card Type field on Status > Home.

Query the I/O pulse counts for digital in.

AT*PULSECNT[n]?

• n=1–5

Note: Pulse counts 2–5 are only available on a GX Series device with an I/O card installed.

Query or set the relay status.

AT*RELAYOUT[#]? to query

AT*RELAYOUT[#]=n to set

• # = 1–5

• n=0—OFF

• n=1—Drive Active Low

Note: Relay outputs 3, 4, and 5 are only available on an AirLink GX Series device with an

I/O X-Card installed. To confirm that an I/O X-Card is installed, check the X-Card Type field on Status > Home.

Applications

Table D-13: Applications > Data Usage Commands

Command Description

*DATACURDAY?

*DATAPLANUNITS

Display data usage for the current day (in KB).

Query or set the units for the data usage report

AT*DATAPLANUNITS to query

AT*DATAPLANUNITS=n to set

• n=1—Sets the units to Megabytes (MB)

• n=2—Sets the units to Kilobytes (KB)

372 4114514

Table D-13: Applications > Data Usage Commands

Command Description

*DATAPREVDAY?

*DATAUSAGEENABLE

*GARMINATTACH

*GARMINSTATUS?

Query the data usage for the previous day (in KB).

Query or set enabling Data Usage.

AT*DATAUSAGEENABLE? to query

AT*DATAUSAGEENABLE=n to set

• n=0—Data Usage disabled

• n=1—Data Usage enabled

Query or set the ability to connect a Garmin device to the serial port (so the Garmin

device can communicate with a remote server). For more information, see Garmin on page 248.

AT*GARMINATTACH? to query

AT*GARMINATTACH=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Query Garmin device attachment status.

Admin

Table 4-14: Admin > Advanced Commands

Command Description

*BLOCK_RESET_CONFIG

Query or set the ability to block resetting the device to factory default settings using the hardware Reset button.

AT*BLOCK_RESET_CONFIG? to query

AT*BLOCK_RESET_CONFIG=n to set

• n=0—Reset button can be used to reset the device to factory default settings.

(default).

• n=1—Device cannot be reset to factory default settings using the Reset button on the device.

Note: This command only blocks the ability to reset to defaults using the Reset button on the device. You can still reset the device to the factory default settings using the “Reset to Factory Default” button in ACEmanager or the

*RESETCFG

AT command.

*BOARDTEMP?

*DATE?

Query the temperature of the internal hardware, in degrees Celsius.

Query the internal clock. The date and time are always specified in a 24-hour notation.

AT*DATE? to query

Note: In AirLink devices, the GPS and/or cellular connection is used to set the time.

Rev 1 Oct.13

373

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Table 4-14: Admin > Advanced Commands

Command

*MSCIUPADDR

Description

Query or set the IP address or FQDN and port that periodic device status updates are sent to.

AT*MSCIUPADDR[IP address or FQDN][/port]? to query

AT*MSCIUPADDR=[IP address or FQDN][/port] to set

Examples: 192.168.14.100/3333

MyDevice.com/3333

*MSCIUPDPERIOD

NSLOOKUP

*POWERIN?

*RESETCFG

Query or set the device status update interval (in seconds). Thsi specifies how

frequently the device status update is sent to the port configured in *MSCIUPADDR

.

AT*MSCIUPDPERIOD? to query

AT*MSCIUPDPERIOD=n to set

• n=0 — Disabled

• n=1–255 seconds

Immediately performs an NSLookup on the supplied FQDN.

ATNSLOOKUP=[FQDN]

Query the voltage input to the internal hardware.

AT*RESTCFG resets the device to factory default settings.

Important:

There is no confirmation requested. The AT command takes effect immediately.

*REMOTELOG

*SECUREMODE

Exports the log file to a remote destination (Syslog Server). Specifying the port is option. If the port is not specified, the default port, 514, is used.

AT*REMOTELOG=SYSLOG SERVER IP,PORT

Query or set the secure mode that blocks most ports (and ICMP) for over-the-air

(OTA) or OTA and local to prevent unwanted access to the device.

AT*SECUREMODE? to query

AT*SECUREMODE=n to set

• n=0 Off; normal behavior

• n=1 Disables:

• Web management ports (ACEmanager and AVMS access) from the OTA interface

• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), used for PING, for OTA and Wi-Fi

• n=2 Disables:

• Web management ports from the Over-the-air (OTA) interface

• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) for OTA and Wi-Fi

• ICMP for local ports (Ethernet, USB, and Serial)

Note: Telnet and SSH ALEOS ports remain open regardless of the secure mode setting. This enables you to connect an AT console to manage the device. DHCP and

DNS ports also remain open to allow the device to provide IP addresses to hosts and relay the DNS service.

374 4114514

Table 4-14: Admin > Advanced Commands

Command

*SYSRESETS?

*USBBYPASS

Description

Query the number of resets since the device was reset to factory default settings.

Query or set Radio Passthru mode.

AT*USBBYPASS? to query

AT*USBBYPASS=n to set

• n=0—Disable

• n=1—Enable

Rev 1 Oct.13

375

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

376 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

E: SMS Commands

SMS mode

Password Only

Control Only

Gateway Only

Control and Gateway

SMS Command format

PW [Password] [Prefix][Command or Command parameter1]

[Command parameter2 (if applicable)] [Command parameter n]

Note: There is no space between the prefix and the command (or the 1st command parameter in the case of multi-parameter commands). There must be a single space between all other fields to act as a delimiter.

The default password is the last 4 digits of the SIM ID number (for

SIM-based devices) and the last 4 digits of the ESN (for non-SIM devices). If you do not know the SIM ID or ESN number, you can find it in ACEmanager on the Status > WAN/Cellular page.

The default prefix is “&&&”.

Whether or not a password and prefix are required varies depending on the SMS mode selected in ACEmanager.

Password

(configurable in all modes)

Always required

Required when sending from a non-trusted phone number

Always required

Required when sending from a non-trusted phone number

Prefix

Required

Use default (not configurable)

Prefix is configurable.

The prefix can be omitted if the ALEOS

Command Prefix field in ACEmanager

(Services > SMS) is configured to be blank.

Required

Use default (not configurable)

Required

Configurable, but cannot be blank

When an SMS command is received, the AirLink device performs the action requested and sends a response back to the phone number from which it received the SMS.

For more examples and detailed instructions, see

SMS on page 157.

E

377

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Command

List of SMS Commands

Action Result

Note: Some responses start with “reply from [device name]:” However, this feature is currently unavailable for the

Enable, GPS, Provision, AVMS, and AVMSCHECKIN commands.

[prefix]enable <value>

[prefix]status

[prefix]reset

Enable/disable the device(s) being managed by AVMS.

“AVMS enable set to status:” <value>

<value>=0 Disable

<value>=1 Enable

None

Resets the device 30 seconds after the first response message is sent.

status IP

[Network IP] [Network Status]:

[technology type] RSS signalled

Lat = [Latitude]

Long = [Longitude]

Time = [hh:mm:ss]

First message: Reset in 30 seconds

Second message: Status message when back up.

[prefix]relay x y

[prefix] GPS

Sets the applicable relay to the desired setting.

The device replies with its current GPS location.

relay x set to y x can be 1 y can be 0 or 1 (Off or Drive active low)

The device sends a link to a map showing its location. You can copy the link into a browser to view the location, or if the SMS is sent from a smartphone, you can click the link to view the map.

[prefix]Provision <APN> <Network

User ID> <Network Password>

After the unit is installed and the SIM card inserted, you can use this command to provision the account.

Note: You can omit any of the above fields by using a leading or single period

(.) for that parameter.

“provision”

“apn:” <APN>

“user ID” <Network User ID>

“PW” <Network Password>

Note: Use of this command is valid for

LTE, HSPA, and GPRS networks, but not valid for CDMA only networks.

378 4114514

Command Action

[prefix]AVMS <server> <interval>

Note: All of the above must be on a single line. The interval must be greater than 0.

Omitting any field results in a response of

“not set” and the configuration parameter does not change.

Modifies the AVMS server’s

URL and AVMS communication period

(interval in minutes)

Result

“AVMS”

“srv:” <Server>

“interval:” <Interval>

[prefix]AVMSCHECKIN

Prompts the device to communicate with the AVMS server. Once AirVantage

Management Service receives the heartbeat message, it can respond and send an MSCI command to the device (i.e Write/Read/

Firmware Update).

“AVMS connection requested”

Rev 1 Oct.13

379

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

380 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

F: Q & A and Troubleshooting

ACEmanager Web UI

The ACEmanager window is not displaying properly.

1.

Ensure the you are using a supported browser. See page 17 for a

list of supported browsers.

2.

Hold the Shift key + click the Refresh button. This reloads the page, while ignoring what is in the cache.

If the problem persists:

Clear the cache. (The procedure varies, depending on the browser.)

Restart the browser.

Restart your computer.

F

Ethernet Ports

My GX Series device has a Ethernet X-Card installed, but the ports are not working, and the Ethernet LEDs are not lit.

1.

Launch ACEmanager.

2.

Go to the LAN tab.

3.

Select DHCP/Addressing in the menu on the left of the screen.

4.

In the Host Connection Mode field, ensure that Ethernet Uses

Public IP is not select.

If “Ethernet Uses Public IP” is selected in the Host Connection Mode field, the Ethernet ports are disabled.

What do the LEDs above the Ethernet port mean?

There are two LEDs at the top of the Ethernet port. The green on is lit when there is a cable connected to the host and the connection is running at 100baseT. The amber (activity) LED blinks when traffic is passing through the port.

LAN Networks

The server on my LAN network is receiving data from some hosts on the network, but not others. What’s wrong?

381

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

If you have a network with multiple LAN hosts that are sending data to the same server and the server is not receiving data from one (or more) of the hosts, it may be because the Mobile Network Operator has a WAN firewall that is blocking the ports used by the NAT for over-the-air (OTA) destinations.

To correct this problem:

1.

Launch ACEmanager.

2.

Go to the LAN/WiFi tab.

3.

Select Ethernet.

4.

Refer to the instructions for setting the

Starting Ephemeral Port on page 76.)

Wi-Fi

My GX Series device has a Wi-Fi X-Card installed, and I have it configured to act as an access point, but I don’t see an option to use

WEP encryption.

1.

Launch ACEmanager.

2.

Go to the LAN/WiFi tab.

3.

Select WiFi.

4.

In the Enable Access Point field, change the value from “b/g/n Enabled” to “b/ g Enabled”.

Once this change is made, an “Open WEP” section appears below the WiFi

Configuration section.

WEP encryption is only supported on 802.11b and 802.11g. It is not supported on

802.11n.

Port Forwarding

I set up port forwarding rules. I did not receive an error message, but it seems that data is not being forwarded.

If the Public Start Port and Public End Port fields are not set up correctly, data is not forwarded.

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Security > Port Forwarding.

If you are forwarding data to a single port:

·

Ensure that the value in the Public Start Port field is

not

0.

·

Ensure that the value in the Public End Port field

is

0.

·

Ensure that the value in the Private Port start field is

not

0.

If you are forwarding data to a range of ports:

1.

Ensure that the value in the Public Start Port field is not 0.

·

Ensure that the value in the Public End Port field is greater than the value in

Public Start Port field.

·

Ensure that the value in the Private Port Start field is not 0.

For complete instructions, see

Port Forwarding on page 133.

382 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

ALEOS Application Framework (ALEOS AF)

I’m unable to load an application from ALEOS AF.

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Services > Telnet/SSH.

2.

In the AT Server Mode field, select Telnet.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Re-try loading the application from ALEOS AF.

SMS

I tried to send an SMS message, and received an error code. What does the error code mean?

201

202

203

204

The following acknowledgment error codes may appear if your message was not successfully sent:

Code: Explanation:

100 Not in coverage (no cellular service)

Parse Error on field #1 (Start Field)

Parse Error on field #2 (Phone number and separator)

Parse Error on field #3 (Data type and separator)

Parse Error on field #4 (Payload length and separator)

205

301

Parse Error on field #5 (Message and End Field)

No buffers available

302 SMS queue full

Supported SMS data types are ASCII, 8-bit, and Unicode, and are all casesensitive. SMS messages being sent MUST be in ASCII hex format.

I tried to send an SMS command and received the error “not set”.

The parameter was not changed.

Check the format of the SMS command. There should be no space between the prefix and the command (or the 1st command parameter in the case of multiparameter commands), and a single space between all other fields to act as a

delimiter. For more information, see SMS Commands on page 377 and

SMS on page 157.

GPS

I set the GPS Reports Port field on the GPS > Local Streaming window to stream GPS data to a USB port, but I don't see GPS data on the USB port.

The GPS streaming feature works with serial devices. To stream data to a USB port, you must first configure the USB port to act as a serial device.

383

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

1.

In ACEmanager, go to the LAN > USB tab.

2.

In the USB Device Mode field, select USB Serial.

3.

Click Apply.

If you have not already done so:

1.

Go to GPS > Local Streaming.

2.

In the GPS Reports port field, select one of the following:

·

USB Serial

·

DB9 and USB

3.

Click Apply.

4.

After you have made all the configuration changes, reboot the device.

Error Reporting

I set up ACEmanager to send an email/SMS report, but when I clicked the Test report button no report was sent.

After you set up the error reporting fields and click Apply, wait about a minute before you click the Test report button. The AirLink device needs this time to apply the new configuration.

VPN

I followed the instruction for setting up an SSL tunnel for a VPN, including loading the root certificate, but I cannot connect to the

VPN.

Ensure that the file name used for the root certificate is home.crt.

Ensure that you have the correct root certificate for the device you want to communicate with over the VPN.

Although the same file name is used for all root certificates, each device has its own unique root certificate file. To set up communication with a device over an SSL tunnel VPN, you must load the specific root certificate file for that device.

My VPN connection is not working. When I try to debug it using the logs on the Admin page, VPN information does not show up in the log.

VPN information is collected in the Linux logs. To view this information:

1.

Log into ACEmanager as "user" and go to Admin > Log.

384 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

2.

In the drop-down menu beside Linux Syslog, ensure that Display is selected.

If you change the setting:

a.

Click Apply.

b.

Reboot the device.

3.

Click View Log.

4.

On the View Log page, click Clear and then click Refresh.

Poor Wireless Network Connection

ACE manager indicates that my AirLink device has a poor wireless connection. What can I do to improve it?

For GSM or CDMA networks:

1.

Check the RSSI value. If ACEmanager (Status screen) indicates a good RSSI value, go to step

2 . If it indicates a poor RSSI value:

·

Check the antenna connection.

·

Make sure you have the correct antenna for the device.

·

You may be in an area with poor coverage. Check with your Mobile Network

Operator, or if possible, try moving the AirLink device to a new location.

2.

Check the Ec/Io value. If ACEmanager (Status screen) indicates a poor Ec/Io value:

·

This may be a temporary network problem caused by local interference.

·

A nearby laptop or other electronic equipment may be interfering with the signal. Try moving the AirLink device to a different location.

For LTE networks:

385

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

386

1.

Check the RSSI value. If ACEmanager (Status screen) indicates a good RSSI value, go to step

2 . If it indicates a poor RSSI value:

·

Check the antenna connection.

·

Make sure you have the correct antenna for the device.

·

Try moving the AirLink device to a different location.

2.

Check the RSRP value. If ACEmanager (Status screen) indicates a good

RSRP value, go to step 3 . If it indicates a poor RSRP value:

·

This may be a temporary network problem caused by local interference.

·

Check the antenna connection.

·

Make sure you have the correct antenna for the device.

·

You may be in an area with poor coverage. Check with your Mobile Network

Operator, or if possible, try moving the AirLink device to a new location.

3.

Check the RSRQ value. If ACEmanager (Status screen) indicates a poor

RSRQ value:

·

A nearby laptop or other electronic equipment may be interfering with the signal. Try moving the AirLink device to a different location.

Connection not working

My device appears to be connected to the host, but no data is being transferred.

1.

Check to see if MAC filtering is enabled (Security > MAC Filtering).

2.

If MAC filtering is enabled:

Ensure that the MAC Address for the host in question is on the Allowed List.

Ensure that there are no typos in the MAC Address.

Or

If it is not required, disable MAC Filtering and reboot the device.

My host device is unable to connect to the Internet, even when there is good cellular network coverage and ALEOS can Ping an external

IP address.

1.

Check the DNS proxy setting described on

page 94

.

You may need to change this setting to Disable so that all connected hosts acquire the Mobile Network Operator-defined DNS server as the first DNS server. The AirLink device is not used as the DNS resolver.

Updating the ALEOS Software and Radio

Module Firmware

When I am trying to update the radio module firmware, the connection times out and I cannot reconnect to the device.

Depending on the file size and the connection speed, it can take 10 to 20 minutes to upload and install the radio module firmware. While this is taking place, you may see a “connection timed out” message. You can ignore this message, as the

4114514

connection is still valid and the firmware update process is continuing. If you are connected to the device over-the-air, you will not be able to access the device until the radio module update is complete.

1.

Continue to wait for the process to complete and the device to reboot.

· Do Not

reset the device.

· Do Not

disconnect the power.

· Do Not

click Cancel.

2.

If after 20 minutes, the device does not reboot, contact Sierra Wireless

Technical Support.

During the radio module firmware update, I see an “X” beside

Applying Firmware and a message similar to the following:

“MD5 of rmfw mismatch MD5 of expected package

MC8705_1101440_T1043D.bin” under Applying Firmware.

Rev 1 Oct.13

The radio module firmware file selected is not the correct one for the device.

1.

Make a note of the file name at the end of the error message. (In this example, MC8705_1101440_T1043D.bin) This is the correct radio module firmware file for the device you are updating.

2.

Close the Firmware window.

3.

Reboot the device.

This returns the device to the original ALEOS software and radio module firmware versions.

4.

Update the ALEOS software and radio module firmware as described on

page 31

, using the correct file for the radio module firmware update. (If you do not have the correct file, you can download it from www.sierrawireless.com/

Support/Downloads.aspx

.)

387

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

5.

If it still fails, even when you use the correct file, there may have been a problem downloading the file, and it may be corrupted. Download the file again from www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads.aspx

and try again.

If it still fails, contact your FSE or Sierra Wireless Support.

When I try to update the ALEOS software, the process gets “stuck” in the initialization phase.

388

If the update remains in the initialization phase for more than 5 minutes, as shown in the preceding illustration:

1.

Close the Firmware window.

2.

Reboot the device.

This returns the device to the original ALEOS software and radio module firmware versions.

3.

Update the ALEOS software and radio module firmware as described on

page 31

.

4114514

When I try to update the ALEOS software or the radio module firmware over-the-air, the process appears “stuck” at either the

Uploading Firmware or Applying Firmware phase.

Rev 1 Oct.13

When you are updating the radio module over-the-air, the The radio shuts down during the update and therefore is unable to send the update status to ALEOS.

Wait for the process to complete and the device to reboot. (This could take up to

20 minutes).

1.

Once the device has rebooted, log in to ACEmanager.

2.

Go to Status > About and confirm that the software/firmware has been updated.

389

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

When I try to update the firmware, I see an “X” beside Applying

Firmware and the error message “Cannot install firmware invalid RM

FW version”.

The firmware version you are trying to install is not supported by the device.

Contact your Sierra Wireless assistance.

390 4114514

When I try to install ALEOS 4.3.2a using ACEmanager, I see the following message: “Firmware update (Incremental) failed - Core mismatch”.

Rev 1 Oct.13

ALEOS 4.3.2 is an important intermediate update step that all devices must go through before you can update them to a version of ALEOS that is newer than

4.3.2.

This message appears when the device you are trying to update has ALEOS version 4.3.1 (or older) and you are attempting to update it to ALEOS 4.3.2a directly without first installing ALEOS 4.3.2.

To correct the problem:

1.

Click Cancel.

2.

Close ACEmanager, re-launch it, and log in.

3.

Click the Firmware link

4.

First update to ALEOS 4.3.2, and then update to ALEOS 4.3.2a-I. (For

detailed instructions, see page 28

.)

391

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

When I open the Firmware window, part of it appears to be missing.

392

If the Firmware window is not displaying properly:

Reboot the device and try again.

Or

Close ACEmanager, reopen it in Firefox

®

(rather than Internet Explorer

®

) and try again.

When I run the firmware update, it looks as if the device is applying the firmware before the firmware upload is complete. Is this going to prevent the firmware from updating properly?

This is a known issue in the User Interface. The firmware update is not affected.

Even though the progress circle beside Uploading Firmware does not change to a check mark before the next process circle appears beside Applying Firmware, the firmware upload does complete before the device begins applying the firmware.

4114514

When I try to update the radio module using AVMS, I receive an error message.

The following table provides a brief explanation of the firmware update error messages.

Error message

Cannot Install Firmware

Meaning Corrective action

The system has encountered errors from which it cannot recover and requires at least a reboot before trying to update again.

Press the reset button for 20 seconds to reset the device to the factory default settings and try again. If it still does not work, contact AVMS support a

.

Link not up in 3 minutes...Exiting

Unable to download JUD file from <url>

The radio module was not able to establish the connection in 3 minutes. The update has been aborted, but can be relaunched as soon as the connection is OK.

Wait for network connectivity and then try again.

The URL is wrong, or the download failed

(interruption, no space left...).

Contact AVMS support a

.

Core version not found in

JUD file

Unable to download ALEOS firmware from <url>

Undefined ALEOS firmware

URL

JUD file is not valid. Core Version is a mandatory field.

Firmware URL is not valid, or the download failed.

ALEOS firmware URL not specified, so firmware cannot be retrieved.

There is a problem with the package on the AVMS server. Contact AVMS support a

.

Required information (URL,

Size or MD5) is missing from

JUD file

Cannot perform upgrade —

No space left on device

JUD file is not valid. URL, Size, and MD5 sum of the firmware package are mandatory fields.

Firmware is larger than available space for the download.

There is a problem with the package on the AVMS server. Contact AVMS support a

.

Contact AVMS support a

. The support team will need to access the device to clear space, or you can return the device to Sierra Wireless under an

RMA.

Retry. If the download fails several times, contact AVMS support a

. The support team will need a log from the device.

Contact AVMS support a

to confirm that there is not a problem with the service.

Rev 1 Oct.13

393

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Error message

Radio Module package MD5 sum is missing from JUD file

Meaning

JUD file is not valid. The Radio Module

Firmware MD5 sum is a mandatory field.

Corrective action

ALEOS firmware MD5 check failed

Unable to apply ALEOS firmware and

Unable to apply ALEOS firmware (retry)

The downloaded firmware package failed the integrity check. The update is aborted.

There is a problem with the package on the device or the download may have failed. Restart the firmware download. If the problem persists, contact AVMS support a

. There may be a problem with the package on the AVMS server.

ALEOS firmware could not be applied. Check the ALEOS log messages to determine exactly why the update failed.

Retry. If the problem persists, contact

AVMS support a

and provide them with the log messages.

Radio Module URL is missing from JUD file

JUD file is not valid. The Radio Module

Firmware URL is a mandatory field.

There is a problem with the package on the AVMS server. Contact AVMS support a

.

There is a problem with the package on the AVMS server. Contact AVMS support a

.

Radio Module firmware MD5 check failed

The downloaded firmware package failed the integrity check. The update is aborted.

Radio Module backup failed The radio module was saved to prevent a power failure. If the firmware cannot be backed-up on persistent storage, the firmware update will not proceed because of the risk that the radio module update will not be able to finish if interrupted.

There is a problem with the package on the device or the download may have failed. Try downloading the file again. If the problem persists, contact AVMS support a

. There may be a problem with the package on the AVMS server.

Contact AVMS support a

. The support team will need to access the device to clear space, or you can return the device to Sierra Wireless under an

RMA.

Radio Module firmware download failed

Undefined Radio Module firmware URL

Firmware URL is not valid, or download failed.

Retry several times. If the problem persists, contact AVMS support a

. The support team will need a log from the device.

The URL cannot be retrieved. The update is aborted.

Retry. If the problem persists, contact

AVMS support a

.

Radio Module firmware update failed

Radio module firmware could not be applied.

Check the ALEOS log messages to determine exactly why the update failed.

Retry. If the problem persists, contact

AVMS support a

.

a.

AVMS technical support: https://issues.m2mop.net

TCP Connections

I went to the TCP section of the Serial screen and configured ALEOS to include the Device ID in TCP connections, but I get the message “Device ID Not Set”.

Setting the TCP connection to include the Device ID is a two step process:

1.

In ACEmanager, go to Serial > TCP and ensure that the Include Device ID on

TCP Connect field is set to Enable.

(See

Port Configuration on page 221.)

394 4114514

2.

Go to GPS > Global Settings > General and configure the Use Device ID in

Location Reports field. (See

Global Settings on page 204.)

To confirm that the Device ID is configured, check the Status > About screen. The

Device ID, if set, appears in the GPS/RAP Device ID field.

AirVantage Management Service

I don’t understand the message that appears in the Status field in the

Services > AVMS window.

The error messages in the Services > AVMS > Status field can be due to a communication failure, a problem with the AVMS server, or a failure when parsing a valid AVMS server response. The following table describes the error messages and the corrective action.

Error message Meaning Corrective action

Communication Failure Errors

Initialization error The transfer object could not be initialized.

Unsupported protocol The AVMS server URL protocol is not supported.

Contact AVMS support a

.

Timeout was reached

In ACEmanager, check the AVMS URL in the

Service > AVMS > Server URL field. The default value is http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci/com .

Contact AVMS support a

.

Failed initialization

URL using bad/illegal format or missing URL

The AVMS server URL is missing or not properly formatted.

In ACEmanager, check the AVMS URL in the

Service > AVMS > Server URL field. The default value is http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci/com .

Couldn't resolve host name The AVMS server URL could not be resolved.

In ACEmanager, check the AVMS URL in the

Service > AVMS > Server URL field. The default value is http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci/com .

Also check the cellular connectivity.

Couldn't connect to server

The transfer library could not be initialized.

Connection to the AVMS server

URL failed.

The transfer timeout (equal to the communication period if defined or

5 minutes) expired.

In ACEmanager, check the AVMS URL in the

Service > AVMS > Server URL field. The default value is http://na.m2mop.net/device/msci/com .

Also check the cellular connectivity.

Check cellular connectivity.

Server returned nothing (no headers, no data)

Unrecognized or bad HTTP

Content or Transfer-Encoding

Out of memory

No data was received from the

AVMS server.

The AVMS server http response contains a mal-formed content or transfer-encoding header field.

A memory allocation problem occurred.

Check cellular connectivity.

Contact AVMS support

Contact AVMS support a a

.

.

AVMS Server Errors

Rev 1 Oct.13

395

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Error message Meaning Corrective action

HTTP error '500' AVMS server reported error 500 in the HTTP response.

Refer to the available AVMS server documentation for a list of all possible error codes and their significance.

Error message indicating a failure when parsing a valid AVMS server response

XML processing error The content of a valid AVMS server response cannot be parsed.

AVMS server responses are mal-formatted.

Contact AVMS support a

.

a.

AVMS technical support: https://issues.m2mop.net

LTE Networks

How do I interpret the number shown in the Band Class field on the

Status > WAN Cellular window for a device on an LTE network?

Use the following table to interpret the values in the LTE Band Class field in

ACEmanager (STATUS > WAN Cellular).

Band Class number

Uplink frequency range

(MHz)

120 1920–1980

Downlink frequency range

(MHz)

2110–2170

121

122

123

124

1850–1910

1710–1785

1710–1755

824–849

1930–1990

1805–1880

2110–2155

869–894

129

130

131

132

125

126

127

128

133

134–135

136

137

138

830–840

2500–2570

880–915

1749.9–1784.9

1710–1770

1427.9–1452.9

698–716

777–787

788–798

Reserved for bands 15 and 16

704–716

815–830

830–845

875–885

2620–2690

925– 960

1844.9–1879.9

2110–2170

1475.9–1500.9

728–746

746–756

758–768

734–746

860–875

875–890

396 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

Band Class number

Uplink frequency range

(MHz)

Downlink frequency range

(MHz)

139

140

141–151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

832–862

1447.9–1462.9

Reserved for bands 22 to 32

1900–1920 1900–1920

2010–2025

1850–1910

1930–1990

1910–1930

2570–2620

1880–1920

2300–2400

791–821

1495.9–1510.9

2010–2025

1850–1910

1930–1990

1910–1930

2570–2620

1880–1920

2300–2400

How do I obtain and interpret SINR values for LTE networks?

You can use the AT*CELLINFO? command to obtain an SINR (Signal to

Interference plus Noise Ratio) value. (See *CELLINFO2?

on page 323.)

The values vary depending on the network characteristics and the AirLink device, but in general, a positive value provides usable throughput. The following table provides guidelines for interpreting SINR values.

SINR Value

<

0

0 to 5

6 to 10

> 10

Poor

Fair

Good

Excellent

Throughput

If the SINR value indicates poor throughput:

Move the antenna away from noisy equipment.

Move closer to the nearest cell tower line of sight, or further away from the interfering cell tower.

SIM Card is Blocked

My SIM card has a PIN number. I’ve entered the wrong PIN several times and now the SIM card is blocked.

AirLink products do not support Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) entry. However, if you need to unblock the SIM card:

1.

Contact your Mobile Network Operator to obtain the PUK.

397

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

2.

Remove the SIM card from the AirLink device and insert it in a cell phone that accommodates a MiniSIM (2FF) card.

3.

Enter the PUK to unblock the SIM card and then return the SIM card to the

AirLink device.

Note: Be careful when entering the PUK. You have a limited number of attempts to enter the correct PUK (generally 10) before the SIM card is permanently disabled and a new SIM card is required. If the PUK does not unblock the SIM card after the first few attempts, contact your Mobile Network Operator.

Remote connections

I cannot connect to the AirLink device remotely over the Mobile

Network Operator’s Private Network via the Web UI, although I can connect to it locally.

Some Mobile Network Operators' private networks have restrictions on the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. This is more prevalent with LTE networks.

Possible solutions:

Use your Mobile Network Operator’s public network.

Ask your Mobile Network Operator to reduce the MTU size on the router or other equipment at their end of the private network. Setting the MTU value below 1500 bytes (for example 1326 bytes) has resolved the problem on some private networks.

If your AirLink device has a radio module (such as the MC7700 or MC7750) that supports LTE networks, select an option in ACEmanager (WAN/

Cellular > Advanced > Setting for Band field) that excludes LTE networks.

Radio Band Selection

I set the radio band in the UI (WAN/Cellular > Setting the Band) or by using the AT!BAND AT command, but after I reboot the band setting reverts to its former value.

For some SIM cards, you need to set the band before inserting the SIM card.

To resolve this problem:

1.

Remove the SIM card.

2.

Set the band to the desired value.

3.

Reboot the device.

4.

Insert the SIM card.

398 4114514

Reliable Static Routing (RSR)

I launched ACEmanager with Internet Explorer 9. I configured RSR, but after I enabled RSR and clicked Apply, all the values reverted to the defaults.

There is a known issue. If you configure and enable RSR with ACEmanager in

Internet Explorer 9, and then click Apply, the values in the ACEmanager screen appear as default values.

This is an ACEmanager display issue only. The configuration is applied properly, but the configured values are not displayed. Click Refresh to view the configured values.

Rev 1 Oct.13

399

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

400 4114514

Rev 1 Oct.13

G: Glossary of Terms

Acronym or Term

1xEV-DO

1X

3GPP

API

AT

CDG

CDMA cdmaOne

Definition

Single Carrier ( 1X ) EVolution–Data Only

A high-speed standard for cellular packet data communications. It supports Internet connections with data rates up to 3.1

Mbps

. (downlink from the network) and 1.8

Mbps (uplink to the network). Average data rates are approximately:

Rev. A: 600-1300

kbps

. (downlink from the network) and 300-400 kbps (uplink to the network)

Rev. 0: 400-700 kbps (downlink from the network) and 40-80 kbps (uplink to the network)

Actual speed depends on the network conditions. Compare to

1X

.

Single Carrier (1X) Radio Transmission Technology

A high-speed standard for cellular packet data communications.

1x supports Internet connections with data rates up to 153

kbps

(simultaneously in each direction—downlink and uplink). Actual speed depends on the network conditions. Compare to

1xEV-DO .

3 rd

Generation Partnership Project

3GPP unites 6 telecommunications standard development organizations (ARIB,

ATIS, CCSA, ETSI, TTA, TTC), and provides their members with a stable environment to produce Reports and Specifications that define 3GPP technologies.

Application Programming Interface

A protocol intended to be used as an interface by software components to communicate with each other.

A set of device commands, preceded by “AT” originally developed by Hayes, Inc. for their devices.

The structure (but not the specific commands, which vary greatly from manufacturer to manufacturer) is a de facto device industry standard.

CDMA Development Group

A consortium of companies who joined together to lead the adoption and evolution of CDMA wireless systems around the world.

Also see CDMA .

Code Division Multiple Access

A wideband spread spectrum technique used in digital cellular, personal communications services, and other wireless networks.

Wide channels (1.25 MHz) are obtained through spread spectrum transmissions, thus allowing many active users to share the same channel. Each user is assigned a unique digital code, which differentiates the individual conversations on the same channel.

A IS-95 CDMA standard developed by QUALCOMM Inc.

Also known as TIA-EIA-95.

G

401

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Acronym or Term

CE, CE Label

Definition

The CE label is a mandatory conformity marking for products placed on the market in the European Economic Area (EEA).

With the CE marking on a product, the manufacturer declares that the product conforms with the essential requirements of the applicable EC directives.

CnS

DCE

Diversity

EDGE

EIA

EMC

EMI

ERP

ESN

Ethernet

EU

Sierra Wireless’ proprietary Control and Status protocol interface

Data Communications Equipment

A device that sits between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and a data transmission circuit. Usually the DCE is a modem.

Antenna diversity, also called space diversity, is a scheme that uses two or more antennas to improve the quality and reliability of a wireless link.

Often, especially in urban and indoor environments, there is no clear line-of-sight

(LOS) between transmitter and receiver. Instead the signal is reflected along multiple paths before finally being received. Each bounce can introduce phase shifts, time delays, attenuations, and distortions that can destructively interfere with one another at the aperture of the receiving antenna.

Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution

A digital mobile phone technology that allows improved data transmission rates as a backward-compatible extension of GSM. EDGE is considered a pre-3G radio technology and is part of ITU's 3G definition.

Also known as Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS), or IMT Single Carrier (IMT-SC), or

Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution.

Electronics Industry Association

EIA was a standards and trade organization composed as an alliance of trade associations for electronics manufacturers in the United States.

They developed standards to ensure the equipment of different manufacturers was compatible and interchangeable. The EIA ceased operations on February 11, 2011, but the former sectors continue to serve the constituencies of EIA.

Electromagnetic Compatibility

The branch of electrical science which studies the unintentional generation, propagation and reception of electromagnetic energy with reference to the unwanted effects (Electromagnetic interference, or EMI) that such energy may induce.

Electromagnetic Interference

The disturbance that affects an electrical circuit due to either electromagnetic induction or electromagnetic radiation emitted from an external source

Effective Radiated Power

A standardized theoretical measurement of radio frequency (RF) energy. It is determined by subtracting system losses and adding system gains.

Electronic Serial Number

The unique first-generation serial number assigned to AirLink devices for use on the wireless network. Compare to

MEID .

Computer networking technologies for local area networks (LANs).

The European Union Organization of European countries.

402 4114514

Acronym or Term

EVDO

FCC

FW

GPRS

Definition

Enhanced Voice-Data Optimized or Enhanced Voice-Data Only (Ev-DO, EV,

EVDO, etc.).

A telecommunications standard for the wireless transmission of data through radio signals, typically for broadband Internet access. It uses multiplexing techniques including code division multiple access (CDMA) as well as time division multiplexing (TDM) to maximize both individual users' throughput and the overall system throughput.

Federal Communications Commission

The U.S. federal agency responsible for interstate and foreign communications.

The FCC regulates commercial and private radio spectrum management, sets rates for communications services, determines standards for equipment, and controls broadcast licensing.

Firmware

Software stored in ROM or EEPROM; essential programs that remains even when the system is turned off. Firmware is easier to change than hardware but more permanent than software stored on disk.

General Packet Radio Service

A packet-oriented mobile data service on 2G and 3G cellular communication systems.

GPRS was originally standardized by European Telecommunications Standards

Institute (ETSI) in response to the earlier CDPD and i-mode packet-switched cellular technologies. It is now maintained by the 3rd Generation Partnership

Project (3GPP).

GPS

GSM

HSPA

HSPA+

IC

IEC

Global Positioning System

A system that uses a series of 24 satellites to provide navigational data.

Global System for Mobile Communications (originally Groupe Spécial Mobile)

GSM is a standard developed by the European Telecommunications Standards

Institute (ETSI) to describe protocols for second generation (2G) digital cellular networks used by mobile phones

High Speed Packet Access

An amalgamation of two mobile telephony protocols: High Speed Downlink Packet

Access (HSDPA) and High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA).

This extends and improves the performance of existing 3rd generation mobile telecommunication networks utilizing the WCDMA protocols.

Also called evolved HSPA

This allows bit-rates to reach as high as 168 Mbit/s in the downlink and 22 Mbit/s in the uplink. An improved 3GPP standard.

Industry Canada

The government department responsible for overseeing and regulating wireless and communication technologies in Canada.

International Electrotechnical Commission

A non-governmental international standards organization that prepares and publishes International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies – collectively known as "electrotechnology.”

Rev 1 Oct.13

403

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Acronym or Term

IOTA

IS

Definition

Internet Over The Air

An automated feature, supported by some service providers, to perform account setup by making a connection to the CDMA network and using a secure Internet connection to download account parameters to the device.

Interim Standard

After receiving industry consensus, the TIA/EIA

forwards the standard to ANSI for approval.

IS-95

ITU kbps

LED

A 2G mobile telecommunications standard using CDMA to send voice, data and signaling data (such as a dialed telephone number) between mobile telephones and cell sites.

International Telecommunication Union

A specialized agency of the United Nations responsible for issues that concern information and communication technologies.

The ITU coordinates the shared global use of the radio spectrum, promotes international cooperation in assigning satellite orbits, and assists in the development and coordination of worldwide technical standards.

Kilobits per second

1000, not 1024, as used in computer memory size measurements of kilobytes.

Light Emitting Diode

A semiconductor diode that emits visible or infrared light.

LTE

Mbps

MEID

NAM

NV

OEM

OTAPA

OTASP

PCS

Long Term Evolution

High performance air interface for cellular mobile communication systems.

Millions of bits per second, or Megabits per second.

Mobile Equipment IDentifier

The unique second-generation serial number assigned to the device for use on the

wireless network. Compare to ESN

.

Number Assignment Module

Semi-permanent information stored in the device’s non-volatile memory, including the device’s Mobile Identification Number, the station class mark, Mobile Network

Operator code, and other cellular identifiers.

Essentially the phone number, it should be treated as confidential information and should not be disclosed to anyone other than the cellular service provider.

Non-Volatile (memory)

Original Equipment Manufacturer

A company that manufactures a product and sells it to a reseller.

Over the Air Parameter Administration

A way of distributing new software updates or configuration settings to devices like cellphones and set-top boxes.

Over the Air Service Provisioning. Also see OTAPA .

Personal Communications Services

A cellular communication infrastructure that uses a different frequency range than

AMPS.

404 4114514

Acronym or Term

PPP

PRI

Definition

Point to Point Protocol

An alternative communications protocol used between computers, or between computers and routers on the Internet. PPP is an enhanced SLIP. Also see

SLIP

.

Product Release Instructions

A file containing the settings used to configure devices for a particular service provider, customer, or purpose.

RF

RoHS

RS-232

Rx

SIM, SIM Card

SINR

SKU

SLIP

SMS

Radio Frequency

Restriction of use of Hazardous Substances mandated by EU Directive 2002/95.

A series of standards for serial binary single-ended data and control signals connecting between a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and a DCE (Data Circuitterminating Equipment). It is commonly used in computer serial ports.

Receive

Subscriber identity module or subscriber identification module.

An integrated circuit which securely stores the international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) and the related key used to identify and authenticate subscribers on mobile telephony devices (such as mobile phones and computers).

Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) is an RF parameter that is directly proportional to throughput (the higher the number, the higher the throughput). It can help LTE radio installers gauge the signal quality between the cell tower and the radio module. For more information on interpreting the SINR values, see

How do I obtain and interpret SINR values for LTE networks?

on page 397.

Stock Keeping Unit

Identifies an inventory item: a unique code, consisting of numbers or letters and numbers, assigned to a product by a retailer for purposes of identification and inventory control.

Serial Line Internet (or Interface) Protocol

An Internet Protocol designed to work over serial ports and modem connections.

On personal computers, SLIP has been largely replaced by the Point-to-Point

Protocol (PPP), which has more features and does not require its IP address configuration to be set before it is established. On microcontrollers SLIP is still the preferred way of encapsulating IP packets due to its very small overhead.

Also see

PPP .

Short Message Service

A feature which allows users of a wireless device on a wireless network to receive or transmit short electronic alphanumeric messages (up to 160 characters, depending on the service provider).

TIA / EIA

Telecommunications Industry Association / Electronics Industry Association

A standards setting trade organization, whose members provide communications and information technology products, systems, distribution services and professional services in the United States and around the world.

Transmit

Tx

Rev 1 Oct.13

405

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

Acronym or Term

UMTS

USB

Definition

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).

A third generation mobile cellular system for networks based on the GSM standard.

Developed and maintained by the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project),

UMTS is a component of the International Telecommunications Union IMT-2000 standard set and compares with the CDMA2000 standard set for networks based on the competing cdmaOne technology.

Universal Serial Bus

An industry standard defining the cables, connectors and communications protocols used in a bus for connection, communication and power supply between computers and electronic devices.

406 4114514

Index

A access points maximum number configurable for GX

90

mode

86

ACEmanager

146

configuring

18

description

13

login

17

overview

13

ACEview

286

ALEOS Application Framework

troubleshooting

383

unable to load application from

383

using

250

ALEOS software update

28

analog inputs channel configuration

324

transformed values

258

uses

253

APN

107

backup

119

applications

243

AT Commands

Applications > Data Usage

372

GPS > Server 1 - Server 4

353

I/O > Current State

371

LAN/WiFi > DHCP/Addressing

334

Security > Trusted IPs - Inbound

339, 344

Serial > Port Configuration

360

Services > Low Power

345

Status > Home

323, 366

summary

321 using

321

Wi-Fi

336

AVMS

configuration

145

error messages

393

C client mode

90

configuration

application

243

events reporting

207

GPS

185

LAN

67

logging

264

serial

221

services

145

VPN

123

WAN/Cellular

103

Wi-Fi

67

Rev 1 Oct.13

Connection not working

386

D data usage

243

Dead Peer Detection

127

Device Status Screen

183

DHCP/Addressing

70

Dial-up Networking

267

digital inputs

GX Series

254

LS300

254

uses

253

DMZ

137

DNS

dynamic

151

global

93

DNS proxy

configure

94

status

48, 50, 52, 54

documentation

14, 15

domain name

155

dual mode Wi-Fi

92

DUN

operating systems supported

267

setting up

267

E

EC/IO

45

email

SMTP

176

test

174

engine hours

212

error reporting, troubleshooting

384

ethernet

and DMZ

138

and host connection mode

72

AT commands

324

MAC address

65

status

55, 57

troubleshooting

381

troubleshooting LEDs

381

virtual port

80

ethernet ports

74

troubleshooting

381

events reporting configuration

207

F firmware update

28

G

Garmin

248

global DNS

93

Glossary

401

GPS

configuration

185

407

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide global settings

204

streaming

383

troubleshooting

383

GRE

128

H

Host Interface Watchdog

101

host port routing

38, 84

I

Internal DHCP Server

73

IP Manager

154

IPsec

123, 125

K

keepalive

116

L

LAN configuration

67

LAN management

37

LEDs, above Ethernet port

381

Load Root Certificate

132

Local/Streaming

198, 201

logging configuration

264

login

17

low power mode

147

LTE Band Class field

396

M

MAC filtering

142, 386

MIB (Management Information Base)

295

Modbus

234, 289

Modbus address list

234

Modbus TCP/IP

290

N network connection, poor

385

Network State

43

NMEA

186

O

Over the Air (OTA) connections

38

P packet inspection

143

PAD mode

22

password, change

261

PCI compliance

38

ping, on demand

263

port filtering

inbound

139

outbound

140

port forwarding

133

error message

382

troubleshooting

382

PPP connection, configuring

234

PPPoE

94

Programmable Logic Controller

290

public and private mode

67

pulse count

256

R

radio band, selecting

109, 398

radio module firmware update

28

radio passthru

263

RAP

186

re-activation

118

redundant server

196

relay outputs

254

Reliable Static Routing (RSR)

119

Remote Terminal Unit

289

reset periodic and time of day

263

reverse telnet/SSH

224

RSRP

44

RSRQ

45

RSSI

44

S security configuration

133

serial configuration

221

serial port port configuration

223

PPP

234

TCP

230

UDP

232

virtual

81

services configuration

145

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

177

SINR

397

SMS

157

advanced

173

Control and Gateway mode

164

Control Only mode

159

Gateway Only mode

161

M2M

174

Password

171

Password Only mode

158

password, default

172

Quick Test

174

security

169

test

174

troubleshooting

383

trusted phone number

171

SMS Commands

377

SMS M2M

174

SMS message error

383

SMS Wakeup

168

SNMP traps

295

SNTP

182

split tunnel

124

SSH

175

SSL tunnel

129

Status

About

64

408 4114514

Applications

64

GPS

60

Home

41

LAN

55

LAN/WiFi

56

Security

59

Serial

62

Services

59

VPN

58

WAN/Cellular

47

T

TAIP

186

TCP connection configuring

230

Device ID Not Set

394

settings

239

troubleshooting

393

telemetry

289

Telnet

175

template

applying

20

creating

19

test button, SMS/email

174

third party services

153

time (SNTP)

182

troubleshooting

ALEOS AF

383

ALEOS software update

386, 388, 389, 391,

392

AVMS error messages

393

AVMS status messages

395

Dual Ethernet X-Card

381

error reporting

384

ethernet ports

381

GPS

383

port forwarding

382

radio module firmware update

386, 387, 390,

SMS

383

392

TCP connections

394

VPN

384

Wi-Fi X-Card

382

wireless connection

385, 386

trusted IPs

inbound

140

outbound

142

Trusted Phone Number

171

U

UDP connection configuring

232

settings

241

UDP Multiple Unicast

227

update

ALEOS software

28 radio module firmware

28

USB drivers, installing

78

USB port

76

V

VLAN

99

VPN

configuration

123

troubleshooting

384

VPN 1 tunnel

124

VRRP

100

W

WAN/Cellular configuration

103

WEP encryption, troubleshooting

382

Wi-Fi

Access Point Mode

86

Both (AP + Client) Mode

92

Client Mode

90

dual mode

92

modes

85

troubleshooting

382

Wi-Fi configuration

67

WiFi Landing Page

157

X

X-Card applying template

20

configuration

235

Dual Ethernet

55, 65, 72, 76, 138

Dual Ethernet, AT command

324

Dual Ethernet, troubleshooting

381

I/O

211, 217, 254, 255

I/O serial port configuration

235

I/O, AT command

371

I/O, relay output and

256

Serial port

63

status

46 type

46

Wi-Fi

67, 72, 101, 157

Wi-Fi, AT command

338

Wi-Fi, troubleshooting

382

Index

Rev 1 Oct.13

409

ALEOS 4.3.4 Software Configuration User Guide

410 4114514

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents